Skip to main content

Full text of "The Sánkhya káriká"

See other formats


iitp  ||tofrluati0n 


: 


THE 

SANKHYA  KARIKA, 

BY 

ISWARA  KRISHNA; 

TRANSLATED  FKOM  THE  SANs(UUI 
HY 

HENRY  THOMAS  COLEBROOKE,  ESQ. 

Af.sO 
THE  BHAVSHYA,  f ";•«,  COMMENTARY  OF 

GAUDAPiDA; 


NiSLATKD,  AND  1LLU,SIKATK1>  BV  AU  vtiKJLNAt 

JJY 

HORACE  IIAIMAN  \VILSON,  M.A.i  [I 
PCBLISHED 

?,v 

MR.  TOOKARAM  TATYA, 
)30M1UV. 


1887. 


HUBBELHOEBER 


THE 

SANKHYA  KARIKA, 

BY 

1SWAKA  KRISHNA; 

TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  SANSCRIT 
BY 

HENRY  THOMAS  COLEBROOKE,  ESQ. 

ALSO 
THE  BHA'SHYA,  OR,  COMMENTARY  OF 

GAUDAPADA • 

TRANSLATED,  AND  ILLUSTRATED  BY  AN  ORIGINAL  COMMENT, 

BY 

HORACE  HAYMAN  WILSON,  M.A.F.R.S. 
PUBLISHED 

BY 
MB.  TOOKARAM  TATYA, 

BOMBAY. 

r  3  2       ' 


1887. 


t 


tOMEAY  .—  PKISTED  AT  THE  SUBOBIIA-PKAKASII  FKESS. 


SANKHYA  KARIKA 


OR 


THE  inquiry  is  into  the  means  of  precluding  the  three 
sorts  of  pain  ;  for  pain  is  embarrassment :  nor  is  the 
inquiry  superfluous  because  obvious  means  of  allevia 
tion  exist,  for  absolute  and  final  relief  is  not  thereby 
accomplished* 


fax  w 


:  1  7: 

i 


f  <r  ^^imi  i 


!  \ 


%fir  ii 


f|- 


(     3     ) 
t  T  \ 


B  NASHYA. 

Salutation  to  that  KAPILA  by  whom  the  Sdnkhya  philosophy 
was  compassionately  imparted,  to  serve  as  a  boat  for  the  purpose 
of  crossing  the  ocean  of  ignorance  in  which  the  world  was 
immersed. 

I  will  declare  compendiously  the  doctrine,  for  the  benefit  of 
students  ;  a  short  easy  work,  resting  on  authority,  and  establish 
ing  certain  results. 

Three  sorts  of  pain.  —  The  explanation  of  this  Ai*y&  stanza 
is  as  follows  : 

The  divine  KAPILA,.  the  son  of  BEAHMA  indeed  :  as  it  is  said, 
"  SANAKA,  SANANDANA,  and  SANATANA  the  third  ;  ASURI, 
KAPILA,  BORBU,.  and  PANCUASIKHA  :  these  seven  sons  of 
Brahma"  were  termed  great  sages/'  Together  with.  KAPILA 
were  born  Virtue-,  Knowledge,.  Dispassion,  and.  Power  :  for  he 
being  born,  and  observing  the  world  plunged  in  profound  dark 
ness  by  the  succeeding  series  of  worldly  revolutions,  was  filled, 
with  compassion  ;  and  to  his  kinsman,  the  Brahman  ASURI,  he 
communicated,  a  knowledge  of  the  TWENTY-FIVE  PRINCIPLES  ; 
from  which  knowledge  the  destruction  of  pain  proceeds.  As  it. 
is  said;  "He  who  knows  the  twenty-five  principles,  whatever 
"  order  of  life  he  imy  have  entered,  and,  whether  he  wear 
"  braided  hair,  a  top-knot  only,  or  be  shaven,  he  i$  liberated 
"(from  existence):  of  this  there  is  no-dpubt." 

The  inquiry  is  in  consequence  of  the  -  embarrassment'  of  '  the- 
three  sorts  of  pain.  In  this  place  the  three  sorts  of  pain  are,  1. 
(adhydtniika).  natural  and  inseparable;;  2,  (ddhibhautika) 
natural  and  extrinsic;  and  3.  (fclfiidamka)  non-natural  or, 
superb  uiaan,.  The  first  is  of  t  \yp  .kinds,  corporeal  a,nd  mental 


(     4     ) 

corporeal  is  flux,  fever,  or  the  like,  arising  from  disorder  of  the 
wind,  bile,  or  phlegm  :  mental  is  privation  of  what  is  liked, 
approximation  of  what  is  disliked.  *  Extrinsic  but  natural  paiu 
is  fourfold,  according  to  the  aggregation  or  elementary  matter 
whence  it  originates;  that  is,  it  is  produced  by  any  created  beings : 
whether  viviparous,  oviparous,  generated  by  heat  and  moisture, 
or  springing  from  the  soil ;  or  in  short,  by  men,  beasts,  tame  or 
wild  birds,  reptiles,  gnats,  musquitoes,  lice,  bugs,  fish,  alligators, 
sharks,  trees,  stones,  &c.  The  third  kind  of  pain  may  be  called 
superhuman,  daivika  meaning  either  divine  or  atmospheric  :  in 
the  latter  case  it  means  pain  which  proceeds  from  cold,  heat, 
wind,  rain,  thunderbolts,  and  the  like. 

Where  then,  or  into  what,  is  inquiry,  in  consequence  of  the 
embarrassment  of  three  kinds  of  pain,  to  be  made  ?  Into  the 
means  of  precluding  them.  This  is  the  inquiry.  Nor  is  the 
inquiry  superfluous.  That  is  ;  if  this  inquiry  be  (regarded  as) 
superfluous,  the  means  of  precluding  the  three  sorts  of  paiu 
being  obvious  (seen) ;  as  for  example ;  the  internal  means  of 
alleviating  the  two  inseparable  kinds  of  pain  are  obvious, 
through  the  application  of  medical  science,  as  by  pungent, 
bitter,  and  astringent  decoctions,  or  through  the  removal  of 
t/hose  objects  that  are  disliked,  and  accession  of  those  that  are 
liked ;  so  the  obvious  obstruction  of  pain  from  natural  causes 
is  protection  and  the  like  ;  and  these  means  being  obvious,  any 
(farther)  inquiry  is  superfluous  ;  if  you  think  in  this  manner,  it 
is  not  so ;  for  absolutej  certain,  final,  permanent,  obstruction 
(of  pain)  is  not  (to  be  effected)  by  obvious  means.  Therefore 
inquiry  is  to  be  made  by  the  wise  elsewhere,  or  into  means  of 
prevention  which  are  absolute  and  final 

COMMENT, 

The  first  verse  of  the  Kdrikd  proposes  the  subject  of  the 
\vork,  and  not  only  of  that,  but  of  the  system  to  which  it 
belongs,  and  of  every  philosophical  system  studied  by  the 


(     5     ) 

Hindus ;  the  common  end  of  which  is,  ascertainment  of  the 
means  by  which  perpetual  exemption  from  the  metempsychosis, 
or  from  the  necessity  of  repeated  births,  may  be  attained :  for 
life  is  uniformly  regarded  by  the  Hindus  as  a  condition  of  pain 
and  suffering,  as  a  state  of  bondage  and  evil;  escape  from 
which  finally  and  for  ever  is  a  consummation  devoutly  to  be 
wished. 

The  liberation  thus  proposed  as  the  object  of  rational  exis 
tence  cannot  be  attained  as  long  as  man  is  subject  to  the 
ordinary  infirmities  of  his  nature,  and  the  accidents  of  his 
condition:  and  the  primary  object  of  philosophical  inquiry 
therefore  is,  the  means  by  which  the  imperfections  flesh  is  heir 
to  may  be  obviated  or  removed.  As  preparatory  then  to  their 
right  determination,  it  is  first  shewn  in  the  text  what  means 
are  not  conducive  to  this  end  ;  such,  namely,  as  obvious  but 
temporary  expedients,  whether  physical  or  moral. 

Of  this  introductory  stanza  Professor  Lassen,  in  the  first 
number  of  his  Gymnosophista,  containing  the  translation  of 
the  Ifdrikd,  has  given  a  version  differing  in  some  respects 
from  Mr.  Colebrooke's,  He  thus  renders  it :  "  E  tergeminorum 
dolorum  impetu  oritur-desiderium  cognoscendse  rationis,  qua  ii 
depellantur.  Quod  cogrioscendi  desiderium  licet  in  visibilibus 
rebus  infructuose  versetur,  non  est  (infructuosum)  propter 
absentiam  absoluti,  et  omni  aevo  superstitis  rernedii." 

In  the  first  member  of  this  sentence,  the  translation  of 
abhighdta  by  '  impetus'  is  irreconcilable  with  the  context.  The 
sense  required  by  the  doctrine  laid  down  is  *  impediment, 
embarrassment,  the  prevention  of  liberation  by  worldly  cares 
and  sufferings.'  So  the  same  word  abhighdtaka  is  immediately 
used  to  mean  '  preventing,  removing/  '  depellens,"  Professor 
Lassen's  text,  it  is  true,  reads  apagbdtaka,  but  this  is  not  the 
reading  followed  by  Mr.  Colebrooke,  nor  that  of  the  citation  of 
the  text  given  in  the  Sdnkhyu  Bhdshya  or  Sdnkhya  Kaiimudi ;  it 
is  that  of  the  S.  Tat  iff  a  Kaiimudi  and  8.  Chandrikd&nd  although 
in  itself  unobjectionable,  yet  is  not  a  necessary  nor  preferable 


(     6     ) 

variation.  At  any  rate  there  can  be  no  question  that  the  word 
abhighdia  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of '  depellere/  and  that 
sense  therefore  equally  attaches  to  it  in  the  prior,  member  of 
the  hemistich.  So  in  the  Bhdshya  of  GAURAPADA  we  have 
ddhibhautikasya  raJcshddina  abhighdtah;  l  The  prevention  of 
'  extrinsic  pain  is  by  protection  and  the  like/  It  would  not  be 
possible  here  to  render  abhiyhdta  by  '  impetus.'  By  VACHAS- 
PATI  the  term  abhighdta  is  denned  'the  confinement  of  the 
sentient  faculty  (explained  to  mean  here  c  life'),  through  the 
impediment  opposed  by  threefold  distress  abiding  in  spirit.'* 
NARAYANA  interprets  it  more  concisely  asahya  sambandha,-^ 
'  intolerable  restraint.'  *  Embarrassment'  therefore  sufficiently 
well  expresses  the  purport  of  these  definitions,  or  the  obstruc 
tions  offered  by  worldly  sufferings  to  the  spirit  anxious  to 
be  free. 

This  variation,  however,  is  of  no  great  consequence  :  the  more 
important  difference  is  in  the  secjorxd  portion  of  the  stanza ; 
and  as  Professor  Lassen  has  deviated  advisedly  from  Mr. 
Colebrooke,  it  is  necessary  to  examine  the  passage  more  in 
detail.  The  following  are  his  reasons  for  the  version  he  has 
made : 

"  HaBC  posterioris  versus  (di*is}it6  etc.)  interpretatio,  sicuti 
scholiastarum  suffragiis  probatur,  a  grammatica  postulatur. 
Quod  ideo  moneo,  ne  leviter  rationem,  a  Colebrookio,  V. 
summo,  in  hoc  versu  enarrando  initam  deseruisse  censear.  Is 
enim  :  'nor  is  the  inquiry  superfluous,  because  obvious  means 
of  alleviation  exist :  for  absolute  and  final  relief  is  not  thereby 
accomplished.'  Sed  vereover^  ne  vir  summus  constructionem 
particu!0e  chet  sententiam  claudentis  et  a  negatione  excepta3 
male  intellexerit.  De  qua  re  dixi  ad  Hitop.  procem.  d.  28, 
Ex  interpret.  Colebrook.  construendum  esset :  drishte  sc. 
sati  (1.  e.  yadyapi  drishtam  vidyate)  sd  (jijndsd) 


(    7    ) 

aparthd  na  ekdnt — abhdvdt  .*  Sed  tit  omittarn,  particulse 
chef,  nullum  omnino  relinqui  locum  in  sententia,  na  inop 
portune  versus  loco  collocatum  'esse,  non  potes  quin  coricedas. 
Male  omnino  se  habet  tota  sententia  et  clautlrcat.  Equidem 
construe :  drishte  sd  (  jijndsd)  updrthd  (bkavati)  diet  (tathdpi) 
na  (apdrthd  bhavati)  vkantd' — ubhwvdt.t  Prorsus  siniili-ter 
dicitur  ndbhdmt  infr.  v.  8.  Ablativum  igitur  ekdntyatyantoh 
abhdvdt,  non  ad  drishte  refero  cum  Colebrookio,  sed  ad  nega- 
tionem  quse  cum  supplementis  suis  aspodosm  constituit.  N-ain 
quse  post  chemid  sequuntur  verba,  ad  apodosin  pertinere  sem 
per  observavi.  Quam  grammatica  postulare  videtur,  patitur 
prseterea  loci  tenor  enarrationem,  imo  melior  evadit  sententia. 
Ad  drishte  enim  rektis  istis  verbis,  id  tantum  dicitur,  rerum 
visibilium  cognitione  non  attingi  J?osse  philosophise  finem, 
liberationem  absolutam  «t  perpetuam  a  doloribus  ;  mea  posita 
enarratione  non  id  tantum  docetur,  sed  additur  etiam  hoc : 
finern  istum  posse  attingi,  licet  alio  cognitionis  genere.  Tres 
omnino  positiones  altero  hemistichii  versu  oontineatur  •:  phi 
losophise  (id  enim  valet  gigndsd,  i.  e.  cognitionis  desiderium) 
finem  esse  emancipationem  a  doloribus  certam  et  omne  tempus 
transgredientem ;  deinde  ad  eum  non  perveniri  ea  via  quae 
primum  initur,  quia  obvia  quasi  sit,  i.  e.  remediorum  a  sensi- 
bilibus  rebus  petitorum  ope ;  denique  ea  remedia  cognoscendi 
desideriuin  posse  expleri.  Sed  aliter  atque  Colebrookius  hasce 
sententias  inter  se  conjungit  noster,  et  per  conditionem  etfert, 
quod  ille  per  negationern  enuntiat." 

In  this  view  of  the  meaning  of  the  verse,  there  is  a  refine 
ment  that  does  not  belong  to  it,  and  which  is  not  Indian  : 
arguments  are  often  elliptically  and  obscurely  stated  in  Sanscrit 
dialectics,  but  one  position  at  a  time  is  usually  sufficient  for 
even  Brahmanical  subtlety.  The  only  position  here  advanced 


t  s   ^r  ( r^mr )  arqr^r  ( ^r^  )  ^  ( rmuPr )  *  ( ^nnfr 
) 


(     8     ) 

is,* that  the  cure  of  worldly  evil  is  riot  to  be  effected  by  such 
remedies  as  are  of  obvious  and  ordinary  application,  as  they 
can  only  afford  temporary  relief.  Death  itself  is  no  exemption 
from  calamity,  if  it  involves  the  obligation  of  being  born  again, 

The  version  proposed  by  Professor  Lasseh  rests  upon  his 
notion  of  the  grammatical  force  of  the  expression  chenna  or  chet, 
*  if,'  na,  '  not :'  the  former  he  would  refer  to  the  prior  member 
of  the  sentence,  the  latter  to  the  subsequent  expressions. 
But  this  division  of  the  compound  is  riot  that  which  is  most 
usual  in  argumentative  writings.  The  phrase  is  an  elliptical 
negation  of  a  preceding  assertion,  diet  referring  to  what  has 
been  said,  implying,  '  if  you  assert  or  belive  this ;'  and  no, 
meeting  it  with  a  negator,  '  it  is  not  so  :'  then  follows  the 
reason  or  argument  of  the  denial.  Thus  in  the  Mtiktdvali : 
4  But  why  should  not  Darkness  be  called  a  tenth  thing,  for  it 
is  apprehended  by  perception  ?  If  this  be  said,  it  is  not  so  (iti 
chdn-na)  ;  for  it  is  the  consequence  of  the  non-existence  of 
absolute  light,  and  it  would  be  illogical  to  enumerate  it 
amongst  things.'*  So  in  the  Ny&ya  Sutra  Vritti :  '  If  by  a 
disturbance  in  the  assembly  there  be  no  subsequent  speech, 
and  through  the  want  of  a  reply  there  be  defeat ;  if  this  be 
urged)  it  is  not  so  (iti  chen-na),  because  there  has  been  no 
opportunity  for  an  answer.'t  Again  in  the  Sankhya  Pravackana 
Bh&shya.  Sutra  : — '  If  it  be  said  that  Prakrit!  is  the  cause 
of  bondage,  it  is  not  so>  from  its  dependent  state.'J  Comment : 
— '  But  bondage  may  be  occasioned  by  Prakriti.  If  this  be 
asserted,  it  is  not  so.  Why  ?  Because  in  the  relation  of 
bondage,  Prakriti  is  dependent  upon  conjunction,  as  will  be 


(      9      ) 

explained  in  the  following  precept.'*  Also  in  the  Veddnta 
Sara  Vivriti  :  '  If  in  consequence  of  such  texts  of  the  Ve'das 
as  "  let  sacrifice  be  performed  as  long  as  life  endures"  their 
performance  is  indispensable,  and  constant  and  occasional  rites 
must  be  celebrated  by  those  engaged  in  the  attainment  of 
true  knowledge  ;  and  if,  on  the  other  hand,  the  attainment  of 
true  knowledge  is  distinct  from  the  observance  of  ceremonies  ; 
then  a  double  duty  is  incumbent  on  those  wishing  to  eschew 
the  world.  If  this  be  asserted,  it  is  not  so  (iti  chen^na},  from 
the  compatibility  of  several  ty  with  union,  as  in  the  case  of 
articles  of  khayra  or  other  wood  :'~j*  that  is,  where  there  are 
several  obligations,  that  which  is  most  essential  may  be  select 
ed  from  the  rest.  In  the  same  work  we  have  an  analogous 
form  used  affirmatively  ;  as,  '  But  how  by  the  efficacy  of 
knowledge,  after  the  dissipation  of  ignorance,  in  regard  to  the 
object  (of  philosophy),  can  the  true  nature  of  the  essentially 
happy  (being)  be  attained  ?  for  as  he  is  eternally  existent, 
knowledge  is  not  necessary  to  establish  his  existence.  If  this 
be  asserted,  it  is  true  (iti  chet\  scitycim).  Brahme,  one 
essentially  with  felicity,  is  admitted  to  be  eternal*  but  in  a 
state  of  ignorance  he  is  not  obtained  •  like  a  piece  of  gold 
which  is  forgotten  (and  sought  for),  whilst  it  is  hanging  round 
the  neck.'J  Here  it  would  be  impossible  to  refer  sati/am  to 
the  succeeding  member  of  the  sentence,  as  the  apodosis  being 
separated  from  it$  not  only  by  the  sense,  but  by  the  particle 
opi.  Passages  of  this  description  might  be  indefinitely 


cm:  sr- 
q?r;  i 
w     ^^^r?^  i  rr- 


multiplied,  but  these  are  sufficient  to  shew  that  the  con 
struction  in  the  sense  adopted  by  Mr.  Colebrooke  is  common 
and  correct. 

Accordingly  his  version  is  uniformly  supported  scholiastarum 
suffragiis.  Thus  in  the  Sankya  Bhdshya,  as  we  have  seen,  the 
passage  is  explained,  dri&hte  sd>  apdrtha  chei  evam  manyase  ncc 
ekdnta,  &c. ;  *  If  by  reason  of  there  being  obvious  remedies,  you 
think  indeed  the  inquiry  superfluous,  no  (it  is  not  so),  frorpf 
their  not  being  absolute  and  permanent/  So  in  the  Sankyct 
Tatica  Kauinudt,  after  stating  the  objection  at  length,  the  com 
mentator  adds,  nirdJcaroti,  na  iti ;  '  (the  author)  refutes  it  (by 
saying),  no,  not  so  :'  kutah,  '  why'  ?  ekdntatyantatah  abhdrdt* 
.The  Sankhra  Chandrikdis  to  the  same  effect,  or  still  more  ex 
plicit  :  '  There  being  obvious  means,  the  inquiry  is  superfluous, 
the  conclusion  being  otherwise  attained  :  if  (this  be  urged)  such 
is  the  meaning  (of  the  text),  (the  author)  contradicts  it ;  no,  it  is 
not  so.f  This  commentator  giving  the  very  reading,  drishte 
sati,  which  Professor  Lassen  argues  Mr.  Colebrooke's  version 
would  erroneously  require.  The  remaining  scholiast,  RAMA 
KRISHNA,  adopts  the  comment  of  the  Chandrikd  word  for  word, 
and  consequently  the  commentators  are  unanimous  in  support 
of  the  translation  of  Mr.  Colebrooke. 

With  respect  to  the  passages  referred  to  by  Professor  Lassen 
as  establishing  the  connection  of  the  negative  with  the  latter 
member  of  the  sentence,  instead  of  its  being  absolute,  it  will 
be  seen  at  once  that  they  are  not  at  all  analogous  to  the 
passage  in  our  text.  They  are  declaratory,  not  argumentative  ; 
and  the  terms  following  the  negative  particle  are  the  parts  or 
circumstances  of  the  negative,  not  the  reasons  on  which  it  is 
grounded.  Thus  in  the  Hitopadesa  :  '  What  will  not  be,  will 


t  tfe  sfa 


(  11  ) 

not  be;  if  it  will  be,  it  will  not  be  otherwise.'*  So  in  v.  8.  of 
the  Rdrikd:  '  The  non-apprehension  of  nature  is  from  its 
subtlety,  not  from  its  nonentity!.'  In  neither  of  these  is  there 
any  reference  to  a  foregone  position  which  mast  be  admitted  or 
denied,  nor  is  the  negative  followed  by  the  reasons  for  denial, 
as  is  the  case  in  our  text. 

These  considerations  are  more  than  sufficient  to  vindicate, 
what  it  was  scarcely  perhaps  necessary  to  .have  asserted,  Mr 
Colebrooke's  accuracy  ;  and  they  are  now  also  somewhat  super 
fluous,  as  I  have  been  given  to  understand  that  Professor 
Lassen  acknowledges  the  correctness  of  his  interpretation.  The 
commentary  of  GAURAPADA  distinctly  shews  that  nothing  more 
is  intended  by  the  text,  than  the  unprofitableness  of  recourse 
to  visible  or  worldly  expedients  for  the  relief  or  removal  of 
worldly  pain.  In  subjoining  therefore  the  gloss  of  VACHESPATI 
MISRA,  with  a  translation,  it  is  intended  rather  to  illustrate  the 
doctrines  of  the  text,  and  the  mode  of  their  development  by 
native  scholiasts,  than  further  to  vindicate  the  correctness  of  the 
translation. 

'  j  But  verily  the  object  of  the  science  may  not  need   inquiry, 
1.  if  there  be  no  pain  in  the  world  ;  2.  if  there  be  no  desire  to 


#  ?K^n   =T  fr3Ti    *?rr3^rr^?pir  t 
t  ?ftwro?TB(fert  ci^irer^  i 

J  ^  ffc  =f  ^irerfsreqt  fasrr^r  3fr  ^  *m  snnft  *  &\^  \  s^r  * 
sraw  sg^ti  aro^ss^ar  ^  l^rr  \  i^- 
?i5^dft^rn?nrf?irr?rr5r  i 

i    ^frqr?TT-cTr^  ff^rerg   i 


fcr  i 


vrr  i 


(     12     ) 

£,void  it ;  3.  if  there  be  no  means  of  extirpating  it.  The  im 
possibility  of  extirpating  it  is  twofold  ;  either  from  the  eternity 
of  pain,  or  from  ignorance  of  the  means  of  alleviation :  or, 
though  it  be  possible  to  extirpate  pain,  yet  that  knowledge 
which  philosophy  treats  of  may  not  be  the  means  of  its  re 
moval  ;  or  again,  there  may  be  some  other  and  more  ready 
means.  In  the  text,  however,  it  is  not  said  that  pain  does  not 
exist,  nor  that  there  is  no  wish  to  avoid  it.  From  the  embar 
rassment  of  the  three  kinds  qf  pain. — A  triad  of  pain,  three 
kinds :  they  are  the  ddhydtmika,  '  Natural ;'  ddhibhautika 
1  extrinsic ;'  and  dcfhidaivika,  '  superhuman.'  The  first  is  of  two 
kinds,  bodily  and  mental  :  bodily  is  caused  by  disorder  of  the 
)mmours,  wind,  bile,  anc}  phlegm ;  mental  is  occasioned  by 
desire,  wrath,  coyetousness,  fear,  e^vy,  grief,  and  want  of  dis 
crimination.  These  various  kinds  pf  pain  are  called  insepar 
able,  from  their  admitting  of  internal  remedies.  The  pain 
that  requires  external  remedies  is  also  twofolcj,  &dhib1iautika  and 
adhidaivika.  The  first  has  for  its  cause,  man,  beasts,  deer, 
birds,  reptiles,  and  Jp animate  things  ;  the  second  arises  from 
the  evil  influence  of  the  planets,  or  possession  by  impure  spirits 
(Yakshas,  Hdkshasctt,  Pwdyakas  i&c.).  TJiese  kinds  of  pain 
depending  upon  the  vicissitudes  arising  froin  the  quality  of 
foulness,  are  to  be  experienced  by  every  individual,  and  cannot, 
be  prevented.  Through  the  obstruction  occasioned  by  the 
three  kinds  of  pain  abiding  in  spirit,  arises  embarrassment,  or 


(     13     ) 

confinement  of  the  sentient  faculty.  The  capability  of  know 
ing  the  impediment  occasioned  by  such  pain,  is  considered 
the  cause  of  the  desire  to  avoid  it ;  for  though  pain  may  not  be 
prevented,  yet  it  is  possible  to  overcome  it,  as  will  be  subse 
quently  explained.  Pain  then  being  generated,  inquiry  is  to 
be  made  into  the  means  of  its  removal.  Tad  apayhdtake :  tad 
refers  here  to  the  three  kinds  of  pain,  tad  having  the  relation 
dependent  upon  its  being  used  as  subordinate  (relative)  term. 
The  means  (hetu)  of  removing — These  are  to  be  derived  from 
philosophy,  not  from  any  other  source :  this  is  the  position  (of 
the  text).  To  this  a  doubt  is  objected  ;  As  there  are  obvious 
•means,  the  inquiry  is  superfluous  ;  if  so — .  The  sense  is  this  : 
"Beit  admitted  that  there  are  three  kinds  of  pain;  that  the 
rational  being  wishes  to  escape  from  them  ;  that  escape  is 
practicable  ;  and  that  means  attainable  through  philosophy  are 
adequate  to  their  extirpation  ;  still  any  investigation  by  those 
who  look  into  the  subject  is  needless  ;  for  there  do  exist  obvious 
(visible)  means  of  extirpation,  which  are  easily  attainable, 
whilst  the  knowledge  of  philosophical  principles  is.  difficult  of 
attainment,  and  to  be  acquired  only  by  long  study,  aud  tradi 
tional  tuition  through  many  generations.  Therefore,  acoortlin  g 
to  the  popular  saying,  "  Why  should  a  man  who  may  find 
honey  in  the  arkka  flower,  go  for  it  to  the  mountain  ?"  so  wluvt 
wise  man  will  give  himself  unnecessary  trouble,  when  he  has 
attained  the  object  of  his  wishes,  Hundreds  of  remedies  for 


i  mi  ^ 

n  w*<\ 


(     14     ) 

bodily  affections  are  indicated  by  eminent  physicians.  The 
pleasures  of  sense,  women,  wine,  luxuries,  unguents,  dress, 
ornaments,  are  the  easy  means  of  obviating  mental  distress. 
So  in  regard  to  extrinsic  pain,  easy  means  of  obviating  it  exist 
in  the  skill  acquired  by  acquaintance  with  moral  and  politieal 
science,  and  by  residing  in  safe  and  healthy  places,  and  the 
like ;  whilst  the  employment  of  gems  and  charms  readily 
counteracts  the  evils  induced  by  superhuman  agency.  This  is 
the  objection.  (The  author)  refutes  it ;  it  is  not  so.  Why  ? 
From  these  means  not  being  absolute  or  final.  Ekanta  means 
the  certainty  of  the  cessation  of  pain  ;  atyantd,  the  non- 
recurrence  of  pain  that  has  ceased.  (In  obvious  means  of  relief 
there  is)  the  non-existence  of  botli  these  properties  ;  the  affix 
tasi,  which  may  be  substituted  for  all  inflexions,  being  here  put 
for  the  sixth  case  dual ; — as  it  is  said  ;  "  From  not  observing 
the  (invariable)  cessation  of  pain  of  various  kinds,  in  conse 
quence  of  the  employment  of  ceremonies,  drugs,  women,  moral 
and  political  studies,  charms,  and  the  like,  their  want  of  certain 
operation  (is  predicated) ;  so  is  their  temporary  influence,  from 
observing  the  recurrence  of  pain  that  had  been  suppressed. 
Although  available,  therefore,  the  obvious  means  of  putting  a 
stop  to  pain  are  neither  absolute  nor  final,  and  consequently 
this  iuquiry  (into  other  means)  is  not  superfluous."  This  is 
the  purport  (of  the  text).' 

The  Sdnkhya  Cliandrika  and  8.  Kaumudi  are  both  to  the  same 
effect,  and  it  is  unnecessary  to  cite  them.  The  original  Sutras 
of  KAPILA,  as  collected  in  the  8.  PravacJiana,  and  commented 
on  by  VIJGNYA'NA  BHIKSHU,  confirm  the  view  taken  by  the 
scholiasts. 


fsrsrrafir  u 


(     15     ) 

Sutra : — '  The  final  cessation  of  the  three  kinds  of  pain  is 
the  final  object  of  soul.*' 

Comment : — '  The  final  cessation  of  these  three  kinds  of  pain, 
the  total  cessation  of  universal  pain,  whether  gross  or  subtle 
(present  or  to  come),  is  the  final,  supreme  object  of  soul  f 

Sutra : — '  The  accomplishment  of  that  cessation  is  not  from 
obvious  means,  from  the  evident  recurrence  (of  pain)  after 
suppression.  J' 

Comment : — '  The  accomplishment  of  the  final  cessation  o£ 
pain  is  not  (to  be  effected)  by  worldly  means,  as  wealth,  and 
the  4ike.  "Whence  is  this  ?  Because  that  pain  of  which  the 
cessation  is  procured  by  wealth  and  the  like  is  seen  to  occur 
again,  when  that  wealth  and  the  rest  are  exhausted. '§ 


II. 

THE  revealed  mode  is  like  the  temporal  one,  ineffec- 
tual>  for  it  is  impure  ;  and  it  is  defective  in  some 
respects,  as  well  as  excessive  in  others.  A  method 
different  from  both  is  preferable,  consisting  in  a  dis 
criminative  knowledge  of  perceptible  principles,  and 
of  the  imperceptible  one,  and  of  the  thinking  soul. 


(     16     ) 


\ 


fl 


T 


r% 


*r 


(     17    ) 

:  i  <rer  5f<Rnfr  fatrw* 


t  I 


BHASHYA. 

Altliough  the  inquiry  is  to  be  directed  to  other  than  to  ot)vij 
ous  remedies,  yet  iu  is  not  to  be  directed  to  such  as  are  deri 
vable  from  revelation,  as  means  of  removing  the  three  kinds 
of  pain.  Anusravati,  '  what  man  successively  hears  ;'  anusra- 
vika,  '  that  which  is  thence  produced,  revealed  mode  ;'  that  is, 
established  by  the  Vedas  :  as  it  is  said  ;  "  "We  drank  the  juice  of 
the  acid  asclepias  ;  we  became  immortal  ;  we  attained  efful 
gence  ;  we  know  divine  things,  What  harm  can  a  foe  inflict 
on  us  ?  How  can  decay  affect  an  immortal  ?"  (This  text  of 
the  Veda  refers  to)  a  discussion  amongst  Indra  and  other  gods, 
as  to  how  they  became  immortal.  In  explanation  it  was  said, 
"  we  were  drinkers  of  soma  juice,  and  thence  became  immortal," 
that  is,  gods  *  further^  "  We  ascended  to,  or  attained  effulgence, 
or  heaven;  we  knew  divine,  celestial,  things.  Hence  then, 
assuredly,  what  can  an  enemy  do  to  us  ?  What  decay  can 
affect  an  immortal  ?"  dlmrtti  meaning  '  decay'  or  *  injury  :' 
'  What  can  it  do  to  an  immortal  being  ?' 

It  is  also  said  in  the  Vedas,  that  final  recompense  is  obtained 
by  animal  sacrifice  :  "  He  who  offers  the  ashwamedha  conquers 
all  worlds,  overcomes  death,  and  erpiates  all  sin,  even  the 
3 


(     18     ) 

murder  of  a  Brahman."     As,  therefore,  final  and  absolute  con 
sequence  is  prescribed  in  the  Vedas,  inquiry  (elsewhere)   should 
be    superfluous ;    but  this   is  not  the  case.     The  text   says,  the! 
revealed   mode    is  like   the     temporal    one — drislitavat ;    '  like,- 
same  as  the  temporal/  drifihtena  tiilya,.     What  is  that  revealed 
mode,  and  whence  is  it    (ineffectual)  ?     It   is   impure,  defective 
in   some   respects,  and   excessive  in  others.     It  is  impure  from 
(enjoining)  animal  sacrifices  ;  as,  "  according  to  tlie  ritual  of  the 
ashwamedha,    six   hundred   horses,  minus  three,   are  offered  at 
midday."     For  though    that  is  virtue  which  is  enjoined  by  the 
Vedas  and  laws,  yet,  from    its  miscellaneous   character,   it  may 
be  affected  by  impurity.     It  is  also  said  ;  "  Many  thousands  of 
Iiidras  and  otter   gods  have  passed  away   in   successive   ages, 
overcome   by  time ;   for  time  is    hard   to   overcome."     Hence 
therefore,  as  even  Indra  and  the  gods  perish,  the  revealed  mode 
involves  defective   cessation  of  pain.     Excess  is  also  one   of  its 
properties,  and  pain  is  produced   by  observing  the  superior   ad 
vantages  of  others.  Here,  therefore,  by  excess,  atisayci  is  under 
stood   the   unequal   distribution  of   temporal   rewards,  as   the 
consequence  of  sacrifice ;  the  object  of  the  ritual  of  the   Vedas 
being  in  fact  in  all  cases  temporal  good.     Therefore  the  reveal 
ed  mode  is  like  the  temporal  aiie,     What  then  is  the  preferable 
mode  ?     If  this  be  asked,  it  is  replied,  One  different  from   both, 
A   mode   different   from  both   the   temporal   and  revealed   is 
preferable,  being  free  from  impurity,  excess,  or  deficiency.  How 
is  this  ?     It  is  explained  (in  the  text ::  It  consists  in  a  discrltni- 
native  knowledge  &c.     Here,   by  perceptible  principles,  are   in 
tended    Mahat   and   the   rest,    or   Intellect,  Egotism,  the   five 
subtile  rudiments,  the  eleven  organs  (of  perception  and  action), 
and   the   five   gross    elements.      The     imperceptible     one   is 
Pradhana  (the  chief  or  great  one).    The  thinking  soitl,  Purnsha 
(the  incorporeal).     These  twentyfive  principles  are  intended  by 
the  (three)  terms   ryakla,  a-vyakta,  and/wa.     In  discriminative 
knowledge  of  these  consists  the   preferable  mode  ;  and   he  who 
knows  them   knows  the  twenty-five   principles  (he  has   perfect 
knowledge). 


(     19     ) 

The  difference  between  the  perceptible,  and  imperceptible, 
and  thinking  principles,  is  next  explained, 

COMMENT. 

Having  taught  that  worldly  means  of  overcoming  worldly 
evil  are  ineffectual,  it  is  next  asserted  that  devotional  remedies, 
such  as  the  rites  enjoined  by  the  Vedas,  are  equally  unavail 
ing  ;  and  knowledge  of  the  three  parts  or  divisions  of  existence 
material  and  spiritual,  is  the  only  mode  by  which  exemption 
from  the  infirmities  of  corporeal  being  can  be  attained. 

The  Vedas  are  inefficient,  from  their  inhumanity  in  pre 
scribing  the  shedding  of  blood  ;  the  rewards  which  they  propose 
are  also  but  temporary,  as  the  gods  themselves  are  finite  beings, 
perishing  in  each  periodical  revolution.  The  immortality  spok 
en  of  in  the  Vedas  is  merely  a  'long  duration,  or  until  a 
dissolution  of  the  existent  forms  of  things*.  The  Vedas  also 
cause,  instead  of  curing  pain,  as  the  blessings  they  promise  to 
one  man  over  another  are  sources  of  envy  and  misery  to  those 
who  do  not  possess  them.  Such  is  the  sense  given  by  GTAUKA- 
PADA  to  dtisaya,  and  the  Sankhya  Tatwa  Kaumudi  understands  it 
also  to  imply  the  unequal  apportionment  of  rewards  by  the  Vedas 
themselves  :  '  The  jyotishtoma  and  other  rites  secure  simply 
heaven  ;  the  vajapeya  and  others  confer  the  sovereignty  of  hea 
ven  :  this  is  being  possessed  of  the  property  of  excess  (iii- 
equality)!.' 

In  like  manner,  the  original  aphorism  of  KAPIJLA  affirms  of 
these  two  modes,  the  temporal  and  revealed,  that  there  '  is  no 
diiference  between  them/]:  and  that  *  escape  from  pain  is  not 
the  consequence  of  the  latter/  1|  because  '  recurrence  is  neverthe- 


*rrT*ra  n 


(     20     ) 

less  the  result  of  that  immunity  which  is  attainable  by  acts  (of 
devotion),'*  as  *  the  consequences  of  acts  are  not  eternal.'f 
Here  however  a  dilemma  occurs,  for  the  Veda  also  says,  '  There 
is  no  return  (regeneration)  of  one  who  has  attained  the  sphere 
of  Brahma  by  acts  (of  devotion).'^  This  is  explained  away 
by  a  Sutra  of  Kapila,  which  declares  that  the  Veda  limits  the 
non-regeneration  of  one  who  has  attained  the  region  of  Brahma 
to  him  who,  when  there,  acquires  discriminative  wisdom.§ 

This  discriminative  wisdom  is  the  accurate  discrimination  of 
those  principles  into  which  all  that  exists  is  distributed  by  the 
Sdnkhya  philosophy.  Vyakta, '  that  which  is  perceived,  sensible, 
discrete  ;'  Avyakta, '  that  which  is  unperceived,  indiscrete  ;'  and 
Jna,  *  that  which  knows,  or  discriminates  :'  the  first  is  matter 
in  its  perceptible  modifications ;  the  second  is  crude,  unmodified 
matter ;  and  the  third  is  soul.  The  object  of  the  S&nkhya 
Karika  is  to  define  and  explain  these  three  things,  the  correct 
knowledge  of  which  is  of  itself  release  from  worldly  bondage, 
and  exemption  from  exposure  to  human  ills,  by  the  final  sepa 
ration  of  soul  from  body. 


Cs 


III, 

NATURE,  the  root  (of  all),    is  no  production.     Seven 
principles,    the     Great   or   intellectual    one,    &c.,    are 
productions  and  productive.     Sixteen  are  productions 
(unproductive).     Soul  is  neither  a  production  nor  pro 
ductive. 


f  ft 


t:  fairlp 


(     21     ) 


i 


BHASHYA. 

^  (the  root)  prakriti  (nature)  is  pmdhdna  (chief),  from 
Its  being  the  root  of  the  seven  principles  -which  are  production* 


(     22     ) 

and  productive  ;  such  nature  is  the  root,  No  production. — 
It  is  not  produced  from  another :  on  that  account  nature 
(prakritl)  is  no  product  of  any  other  thing.  Seven  principles. 
— Mahat  and  the  rest ;  from  its  being  the  great  (mahat)  ele 
ment  ;  this  is  Intellect  (Buddhi).  Intellect  and  the  rest. — The 

f  seven  principles  are,  1.  Intellect;  2.  Egotism;  3 — 7.  The 
five  subtile  rudiments.  These  seven  are  productions  and  pro 
ductive  :  in  this  manner  ;  Intellect  is  produced  from  the  chief 
one  (nature).  That  again  produces  Egotism,  whence  it  is 
productive  (pmlcriti).  Egotism,  as  derived  from  intellect,  is  a 
production  ;  but  as  it  gives  origin  to  the  five  subtile  rudiments, 
it  is  productive,  The  subtile  rudiment  of  sound  is  derived  from 
Egotism,  and  is  therefore  a  production  ;  but  as  causing  the  pro 
duction  of  ether,  it  is  productive.  The  subtile  rudiment  of 
touch,  as  generated  from  Egotism,  is  a  production  ;  as  giving 
origin  to  air,  it  is  productive,  The  gubtile  rudiment  of  smell  is 
derived  from  Egotism,  and  is  therefore  a  production  ;  it  gives 
origin  to  earth,  and  is  therefore  productive.  The  subtile  rudi 
ment  of  form  is  a  production  from  Egotism  ;  as  generating  light, 
it  is  productive.  The  subtile  rudiment  of  flavour,  as  derived 
from  Egotism,  is  a  production ;  it  is  productive,  as  giving  origin 
to  water.  In  this  manner  the  Great  principle  and  the  rest  are 

/  productions  and  productive,  J  Sixteen  are  productions  ;  that  is,  \ 
the  five  organs  of  perception,  the  five  organs  of  action,  with 
mind,  making  the  eleventh,  and  the  five  elements ;  these  form  a 
class  of  sixteen  which  are  productions,  the  terra  vikdra  being 
the  same  as  vikrvti,  Soul  is  neither  a  production  nor  productive. 
These  (principels)  being  thus  classed,  it  is  next  to  be  considered 
by  what  and  how  many  kinds  of  proof,  and  by  what  proof 
severally  applied,  the  demonstration  of  these  three  (classes  of) 
principles,  the  perceptible,  the  imperceptible,  and  the  thinking 
soul,  can  be  effected.  For  in  this  world  a  probable  thing  is 
established  by  proof,  in  the  same  mode  as  (a  quantity  of)  grain 
by  a  prastha  (a  certain  measure),  and  the  like,  or  sandal  and 

other  things  by  weight.  On  this  account  what  proof  is,  is  next 
to  be  defined. 


COMMENT. 

Iii  this  stanza  the  three  principal  categories  of  the  Sankhya 
system  are  briefly  defined,  chieBy  with  regard  to  their  relative 
characters. 

Existent  things,  according  to  one  classification,  are  said  to  be 
fourfold  :  1.  prakriti  ;  2.  vikriti ;  3;  prakriti-vikriti  ;  and 
tinubhaya  fupa  neither  pr&kriti  nor  vikriti,  Prakriti,  according 
to  its  ordinary  use,  and  its  etymological  sense,  means  that  which 
is  primary,  that  xvhich  precedes  what  is  made  ;  from  pra,  prce 
and  kri,''to  make.'  This,  however,  is  further  distinguished  in 
the  text  into  the  mula  prakriti  ;  the  prakriti  which  is  the  root 
and  substance  of  all  things  except  soul,  matter  or  nature  ;  and 
secondary,  special,  or  relative  prakriti,  01*  every  production  that 
in  its  turn  becomes  primary  to  some  other  derived  from  it.  By 
prakriti  may  therefore  be  understood  the  matter  of  which  every 
substance  primarily  or  secondarily  is  composed-,  and  from  which 
it  proceeds,  the  primary,  or,  as  Mi*.  Colebrooke  renders  it, 
*  productive'  principle  of  some  secondary  substance  or  production. 
This  subsequent  product  is  termed  Vikriti,  from  the  same  root, 
kri,  '  to  make,'  with  vi,  implying  '  variation,'  prefixed.  Vikriti 
does  not  mean  a  product,  or  thing  brought  primarily  into  exis^ 
tence,  but  merely  a  modification  of  a  state  of  being,  a  new 
development  or  form  of  something  previously  extant.  We 
might  therefore  consider  it  as  best  rendered  by  the  tertn 
'  development,'  but  there  is  no  objection  to  the  equivalent  itt 
the  text,  or  '  product/  In  this  way,  then,  the  different  sub 
stances  of  the  universe  are  respectively  nature,  or  matter,  and 
form.  '  Crude  or  radical  matter  is  without  form.  Intellect  is  its 
first  form,  and  Intellect  is  the  matter  of  Egotism.  Egotism  is 
a  form  of  Intellect  and  the  matter  of  which  the  senses  and  the 
rudimental  elements  are  formed ;  the  senses  are  forms  of  Egotism. 
The  gross  elements  are  forms  of  the  rudimental  elements.  We 
are  not  to  extend  the  materiality  of  the  grosser  elements  to  the 
forms  of  visible  things,  for  visible  things  are  compounds,  not 


(     24     ) 

simple  developments  of  a  simple  base.  Soul  coffles  uftder  the 
fourth  class  ;  it  is  neither  matter  nor  form,  production  nor 
productive.  More  particular  definitions  of  each  category  sub 
sequently  occur. 


PERCEPTION,  inference,  and  right  affirmation,  are  ad 
mitted  to  be  threefold  proof;  for  they  (are  by  all 
acknowledged,  and)  comprise  every  mode  of  demon 
stration.  It  is  from  proof  that  belief  of  that  which  is 
to  be  proven  results. 


(     25     ) 


^FR 


f^rr  ^rffr  ?r  5% 

fftf  II  ^FW  Tir  I 


I  aPTRt  ^TUT  I 


MWH 


frM" 


(     26     ) 


BHASHYA. 

Perception  ;  —  as,  the  ear,  the  skin,  the  eye,  the  tongue,  the 
nose,  are  the  five  organs  of  sense;  and  their  five  objects  are 
respectively,  sound,  feel,  form,  flavour,  and  odour:  the  ear 
apprehends  sound  ;  the  skin,  feel  ;  the  eye,  form  ;  the  tongue 
taste  ;  the  nose,  smell.  This  proof  is  called,  (that  which  is)  seen 
(or  perception).  That  abject  which  is  not  ascertainable  either 
by  its  being  present,  or  by  reference,  is  to  be  apprehended 
from  right  affirmation  ;  such  as,  INDRA,  the  king  of  the  gods  ; 
the  northern  Kurus.;  the  nymphs  of  heaven;  and  the  like. 
That  which  is  not  ascertainable  by  perception  or  inference,  is 
derived  from  apt  (or  sufficient)  authority.  It  is  also  said  ; 
"They  call  scripture,  right  affirmation;  right,  as  free  from 
error.  Let  not  one  exempt  from  fault  affirm  a  falsehood  with 
out  adequate  reason.  He  -who  in  his  appointed  office  is  free 
from  partiality  or  enmity,  and  is  ever  respected  by  persons  of 
the  same  character,  such  a  man  is  to  be  regarded  as  apt  (fit  or 
worthy)"  In  these  three  are  comprised  all  kinds  of  proof. 
JAIMINI  describes  six  sorts  of  proof.  Which  of  those  then  are 
not  proofs  ?  They  are,  presumption  (arihdpatti),  /proportion 
(sambhava),  privation  (abhdva)  comprehension  (pratibhd),  oral 
communication  (aitthya),  and  comparison  (upamdna). 
Thus  "  Presumption"  is  twofold,  *  seen'  and  '  heard.'  *  Seen  '  is 
where  in  one  case  the  existence  of  spirit  is  admitted,  and  it 
is  presumed  that  it  exists  in  another.  'Heard;'  DEVADATTA 
does  not  eat  by  day,  and  yet  grows  fat.:  it  is  presumed  then 
that  he  eats  by  night.  "Proportion;"  By  the  term  one 
prastha,  four  kuravas  are  .equally  designated.  "Privation"  is 
fourfold  ;  prior,  mutual,  constant,  and  total.  *  Prior  ;'  as 
DEVADATTA  in  childhood,  youth,  &c.  '  Mutual  ;'  as,  Water  jar 
in  cloth.  '  Constant  ;'  as,  The  horns  of  an  ass  ;  the  son  of 
a  barren  woman;  the  flowers  of  the  sky,  'Total'  priva- 


(     27     ) 

tion,   or  destruction ;    as   when   cloth   is   burnt,    or  as    from, 
contemplating  withered  grain,    want   of.    rain    is    ascertain 
ed      In   this   manner   privation   is   manifold.      "  Comprehen 
sion  ;"    as,    The  part    of  the  country  that   lies  between    the- 
Vindhya,  mountains  on  the   north  and   Sahya   mountains   on 
the  south^  extending  to  the  sea,  is  pleasant.     By  this  sentence 
it   is  intended  to     express     that   there    are  many   agreeable 
circumstances   comprehended   in    that  country,   the   name   of 
the  site  indicating  its  several  products.     "Oral  communication  ;" 
as,  When  people  report  there  is  a  fiend  in  the  fig -tree.     "  Com 
parison  ;"  The  Gravaya  is   like   a   cow ;  a  lake   is   like   a  sea. 
These  are  the  six  kinds  of  proof;  but   they   are   comprised   in- 
the   three;    for  presumption   is   included   in   inference ;    and 
proportion,  privation,  comprehension,  oral  communication,   and 
comparison,    are  comprehended  in   right   affirmation.     There 
fore  from  the  expressions    (in   the   text),   they,  comprise  every- 
mode  of  demonstration,  and  are  admitted  to  be  threefold  proof, 
it  is  said,  that  by  these   three   kinds   of  proof,   proof   is   esta 
blished.     Belief  of  that   which  is   to   be  proven    results  from 
proof. — The  things  to  be  proven  are,-  Nature,  Intellect  Egotism, 
the  five  subtile  rudiments,   the  eleven  organs,  the  five  gross 
elements,  and  Soul.-     These  five   and    twenty    principles  are- 
classed  as  the  perceptible,  the  imperceptible,  and  the  percipient ;. 
and  some   are  verifiable  by  perception,  some  by  inference,  and', 
some  by  authority  ;  which  is  the  threefold  proof. 
The  definition  of  each  kind  (of  proof)  is  next,  given.. 

COMMENT, 

The  work  pauses  in  its  enumeration-  of  the  physical  and; 
metaphysical  principles  of  the  system,  to  define  its  dialectical 
portion,  or  the  proofs  which  may  be  urged  in  support  of  its 
principles. 

The  doctrine  that  there  are  but  three  kinds  of  proof,  is  said ; 
to  be  supported  by  a  text  of  the  Veda?  :  '  Soul  is  either  to  be 
perceived,  to  be  learned  from  authority,  or  to  be  inferred:  from* 


(     28     ) 

reasoning*.'  It  is  opposed  to  the  tenets  of  the  Naiydyikas 
and  Mimdnsakas,  the  former  of  whom  describe  four  kinds, 
and  the.  latter  six  kinds  of  proof.  The  proofs  of  the  logicians 
are,  pratyaksha^  '  perception  ;'  anumdna,\  6  inference  ;' 
upamdna  ||,  '  comparison  ;  '  and  sabda  §,  '  verbal  authority.' 
Of  these,  comparison  and  verbal  authority  are  included  by 
the  Sdnkhyas  under  right  affirmation  ;  the  term  dpta  IF  mean 
ing  '  fit,  right,'  and  being  applied  either  to  the  Vedas**  ,  or 
to  inspired  teachers  ff,  as  subsequently  explained.  The 
Mimdnsakas  do  recognise  six  kinds  of  proof  ;  but  GAURAPADA 
has  either  stated  them  incorrectly,  or  refers  to  a  sj^stem  differ 
ent  from  that  now  found  in  the  best  authorities  of  this  school. 
KUMARILA  BHATTA  alludes  to  the  sixfold  proof  of  an  older 
scholiast  or  Vrittikdra,  but  those  six  proofs  are,  as  Mr.  Cole- 
brooke  states,  perception,  inference,  comparison,  presumption, 
authority,  and  privation  ;  and  the  author  of  the  Sdstra 
dipikd  excludes  expressly  sambhava,  pratibhd  and  aitihya  from 
the  character  of  proofs.  With  regard  to  the  terms  specified, 
it  may  be  doubted  if  exact  equivalents  can  be  devised.  Arthd- 
patti  is  literally,  '  attainment  of  meaning  ;'  conjecture  or  pre 
sumption,  <  inference  ;'  from  which  it  differs  only  in  the 
absence  of  the  predicate  or  sign  from  which  the  subject  is 
inferred.  The  illustrations  of  the  commentator  do  not  very 
clearly  explain  the  purport  of  the  two  kinds  of  this  proof, 
'  seen'  and  '  heard.'  In  the  S'dstra  dipikd  the  first  is  exem 
plified  by  the  sentence,  "  DEVADATTA  is  alive,  but  not  in  his 
house  ;  it  is  presumed  therefore  that  he  is  abroad."  '  Heard,' 
s'ruta,  is  referred  to  the  Ve'das,  and  applies  to  the  interpretation 
of  receipts  by  the  spirit  as  well  as  the  letter,  as  in  a  direction 
to  offer  any  particular  article,  it  may  be  presumed,  that  should 
that  not  be  procurable,  something  similar  may  be  substituted. 


t  SRZ^-  i          J  arrjnr^r  i  n 

IF  ^H  I  "*'*  3n*TO>  '  tt 


(     29     ) 

VACHASPATI  also  considers  arthdpatti  to  be  comprised  in  infer 
ence,  as  well  as  sambhava, '  identity'  or  '  proportion.'  Privation, 
he  argues  is  only  a  modification  of  perception ;  and  aitihya, 
or  '  report,'  is  no  proof  at  all,  the  person  with  whom  it  origi 
nates  being  undetermined.  Pratibhd  he  does  not  mention. 
The  concluding  expressions  of  GAURAPADA,  Pratijdnvdsa 
sanyndnam,  are  of  questionable  import,  and  there  is  possibly 
some  error  in  the  copy.  The  '  objects  of  proof,'  prameya,  are, 
according  to  the  Sankhya,  all  the  principles  of  existence. 
Siddhi,  '  accomplishment,  determination,'  in  the  last  hemistich, 
is  explained  by  pratiti,  '  trust,  belief.' 


-I  II  ^  II 


V. 

PERCEPTION  is  ascertainment  of  particular  objects. 
Inference,  which  is  of  three  sorts,  premises  an  argu 
ment,  and  (deduces)  that  which  is  argued  by  it.  Right 
affirmation  is  true  revelation. 


f  5 


(     30     ) 


SIT 

ffa  wtF^rafr  ?SFT  HT^nns  i  t^rror^s  u 


i 
*rar 


*  i 


BHASHYA. 

Drishta  £  seen,'  or  pratyaksha,  '  perception/  is  application  or 
exertion  of  the  senses  in  regard  to  their  several  objects,  as  of 
the  ear,  and  the  rest,  to  sound,  &c.  Inference  is  of  three  kinds,. 
subsequent,  antecedent/  analogous.  Inference  antecedent  is 
that  which  has  been  previously  deduced  ;  as  rain  is  inferred 
from  the  rising  of  a  cloud,  because  formerly  rain  had  been  the 
consequence.  Subsequent  ;  as,  having  found  a  drop  of  water 
taken  from  the  sea  to  be  salt,  the  saltness  of  the  rest  also  is 
inferred.  Analogous  ;  as,  having  observed  their  change  of  place, 
it  is  concluded  that  the  moon  and  stars  are  locomotive,  like 
CHAITRA  :  that  is,  having  seen  a  person  named.  CHAITRA  trans 
fer  his  position  from  one  place  to  another,  and  thence  known 
that  he  was  locomotive,  it  is  inferred  that  the  moon  and  stars 
also  have  motion  (because  it  is  seen  that  they  change  their 
places).  So  observing  one  mango  tree  in  blossom,  it  is  inferred 
that  other  mango  trees  also  are  in  flower.  This  is  inference 
from  analogy. 

Again  ;  premises  an  argument,  and  (deduce*)  that  which  is 
argued  by  it.  That  inference.  Premises  a  prior  argument  - 
that  is,  the  thing  which  has  a  predicate,  is  inferred  from  the 
predicate,  as,  a  mendicant  (is  known)  by  his  staff;  or  it 
premises  the  subject  of  the  argument,  when  the  predicate  is 


(     31     ) 

deduced  from  that  of  which  it  is  predicated  as,  having  seen  a 
mendicant,  you  say,  this  is  his  triple  staff.  Right  affirmation 
is  true  revelation.  —  Apia  means  dchdryas,  '  holy  teachers,'  as 
Brahma  and  the  rest.  S'ruti  means  Ve'das,'  '  Teachers  and 
Ve'das'  is  the  import  of  that  compound,  and  that  which  is 
declared  by  them  is  true  revelation. 

In  this  manner  threefold  proof  has  been  described.  It  is 
•next  explained  by  what  sort  of  proof  ascertainment  is  to  be 
effected,  and  of  what  objects. 

COMMENT. 

The  three  kinds  of  proof,  perception,  inference,  and  right 
affirmation,  are  here  more  particularly  explained. 

The  first  is  defined,  '  what  severally  relates  to,  or  is  engaged 
in,  an  object  of  sense*.  Adhyavasdya  is  explained  by 
VACHASPATI,  '  Knowledge,  which  is  the  exercise  of  the 
intellectual  facultyf.  NARAYANA  explains  it,  '  That  by  which 
certainty  is  obtained]:.'  The  organs  do  not  of  themselves 
apprehend  objects,  but  are  merely  the  instruments  by  which 
they  are  approximated  to  the  intellect  :  '  neither  does  intellect 
apprehend  them  (rationally),  being,  as  derived  from  (prakriti) 
matter,  incapable  of  sense  ;  but  the  unconscious  impressions  or 
modifications  of  intellect,  derived  through  the  senses,  are 
communicated  to  soul,  which,  reflecting  them  whilst  they  are 
present  in  the  intellect,  appears  by  that  reflection  actually 
effected  by  wisdom,  pleasure,  and  the  like  §.' 


t 

fire  \  J  arttresfaft  f^facrs^nr  t 

^  ft  sTOTOT^RRrfaftr  fl^sQregnftscsfarF 
i  ir<j  jf^c^r  pfMisft  Tfr^m^r  ^^r.  \  3^3 
\   i 


(      32     ) 

The  explanation  given  by  GAUKAPADA  of  the  three  kinds  of 
inference  is  not  exactly  conformable  to  the  definitions  of  the 
logicians,  although  the  same  technical  terms  are  employed. 
Thus  in  the  Ny&ya  Sutra  Vritti,  in  the  comment  on  the 
Sutra  of  (rautama,*  we  have  the  following :  '  Threefold  infe 
rence.  Prior,  that  is,  cause  ;  characterized  b}^  or  having,  that 
(cause)  ;  as  inference  of  rain  from  the  gathering  of  clouds. 
Posterior,  effect ;  characterized  by  it,  as  inference  of  rain  from 
the  swelling  of  a  river.  Analogous  (or  generic) ;  characterized 
as  distinct  from  both  effect  and  cause,  as  the  inference  of  any 
thing  being  a  substance  from  its  being  earthy)*.'  Here  then 
we, have  inference  a  priori,  or  of  effect  from  cause  ;  inference 
a  posteriori,  or  of  cause  from  effect ;  and  inference  from 
analogy,  or  community  of  sensible  properties  :  for  sdmdnyato 
drishtam  is  '  that  which  is  recognised  from  generic  properties^ 
its  own  specific  properties  being  unnoticed^.'  The  Sdnkhya 
Chandrikd  gives  a  similar,  or  logical,  explanation  of  the  three 
kinds  of  inference. 

The  definition  of  inference  in  general  is  the  subject  of  the 
first  member  of  the  second  hemistich.  The  expressions  linga  § 
and  lingi  \ \  are  analogous  to  '  predicate  and  subject/  or  the 
mark,  sign,  or  accident  by  which  any  thing  is  characterized, 
and  the  thing  having  such  characteristic  mark  and  sign. 
Thus  linga  is  explained  by  logicians  by  the  term  vydpyd ,  H  and 
lingi  by  vydpakd  **;  as  in  the  proposition,  There  is  fire,  because 
there  is  smoke,  the  latter  is  the  linga,  vydpya,  '  major  or 
predicate  ;'  and  fire  the  lingi  or  vy&paka,  the  '  minor  or  subject/ 
or  thing  of  which  the  presence  is  denoted  by  its  characteristic. 


(     33     ) 

Inference,  then,  is  a  conclusion  derived  from  previous 
determination  of  predicate  and  subject ;  or  it  is  knowledge  o^ 
the  points  of  argument  depending  on  the  relation  between 
subject  and  predicate ;  that  is,  Unless  it  were  previously 
known  that  smoke  indicated  fire,  the  presence  of  the  latter 
could  not  be  inferred  from  the  appearance  of  the  former*.' 
This  is  what  the  logicians  term  paramersha,  '  observation  or 
experience.'  Aptcrf;  according  to  GAURAPADA,  means  dchar.ya ; 
and  apt  a  srutil  implies  '  holy  teachers  and  holy  writ.' 
NARAYANA  expounds  it  in  a  similar  manner]  |,  and  adds, 
that  dpta  means  Iswara,  or  '  god,'  according  to  the  theistical 
Sdnkhya§.  VACHASPATI  explains  the  terms  similarly,  though 
more  obscurely.  Apia  is  equivalent  with  him  to  prdpia, 
'  obtained/  and  yukta,  '  proper,  right ;'  and  dp ta  sruti  is 
*  both  that  which  is  right  and  traditional,  holy  know- 
ledgelf ;'  for  sruti  is  defined  to  be  '  knowledge  of  the 
purport  of  texts  derived  from  holy  writ ;  which  knowledge  is  of 
itself  proof,  as  obtained  from  the  Ve'das,  which  are  not  of  human 
origin,  and  fit  to  exempt  from  all  fear  of  error**.'  The  first 
term,  vdkya  is  explained  to  signify,  the  Ve'da  is  the  teacher  of 
religiontf  ;'  and  the  expression  vdkydrtka  is  equivalent  to 
dharma,  '  religion  or  virtue.'  Religion  is  heard  by  it ;  as,  "  Let 
one  desirous  of  heaven  perform  the  jyotishtoma  sacrifice  :"  such 
is  a  text  (of  scripture)  JJ.'  The  texts  of  the  Ve'das  and  of  other 
inspired  works  are  authority,  as  having  been  handed  down 
through  successive  births  by  the  same  teachers  as  JAIGISKAVYA 


** 

fr  i  tt 


(     34     ) 

*ays,  '  By  me  living  repeatedly  in  ten  different  great  creations*/ 
So  '  the  VeMa  was  remembered  by  KAPILA  from  a  former  state 
of  beingf .'  The  Mimdnsakas  distinguish  between  dpta  vdkya 
and  v<*da  vdkya  :  the  former  is  human,  the  latter  inspired, 
authority. 


VI. 

SENSIBLE  objects  become  known  by  perception;  but 
it  is  by  inference  (or  reasoning)  that  acquaintance  with 
things  transcending  the  senses  is  obtained  :  and  a  truth 
which  is  neither  to  be  directly  perceived,  nor  to  be 
inferred  from  reasoning,  is  deduced  from  revelation. 


firaf 


(35 


BHASHYA. 

By  inference  from  analogy  ;  of  things  beyond  the  senses  —  tha 
ascertainment  of  existing  things  which  transcend  the  sonsoa. 
Nature  and  soul  are  not  objects  of  sense,  and  are  to  be  known 
only  by  reasoning  from  analogy.  For  as  the  predicates  Mahat 
and  the  rest  have  the  three  qualities,  so  must  that  of  which 
they  are  effects,  the  chief  one  (nature),  have  the  three  quali 
ties  ;  and  as  that  which  is  irrational  appears  as  if  it  was  rational, 
it  must  have  a  guide  and  superintendent,  which  is  soul.  That 
which  is  perceptible  is  known  by  perception  ;  but  that  which 
is  imperceptible,  and  which  is  not  to  be  inferred  from  analogy, 
must  be  learnt  from  revelation,  as,  INDRA,  the  king  of  the  gods  ; 
the  northern  Kurus  ;  the  nymphs  of  heaven  :  these  depend 
upon  sacred  authority.  Here  some  one  objects,  Nature  or 
soul  is  not  apprehended,  and  what  is  not  apprehended  in  this 
world  does  not  exist  ;  therefore  these  two  are  not,  any  more 
than  a  second  head,  or  a  third  arm.  In  reply  it  is  stated,  that 
there  are  eight  causes  which  prevent  the  apprehension  of 
existing  things. 

COMMENT. 

In  this  verse,  according  to  the  translation  followed,  the 
application  of  the  three  kinds  of  proof  to  three  different  objects 
is  described  :  according  to  a  different  version,  only  one  class 
of  objects  is  referred  to,  those  which  transcend  the  senses,  and 
of  which  a  knowledge  is  attainable  only  by  inference  from 
analogy,  or  revelation. 

The  Sdnkhya  Tativa  Kaumudz  concurs  with  the  S&nkhy* 
Bhdshya  in  understanding  the  terms  of  the  text,  sdmdnyato- 


(     36    ) 

drishtdt*,  to  refer  to  anumdndtf,  intending  '  inference  from 
analogy^.'  A  similar  explanation  occurs  in  the  Sdnkhya 
Pravachana  Bhdshya  :  '  Thence,  from  reasoning  by  analogy, 
the  determination  of  both,  of  nature  and  soul,  is  effected§/  It 
appears  therefore  that  in  this  place  the  text  does  not 
refer  either  to  perception  or  to  inference  in  general,  as 
evidence  of  perceptible  things,  but  solely  to  inference  from 
analogy,  as  proof  of  imperceptible  objects.  For  inference 
a  priori  or  a  posteriori  regards  things  not  necessarily 
beyond  the  cognizance  of  the  senses,  like  nature  and 
soul,  but  those  only  which  are  not  at  the  moment  per 
ceptible,  as  fire  from  smoke,  rain  from  floods  or  clouds,  and 
the  like.  It  might  be  preferable,  therefore,  to  render  the  verse 
somewhat  differently  from  the  text,  or,  '  It  is  by  reasoning  from 
analogy  that  belief  in  things  beyond  the  senses  is  attained  ; 
and  imperceptible  things,  not  thereby  determined,  are  to  be 
known  only  from  revelation.'  The  version  of  Mr.  Colebrooke 
in  which  he  is  followed  by  Professor  Lassen.'  ("  ^Equalitatis 
intellects  est  per  perceptionem  :  rerum  quoe  supra  sensus 
sunt  per  demonstrationem  vel  hac  non  evictum,  quod  prseter 
sensus  est,  probatur  revelatione"),  rests  apparently  upon  the 
authority  of  the  S&nkhya  Chandrikd  and  Sdnkhya  Kaumudi 
<  Sdmdnyatas  has  the  affix  tasi  in  the  sense  of  the  sixth  (posses 
sive)  case.  The  ascertainment  of  all  objects  appreciable  by  the 
senses,  whether  actually  perceived  or  not,  is  by  perception  :  there 
fore  knowledge  of  earth  and  the  other  elements  is  by  sense  ;  but 
knowledge  of  things  beyond  the  senses,  as  natnre  and  the  rest, 
is  from  inference!).' 


J  3 

T  faftraft  i 
§  sr*n«rat 


jfir 


(     37     ) 

When  inference  from  analogy  fails,  then,  according  to  all  the 
authorities,  the  remaining  proof,  or  revelation,  must  be  had 
recourse  to,  agreeably  to  the  Sutras  ;  '  Oral  proof  is  fit  instruc 
tion/  and  '  fit  instruction  is  communication  of  the  proofs  by 
which  the  nature  of  both  prakriti  and  purusha  may  be 
discriminated.* 


VII. 


FROM  various  causes  things  may  be  imperceptible 
(or  unperceived);  excessive  distance,  (extreme)  nearness, 
defect  of  the  organs,  inattention,  minuteness,  interpo 
sition  of  objects,  predominance  of  other  matters,  and 
intermixture  with  the  like. 


i 
*  i 


cl1  I  ^^TRT^T   ^^q^  fqff  cf   c 


(     38     ) 


BHASHYA. 

N  on  -perception  of  things  here  existing  may  proceed  from,, 
their  remoteness,  as  of  Vishnumitra,  Maitra,  and  Chaitra, 
dwelling  in  different  countries  ;  or  their  propinquity,  as  the 
eye  does  not  see  the  collyrium  applied  to  the  eyelids  ;  from 
defect  of  the  organs,  as  sound  and  form  are  undiscernible  by  the 
deaf  and  the  blind  ;  from  inattention,  as  a  person  whose  thoughts 
are  distracted  does  not  apprehend  what  is  said  to  him, 
however  intelligibly  ;  from  minuteness,  as  the  small  particles 
of  frost,  vapour,  and  smoke  in  the  atmosphere  are  Hot 
preceived  ;  from  interposition,  as  thing  is  hidden  by  a  wall  ; 
from  predominance  of  others,  as  the  planets,  asterisms,  and 
stars  are  invisible  when  their  rays  are  overpowered  by  those 
of  the  sun  ;  from  intermixture  with  the  like,  as  a  bean  in  a  heap 
of  beans,  a  lotus  amongst  lotupes,  a  myrobalan  amongst 
myrobalans,  a  pigeon  in  a  flock  of  pigeons,  cannot  be  perceived, 
being  confounded  in  the  midst  of  similar  objects.  In  this  way 
non-perception  of  actually  existing  things  is  eightfold. 

Be  it  granted,  that  whatever  is  to  be  ascertained  (by  any 
means)  is  ;  by  what  cause  is  apprehension  of  nature  and  soul 
prevented,  and  how  is  it  to  be  effected. 

COMMENT. 

Reasons  are  here  assigned  why  things  may  not  be  perceived, 
although  they  actually  exist. 


(     39     ) 

The  terms  of  the  text,  as  illustrated  by  the  comment,  are 
easily  understood  :  the  particle  cha,  in  connexion  with  the  last, 
is  considered  to  imply  the  existence  of  other  impediments 
besides  those  enumerated,  such  as  non-production,  as  of  curds 
from  milk*.  But  these  circumstances,  for  the  most  part, 
account  for  the  non-perception  of  perceptible  things,  and  it  is 
still  to  be  considered  why  nature  and  soul,  which  are  not 
amongst  things  ordinarily  perceptible  are  not  perceivedt. 


IK  ii 

VIII. 

IT  is  owing  to  the  subtilty  (of  nature),  not  to  the 
non-existence  of  this  original  principle,  that  it  is  not 
apprehended  by  the  senses,  but  inferred  from  its 
effects.  Intellect  and  the  rest  of  the  derivative  prin 
ciples  are  effects;  ( whence  it  is  concluded  as  their 
cause)  in  some  respects  analogous,  but  in  other 
dissimilar. 


(     40     ) 


BKASHYA. 

From  subtilty  the  non-perception  of  that  nature.  Nature  is 
not  apprehended  (by  the  senses)  on  account  of  its  subtilty,  like 
the  particles  of  smoke,  vapour,  and  frost,  which  are  in  the 
atmosphere,  although  not  perceived  there.  How  then  is  it  to 
be  apprehended  ?  Its  perception  is  from  its  effects.  Having 
observed  the  effects,  the  cause  is  inferred.  Nature  is  the  cause, 
of  which  such  is  the  effect.  Intellect,  egotism,  the  five  subtile 
rudiments,  the  eleven  organs,  the  five  gross  elements,  are  its 
effects.  That  effect  may  be  dissimilar  from  nature  :  '  nature/ 
prakriti  ;  'the  chief  one/  pradhfrna  ;  dissimilar  from  it:  or  it 
may  be  analogous,  of  similar  character  ;  as  in  the  world  a  son 
may  be  like  or  unlike  his  father.  From  what  cause  this  simi 
larity  or  dissimilarity  proceeds,  we  shall  hereafter  explain. 

Here  a  doubt  arises,  from  the  conflicting  opinions  of  teachers, 
whether  intellect  and  other  effect  be  or  be  not  already  in  nature. 
According  to  the  Sankhya  doctrine,  the  effects  are  in  nature  ; 
according  to  the  Bauddhas  and  others,  they  are  not  ;  for  that 
which  is,  cannot  cease  to  be  ;  and  that  which  is  not,  can  by  no 
means  be  :  this  is  a  contradiction.  Therefore  it  is  said  — 


(     41     ) 

COMMENT. 

Nature  is  said  to  be  imperceptible,  from  its  subtilty  :  it 
must  be  therefore  inferred  from  its  effects. 

The  effects  are  the  products  of  nature,  or  intellect,  egotism, 
and  the  rest ;  some  of  which  are  of  a  similar,  and  some  of  a 
dissimilar  character,  as  subsequently  explained. 

Effect,  according  to  the  Sankhya  system,  necessarily  implies 
cause,  as  it  could  not  exist  without  it  *:  but  on  this  topic 
there  are  different  opinions,  thus  particularized  by  VACHAS- 
PATI  :  '  1.  Some  say,  that  that  which  is  may  proceed  from 
that  which  is  not.  2.  Some  say,  that  effect  is  not  a  separate 
ly  existent  thing,  but  the  revolution  of  an  existent  thing. 
3.  Some  say,  that  that  which  is  not  may  proceed  from  that 
yffiich  is.  4.  The  ancients  assert,  that  that  which  is  comes 
from  that  which  is  (or  ens  from  ens).  By  the  three  first  pro 
positions  the  existence  of  nature  would  not  be  proved  ;  for. 

'  1.  The  materiality  of  the  cause  of  the  world,  of  which  the 
qualities  goodness,  foulness,  and  darkness  are  the  natural 
properties,  comprises  sound  and  other  changes  of  its  natural 
condition,  and  is  diversified  by  pleasure,  pain,  and  insensibility  » 
but  if  that  which  is,  is  born  from  that  which  is  not,  how  can 
that  insubstantial  cause  which  is  not,  comprehend  pleasure, 
pain,  form,  sound,  and  the  like  ?  for  there  cannot  be  identity 
of  nature  between  what  is  and  what  is  not. 

*  2.  If  sound,  and  other  diversified  existences,  were  bufc 
revolutions  of  one  existent  thing,  yet  that  which  is  could  no  t 
proceed  from  such  a  source,  for  the  property  of  manifold 
existence  cannot  belong  to  that  which  is  not  twofold :  the 
notion  of  that  which  is  not  manifold  through  its  comprising 
manifold  existence  is  an  obvious  error. 


(     42     ) 

<3.  The  notion  of  the  Kanabhakshas,  Akshachatanas,  and 
others,  that  that  which  is  not  may  proceed  from  that  which  is> 
excludes  the  comprehension  of  effect  in  cause,  as  that  which 
is  and  that  which  is  not  cannot  have  community  :  consequently 
the  existence  of  nature  is  not  proved  ;  and  in  order  to 
establish  its  existence,  the  existence  of  effect  in  it  must  first 
be  determined*.' 

Of  the  doctrines  here  alluded  to,  the  first  is  said  to  be  that 
of  some  of  the  Buddhists,  who  deny  the  existence  of  prakriti, 
or  any  universal  cause,  or  of  any  thing  which  they  cannot 
verify  by  perception.  The  second  is  that  of  the  Ve'dantis,  who 
maintain  that  all  that  exists  is  T>ut  the  vivarttas,  literally  th« 
'  revolutions  '  —  the  emanations  from,  or  manifestations  of,  one 
only  universal  spirit.  It  might  be  said  that  the  Sankhya 
seems  to  teach  a  similar  doctrine,  in  as  far  as  it  refers  all  that 
exists,  exclusive  of  spirit,  to  one  common  source,  and  makes 
all  else  identical  with  prakriti.  It  differs  however  in  this, 
that  it  regards  the  substances  evolved  from  the  radical  prakriti 
as  substantial  existences,  as  effects  or  products  of  a  cause 
which  exists  no  longer  except  in  its  effects.  The  Ve*dlntis,  on 
the  other  hand,  maintain  that  it  is  cause  which  is  eternal,  and 
that  effects  are  only  its  present  operations.  The  popular  form 


ff[ 


(     43     ) 

of  Ve'dantism  'asserts,  indeed,  that  nothing  exists  but  cause, 
and  that  its  effects,  or  all  that  appears  to  exist,  are  unreali 
ties,  illusions,  the  phantoms  of  a  dream  :  but  the  commentator 
on  the  Sdnkhya  Pravachana  declares,  that  the  doctrine  of 
mdyd,  or  '  illusion/  is  modern,  and  is  contrary  to  the  V£das, 
and  that  those  who  advocate  it  are  nothing  but  disguised 
Bauddhas :  '  The  cause  of  the  bondage  of  soul  asserted,  by 
those  concealed  Bauddhas,  the  modern  advocates  of  may  a, 
is  here  refuted'*.'  In  the  third  case  we  have  the  authors 
specified  as  Kanabhakshas,  '  Feeders  upon  little/  or  upoa 
atoms,  perhaps ;  and  Ak&hacharanas,  '  Followers  of  contro 
versy/  contemptuous  terms  for  the  Vaisfahikas,  who  main 
tain  the  origin  of  all  things  from  primaeval  atoms,  or 
monads  ;  and  who  may  therefore  be  said  to  deduce  what  is  not 
— the  insubstantial  forma  of  things — from  actual  corpuscular 
substance. 

The  fourth  or  ancient  doctrine,  that  that  which  is  comes 
from  that  which  is,  em  from  ens,  TO  oi/,  from  TO  ov,  is  the 
converse  of  the  celebrated  dogma  of  antiquity,  ex  nihilo,  nihil 
fit ;  and  although  in  this  place  it  is  especially  restricted  to 
the  relation  of  certain  effects  to  a  certain  cause,  yet  it  comes 
to  the  same  thing  a&  regards  the  world  in  general,  the  things 
of  which  cannot  be  derived  from  no  primary  existent  thing ; 
agreeably  to  the  Sutra  of  KAPILA  ;  '  The  production  of  a  thing 
cannot  be  from  nothing  t  /  QvSev  yivcTai  e/c  TOV  /j.tj  QJ/TO?  :  not 
only  according  to  Democritus  and  Epicurus,  but  according  to 
all  the  ancient  philosophers,  who,  Aristotle  states,  agreed 
universally  in  the  physical  doctrine,  that  it  was  impossible  for 
any  thing  to  be  produced  from  nothing  :  TWrow  Se  TO  /JLCV  CK  M 
OVTWV  yive(r6ai  advvaTOv'  ire  pi  yap  TCIVTW  oyuoyyw/xoji'own  Ttj?: 
aVai/Te?  oi  Trept  ^uo-ewy.  Phys.  I.  4, 


*  sritarofo  JTw^rsrt  frr^r^r^Tt  ^^  fMrf  * 

t 


(     44     ) 


IX. 

EFFECT  subsists  (antecedently  to  the  operation  of 
cause)  ;  for  what  exists  not,  can  by  no  operation  of 
cause  be  brought  into  existence.  Materials,  too,  are 
selected  which  are  fit  for  the  purpose  :  every  thing  is 
not  by  every  means  possible  :  what  is  capable,  does 
that  to  which  it  is  competent  ;  and  like  is  produced 
from  like. 


(     45     ) 


BHASHYA. 

From  there  being  no  instrumental  cause  of  ivhat  exists  not  — 
non-existent,  what  is  not  —  there  is  no  making  what  is  not  : 
therefore  effect  is.  In  this  world  there  is  no  making  of  what 
is  not  ;  as,  the  production  of  oil  from  sand  :  therefore  the 
instrumental  cause  produces  what  is,  from  its  having  been 
formerly  implanted.  Hence  perceptible  principles,  which  are 
effects,  exist  in  nature. 

Further,  from  selection  of  materials.  —  Updddna  is  '  (material) 
cause,'  from  the  selection  of  it  :  thus,  in  life,  a  man  who  desires 
a  thing,  selects  that  by  which  it  may  be  produced  ;  as  he  who 
wishes  for  curds,  takes  milk,  not  water  (for  their  material 
cause).  Thence  effect  is. 

Again,  every  thing  is  not  by  every  means  possible.  The 
universal  possibility  of  every  thing  is  not  ;  as  of  gold  in  silver, 
&c.  or  in  grass,  dust,  or  sand.  Therefore,  from  the  non- 
universality  of  every  thing  in  every  thing,  effect  is. 

Again,  what  is  capable  does  that  to  which  it  is  competent; 
as,  a  potter  is  the  capable  agent  ;  the  implements,  the  lump  of 
clay,  the  wheel,  rag,  rope,  water,  &c.  (are  capable),  by  which 
he  makes  the  jar,  which  is  capable  of  being  so  made  from 
earth.  Thence  effect  is. 

Lastly,  like  is  produced  from  like.  Such  as  is  the  character 
of  cause,  in  which  effect  exists,  such  also  is  the  character  of 
effect  ;  as,  barley  is  produced  from  barley,  rice  from  rice.  If 
effect  was  not  (did  not  pre-exist),  then  rice  might  grow  from 
pease  ;  but  it  does  not,  and  therefore  effect  is. 

By  these  five  arguments,  then,  it  is  proved  that  intellect 
and  the  other  characteristics  do  (pre)  exist  in  nature  ;  and 
therefore  production  is  of  that  which  is,  and  not  of  that 
which  is  not. 


(     46     ) 

COMMENT. 

Arguments  are  here  adduced  to  shew  that  the  effects  or 
products  pf  nature  are  comprised  in,  and  coexistent  with,  their 
cause  or  source  ;  consequently  they  are  proofs  of  the  existence 
of  that  primary  cause  or  source. 

It  is  laid  down  as  a  general  principle,  that  cause  and  effect 
are  in  all  cases  coexistent,  or  that  effect  exists  anteriorly  to 
its  manifestation  ;  sat-Jcdryyam  *  in  the  text  meaning  *  existent 
effect  prior  to  the  exercise  of  (efficient)  cause  t ;'  or,  as  the 
phrase  also  of  the  text  asadakarandt  \  is  explained,  '  If  effect 
prior  to  the  exercise  of  (efficient)  cause  does  not  exist,  its 
existence  cannot  by  any  means  be  effected  ||.'  The  expression 
sat-kdryyam,  therefore,  is  to  be  understood  throughout  as 
meaning  '  existent  effect/  not  the  effect  of  that  which  exists : 
and  the  object  of  the  stanza  is  to  establish  the  existence  of 
cause  from  its  effects,  and  not  of  effects  from  the  existence  of 
cause,  as  Professor  Lassen  has  explained  it:  "Qusenam  sint 
rationes  docetur  quibus  evincatur  mentem  ceteraque  principia 
eftecta  esse  a  TW  OVTI"  Mons.  Pauthier  (Traduction  de  la 
Sdnkhya  Kdrikd,  105)  is  more  correct  in  his  view  of  the 
general  purport  of  the  verse;  "  Ce  qui  n'existe  pas  ne  'peut 
arriver  &  Petat  d'effet ;"  but  he  has  mistaken  the  particulars — 
the  reasons  why  that  which  is  not  can  never,  be,  for  the  means 
which  would  be  fruitlessly  exercised  for  its  production  ;  it  is 
not  that  such  existence  cannot  be  effected  "  par  la  co-operation 
d'aucune  cause  mate'rielle,"  &c.,  but  became  an  effect  requires 
an  adequate  material  cause,  and  the  like. 

Not  only  has  the  meaning  of  this  verse  been  misapprehended 
by  its  translators,  but  the  doctrine  which  it  conveys  seems  to 
have  been  somewhat  misconceived  by  high  authority.  M. 

t 


(     47     ) 

Cousin,  referring  to  this  passage,  observes,  "  L'argumentation 
de  Kapila  est,  dans  1'histoire  de  philosophic,  1'antdcedent  de 
celle  d'^En^sideme  et  Hume.  Selon  Kapila  il  n'y  a  pas  de 
notion  propre  de  cause,  et  ce  que  nous  appelons  une  cause  n'est 
qu'une  cause  apparente  relativernent  a  1'effet  qui  la  suit,  mais 
c'est  aussi  un  effect  relative  ment  a  la  cause  qui  la  precede, 
laquelle  est  encore  un  effet  par  la  meme  raison,  et  to uj  ours 
de  m&me,  de  maniere  que  tout  est  un  enchainement  necessaire 
d'effets  sans  'cause  veritable  et  inddpendente."  M.  Cousin  then 
supports  his  view  of  the  doctrine  by  selecting  some  of  the 
arguments  contained  in  the  text ;  as,  "  That  which  does  not 
exist  cannot  be  made  to  exist ;"  and,  "  Cause  and  effect  are 
of  the  same  nature  :"  and  he  adds,  as  a  third,  that  "  il  ne  faufc 
pas  s'occuper  des  causes,  mais  des  effets,  car  1'existence  de 
1'effet  'mesure  1'energie  tie  la  cause ;  done  I'effet  e'quivaut  la 
cause."  In  this  instance,  however,  he  is  scarcely  justified  by 
his  authority,  whose  object  is  not  to  dispense  with  the  con 
sideration  of  cause  altogether,  but  to  prove  its  existence  from 
that  of  its  effects.  Kapila,  therefore,  is  far  from  asserting  that 
"  il  n'y  a  pas  de  cause,"  although  he  may  so  far  agree  with 
the  philosophers  referred  ^to,  in  recognising  no  difference 
between  'material  cause  and  material  effects  :  for  it  must  be 
remembered,  that  it  is  of  material  effects,  of  substances,  that 
he  is  speaking.  His  doctrine  is,  in  fact,  that  on  which  Brown 
enlarges  in  his  lectures  on  power,  cause,  and  effect — that  "  the 
forms  of  a  body  are  the  body  itself ;  and  that  all  the  substances 
which  exist  in  the  universe  are  every  thing  which  truly  exists 
in  the  universe,  to  which  nothing  can  be  added  which  is  not 
itself  a  new  substance  :  that  there  can  be  nothing  in  the 
events  of  nature,'  therefore,  but  the  antecedents  and  conse 
quents  which  are  present  in  them  ;  and  that  these  accordingly, 
or  nothing,  are  the  very  causes  and  effects  which  we  are  desir 
ous  of  investigating."  Lect.  on  the  Philosophy  of  the  Human 
Mind,  p.  175.  KAPILA,  however,  has  not  asserted  a  series  of 
antecedents  and  consequents  without  beginning  ;  and  whatever 
we  may  conceive  of  his  mtila-prakriti,  his  original  and  un- 


(     48     ) 

originated  substance  whence  all  substances  proceed,  it  is  a 
fixed  point  from  which  he  starts,  and  the  existence  of  which 
he  deduces  from  its  effects :  the  mutual  and  correlative 
existence  of  which,  with  their  cause,  ho  endeavours  to  establish 
by  arguments,  which,  as  regarding  a  curious  and  not  unin 
teresting  part  of  the  Sankhya  philosephy,  it  may  be  allowable 
to  recapitulate  a  little  more  in  detail. 

1.  Asadakarandt ;  f  Because  efficient  or  instrumental  cause 
cannot   make  or  produce  that  which  is  not.*     Professor  Lassen 
renders   this,   '  E  nulla   nonentis   efficacitate,  nonens  nil  efficit. 
A  sat  in  this  passage,   however,   is  the  object,   not  the  agent ; 
and  karana   is  employed  technically  to  denote  the  efficient  or 
operative  cause,  the  energy  of   which  would  be  exerted  in  vain 
unless   applied   to  materials    that    existed :  that    which   does 
not  exist   cannot  be  brought  into  existence  by  any   agent.     It 
would  be   useless  to  grind   the  sesamum    for  oil,  unless  the  oil 
existed  in  it :  the  same   force   applied  to  sand   or  sugar-cane 
would  not  express   oil.     The   appearance   or  manifestation   of 
the   oil  is  a  proof  that  it  was  contained   in  the   sesamum,  and 
consequently   is  a  proof  of  the   existence  of  the  source  whence 
it  is  derived.     This  dogma,   in  its   most   comprehensive   appli 
cation,   is  of  course  the  same   with   that   of  the  Greeks,   that 
nothing  can   come   from  nothing,   and  makes  the  creation    of 
the   universe   dependent   upon   pre-existing   materials.     Here^ 
however,  the   application  is   limited   and   specific,   and  as   Sir 
Graves  Haughton,    in  his  vindication   of  Mr.   Colebrooke's   ex 
position  of  the   Vedanta  philosophy,   has  justly   observed,   it 
means  no  more  than  that  things   proceed  from  their   respective 
sources,  and  from  those  sources  alone  ;  or  that   certain  sequents 
follow   certain   antecedents,   and   indicate   consequently    their 
existence. 

2.  Updddna  grahandt ;  '  From  taking  an  adequate  material 
cause  :  a  fit  material  cause  must  be   selected   for  any   given 
effect  or  product.'     There  is  no  difference  of  opinion  as  to    the 
purport  of  updddna  j  '  Such  as  the  substance  evolved,  such   is 


{     49     ) 

that  from  which  it  is  evolved :'  or  as  illustrated  by  GAURAPADA. 
'  He  who  wishes  to  make  curds  will  employ  milk,  not  water :'  but 
this  being  the  case,  the  effects  which  we  behold,  or  infer,  must 
proceed  from  something  similar  to  themselves,  and  consequently 
prove  the  existence  of  that  substance.  '  The  relation  between 
cause  and  effect  is  the  generation  of  effect ;  but  there  can  be 
no  relation  (between  cause  and)  a  non-existent  effect,  and  there 
fore  effect  is*,"  and  consequently  so  is  cause. 

3.  *  From  the  unfitness  of  all  causes  for  every  effect ;'  sarva, 
sambhav&bk&v&t.     There    must  be  an  identit}'  of  character  be 
tween  the  sequent  and  its  antecedent,  and  the  existence  of  one 
indicates  that  of  the  other  :  a  jar  is  made  with  clay,  cloth  with 
yarn  ;  the  latter  material  could  not  be  used  to  fabricate  a  water- 
pot,  nor  clay  to  weave  a  garment.     If  this  was  not  the  case,  all 
things  would  be  equally  fit  for  all  purposes/ 

.     .     .     ex  omnibus  rebus 
Orrine  genus  nasci  possit. 

It  is  not,  however,  here  intended  to  assert,  that  *'  idonea  causa 
non  est  ulla  quam  sad,  TO  ov"  but  that  the  effect  must  have  a 
determinate  existence  in  that  cause,  and  can  be  the  only  effect 
which  it  can:  produce  ;  as  in  the  commentary  on  this  expression 
in  the  Sankhya  Prdvachana  Bhdshya  :  '  If  effect  prior  to  pro 
duction  do  not  exist  in  cause,  there  would  be  no  reason  why 
cause  should  not  produce  one  noil-existent  effect,  and  not 
another!.' 

4.  ffaktasya  s'akydkarandt ;  '  Frorn  the  execution  of  that 
which  the  agent  is  able  to  do/     Active  or  efficient  causes   cart 
do  only  that  to  which  they  are   competent :  the  potter  and  his 
implements  fabricate  a  water-jar,  not  a  piece  of  cloth  ;  they  are 
not  competent  to  the  latter,  they  are  capable  of  the  former.     If 
effect  did  not  pre-exist,  if  it  were  not  inseparable  from  cause, 


(     50     ) 

power,  or  the  exertions  of  an  agent,  and  the  employment  of 
means,  might  derive  from  any  antecedent  one  consequence  as 
well  as  another. 

5.  Kdranabhdvat  ;  '  From  the  nature,  of  cause  ;'  that  is,  from 
its  being  of  the  same  nature  or  character  with  effect,  and 
consequently  producing  its  like  ;  or,  according  to  VACHASPATI 
*  from  the  identity  of  cause  with  effect  *:'  '  Cloth  is  not  differ 
ent  from  the  threads  of  which  it  is  woven,  for  it  is  made  up 
of  themf.'  Here,  then,  we  have  precisely  the  discovery  of 
modern  philosophy^  "  that  the  form  of  a  body  is  only  another 
name  for  the  relative  position  of  the  parts  that  constitute  it  ; 
and  that  the  forms  of  a  body  are  nothing  but  the  body  itself:" 
(Brown's  Lectures  :)  a  discovery  Which,  simple  as  it  may 
appear  to  be,  dissipated  but  recently  the  illusion  of  substan 
tial  forms,'  which  bad  prevailed  for  ages  in  Europe.  It  seems, 
however,  to  have  been  familiar  to  Hindu  speculation  from  the 
remotest  periods,  as  the  commentator  on  the  Sankhya  Prava- 
chana,  and  the  author  of  the  Sdnkhya  Chandrika,  cite  the 
Ve'das  in  its  confirmation  :  *  Before  production  there  is  no 
difference  between  cause  and  effect  J.'  There  is  good  reason, 
however,  to  think  that  the  conclusion  drawn  from  the  doctrine 
by  the  Ve'das  was  very  different  from  that  of  the  Sankhyas, 
being  the  basis  of  Pantheism,  and  implying  that  before 
creation  the  great  First  Cause  comprehended  both  cause  and 
effect  :  the  texts  illustrating  the  dogma  being  such  as,  '  The 
existent  TO  ov  verily  was  unevolved  ||—  TL  his,  the  Existent,  was 
oh  pupil,  before  all  things  §  —  The  Unborn  was  verily  before 
all  IF.'  The  Sankhyas,  like  some  of  the  old  Grecian  philoso 
phers,  choose  to  understand  by  tad,  idam>  TO  bvy  TO  eV,  *  the 
comprehensive,  eternal,  material  cause/ 


i 
:  grift 


If 


(     51     ) 

From  the  arguments  thus  adduced,  then,  it  is  concluded  that 
effect  is,  sat  kdryam  * ;  that  is,  that  it  exists  in,  and  is  the  same 
with,  cause ;  or,  as  GAURAPA'DA  has  it,  mahat  and  the  other 
characteristics  of  pradhdna  are  in  pradhdna.  Sat  kdryam  is 
therefore  neither  '  ponendum  est  existens  ( sad)  emphatice  ita 
dictum  TO  ovrofxs  ov,  per  se  ens,'  nor  *  effectus  existentis,  ah 
existente  effectum,  effectum  a  TW  OVTL\  the  question  is,  whe 
ther  effect  exists  or  not  before  production  ;  and  not  whether  it 
is  produced  '  a  ro>  ovrt  an  a  TO)  /w,*/  ovrt '  It  is  the  production  > 
or  appearance,  OF  that  which  is  or  is  not ;  not  the  production 
of  any  thing  BY  that  which  is  or  is  not ;  agreeably  to  the  Sutra 
of  &APILA  :  *  There  is  no  production  of  that  which  is  not,  as  of 
a  man's  honrf* — The  production  of  that  which  is  not  is  impossi 
ble,  as  would  be  that  of  a  human  hornj.'  Agreeably  to  the  same 
doctrine  also  is  the  reply  made  in  the  Sutras  to  the  objection, 
that  if  effect  exists  already,  existence  is  superfluously  given  to 
it ;  'It  is  absurd  to  produce  what  is  already  extant||.'  The 
answer  is,  'It  is  not  so  ;  for  the  actual  occurrence  or  non-occur 
rence  of  production  depends  upon  rnanifestation§  :'  that  is,  the 
present  existence  of  an  effect  is  not  the  production  of  any  thing 
new,  but  the  actual  manifestation  of  a  change  of  form  of  that 
which  previously  existed :  something  like  the  notions  which 
Aristotle  ascribes  to.  ancient  philosophers,  that  all  things  were 
together,  and  that  their  generation  was  merely  a  change  of 
condition  :  ^Hi/  6/xou  ra  Trdvra  KGU  TO  yivearOai  TOiovSe  Ka9e<TTt]K€v 
a\\oiov(rOai  :  and  it  is  curious  enough  to  find  the  doctrine 
illustrated  almost  in  the  words  of  Hobbes  :  "  Faciendum  est 
quod  faciunt  statuarii,  quimateriam  exculpentes,  supervacaneam 
imaginem  nan  faciunt  sed  inveniunt ;"  or  as  VIJN YANA  BHIKSHU 
has  it,  '  The  active  exertion  of  the  sculptor  produces  merely  the 
manifestation  of  the  image  which  was  in  the  stonelf.' 


(     52     ) 

Although  however,  as  identical  with  cause,  and  regarded  as 
proofs  of  its  existence ;  effects  or  products,  in  their  separated 
or  manifested  condition  regarded  as  forms  only,  possess  proper 
ties  different  from  those  of  their  source  or  cause  :  these  differ 
ences  are  detailed  in  the  next  stanza. 


A  DISCRETE  prinpiple  is  causable,  it,  is  inconstant, 
unperyading,  mutable,  multitudinous,  supporting,  mer- 
gent,  conjunct,  governed.  The  undisorete  one  is  the 
reverse. 


(      53     ) 


ii  f%^  i%f 


:  %:  ^T  n 


ii  f% 

F^^5'? 

3RTTT 


n 

TT 


(      54      ) 
BHASHYA. 

Discrete ;  intellect  and  the  other  effects.  Causable  ;  that  of 
which  there  is  cause  ;  the  term  hetu  meaning  *  cause,'  as  synony 
mous  with  updddna,  kdrana  and  nimitta.  Nature  is  the  cause 
of  a  discrete  principle  ;  therefore  discrete  principles,  as  far  as 
the  gross  elements  inclusive,  have  cause  :  thus,  the  principle 
intellect  has  cause  by  nature  ;  egotism  by  intellect ;  the  five 
rudiments  and  eleven  organs  by  egotism  ;  ether  by  the  rudiment 
of  sound  ;  air  by  that  of  touch  :  light  by  that  of  form  ;  water  by 
that  of  taste  ;  and  earth  by  that  of  smell.  In  this  way,  to  the 
gross  elements  inclusive  3a  discrete  principle  has  cause.  Again, 
it  is  inconstant,  because  it  is  produced  from  another  ;  as  a  water- 
jar,  which  is  produced  from  a  lump  of  clay,  is  not  constant. 
Again,  it  is  unpervading,  not  going  every  where  :  a  discrete 
principle  is  not  like  nature  and  soul,  omnipresent.  Again,  it  is 
mutable  ;  it  is  subject  to  the  changes  which  the  world  undergoes : 
combined  with  the  thirteen  instruments,  and  incorporated  in 
the  subtile  frame,  it  undergoes  worldly  vicissitudes,  and  hence 
is  mutable.  It  is  multitudinous ;  it  is  intellect,  egotism,  the 
five  rudiments,  and  eleven  organs  ;  and  the  five  gross  elements 
are  supported  by  the  five  rudiments.  It  is  mergent ;  subject 
to  resolution  ;  for  at  the  period  of  (general)  dissolution,  the 
five  gross  elements  merge  into  the  five  rudiments  ;  they,  with 
the  eleven  organs,  into  egotism  ;  egotism  into  intellect ;  and 
intellect  merges  into  nature.  Conjunct ;  conjoined,  made  up 
of  parts,  as  sound,  touch,  taste,  form,  and  smell.  Governed ; 
not  self-dependent;  for  intellect  is  dependent  on  nature, 
egotism  on  intellect,  the  rudiments  and  organs  on  egotism, 
and  the  gross  elements  on  the  rudiments.  In  this  way  the 
governed  or  subject  discrete  principle  is  explained:  we  now 
explain  the  undiscrete. 

The  undiscrete  one  is  the  reverse.  An  undiscrete  principle  is 
the  contrary  in  respect  to  the  properties  attributed  to  the 
discrete  :  that,  is  causable  ;  but  there  is  nothing  prior  to  nature 
whence  follows  its  nou-production,  and  therefore  it  is  without 


(     55     ) 

cause.  A  discrete  principle  is  inconstant ;  an  undiscrete  is 
eternal,  as  it  is  not  produced.  The  primary  elements  are  not 
produced  from  any  where ;  that  is,  nature.  A  discrete  principle 
is  unpervading  ;  nature  is  pervading,  going  every  where.  A 
discrete  principle  is  mutable  ;  nature  immutable,  from  the  same 
omnipresence.  Discrete  principles  are  multitudinous ;  nature  is 
single,  from  its  causality:  "Nature  is  the  one  cause  of  the  three 
worlds  ;"  thence  nature  is  single.  Discrete  principles  are  depen 
dent  ;  the  undiscrete  one  is  independent,  from  its  not  being  an 
effect :  there  is  nothing  beyond  nature  of  which  it  can  be  the 
effect.  A  discrete  principle  is  mergent ;  the  undiscrete  immer- 
;gent  (indissoluble),  being  eternal :  intellect  and  the  rest,  at  the 
period  of  general  dissolution,  merge  respectively  into  one 
another ;  not  so  nature ;  and  that  therefore  is  immergent 
(indissoluble).  A  discrete  principle  is  conjunct  (or  compound, 
made  up  of  parts)  ;  nature  is  uncompounded,  for  sound,  touch, 
flavour,  form,  and  odour,  are  not  in  (crude)  nature.  Discrete 
principles  are  governed ;  the  undiscrete  is  independent,  it 
presides  over  itself.  These  are  the  properties  in  which  discrete 
and  undiscrete  principles  are  dissimilar:  those  in  which  they  are 
similar  are  next  described. 

COMMENT. 

It  was  stated  in  the  eighth  stanza,  that  intellect  and  the 
other  effects  of  nature  were  in  some  respects  similar,  and  in 
others  dissimilar,  to  their  cause  :  the  properties  in  which  the 
dissimilarity  consists  are  here  enumerated. 

The  generic  term  used  for  the  effects  or  products  of  primae 
val  nature  (vyakta*)  means,  in  its  etymological  and  commonly 
received  senses,  that  which  is  evident  or  manifest,  or  that 
which  is  individual  or  specific ;  from  vi  distributive  particle, 
and  anja,  '  to  make  clear  or  distinct'.  The  purport  is  there 
fore  sufficiently  well  expressed  by  the  equivalent  Mr.  Colo* 


(     56     ) 

broke  has  selected,  'discrete,'  detached  from  its  cause,  and 
having  a  separate  and  distinct  existence.  Nature  (or  primary 
matter)  is  the  reverse  of  this,  or  avyakta*  'undiscrete, 
unseparated,  indistinct.'  If  natura  were  substituted  for  tellus 
these  lines  of  Lucretius  would  illustrate  the  application  of  the 
terms  in  question  : 

Multa  modis  multis  multarum  semina  rerum 
Quod  permixta  gerit  tellus  discretaque  tradit. 

Discrete  or  separated  effect  or  principle  (meaning  by 
principle  a  tatwa,  or  category,  according  to  the  Sankhya  classi 
fication  of  the  elements  of  existent  things)  is  described  by  its 
properties,  and  they  are  the  same  which  arc  specified  iii  the 
original  Sutra.  1.  Hetuinat'f,  '  having  cause,  or  origin;' 
hetu  implying  '  material  ^  efficient,  and  occasional  cause  ;' 
2.  Anitya  J,-  '  temporary  ;'  for  whatever  has  cause  has  begin 
ning,  and  whatever  has  a  beginning  must  have  an  end.  At 
the  same  time  this  is  tov  be  understood  of  them  in  their  actual 
or  present  form  or  condition  :  *  Of  their  own  nature  (or  as 
one  with  their  cause)  they  are  eternal,  but  they  are  perish 
able  by  their  separate  condition's'  ||.'  So  in  the  Sutras 
6  destruction  '  is  explained  *  resolution  into  cause§  '  3.  Un- 
pervading  IF  :'  '  Every  one  of  the  effects  of  nature  is  not 
observable  in  every  thing,  they  are  dispersed  as  different 
modifications**.'  Tydpli  is  the  essential  and  inherent  presence 
of  one  thing  in  another,  as  of  heat  in  fire,  oil  in  sesamum, 
&c.  4.  SdJcriya^-f,  'mutable/  or  'having  action:'  perhaps 
'  movable  '  or  '  migratory  '  would  perfectly  express  the  senses 
for  the  phrase  is  explained  to  signify  that  the  effects  of  nature 
migrate  from  one  substance  to  another  ;'  Intellect  and  the  rest 
leave  one  body  in  which  they  were  combined,  arid  enter  into 


§  5ff5T:  qWTOTW.  f 

««  H^?ft«rrfJi  T  sqmrrft  i  ft 


(     57     ) 

the  composition  of  another :  this  is  their  transition  :  the  transi 
tion  of  the  gross  elements  earth  and  the  rest,  composing  body, 
is  well  known  *.'  5.  '  Multitudinous ;'  many,  aneka  f  being 
repeated  in  various  objects  and  persons,  as  '  the  faculties  in 
different  individuals,  and  the  elements  in  different  forms  $.' 
6.  Supported  by,  referable  to,  asrita  §;  as  an  effect  may  be 
considered  to  be  upheld  by  its  cause,  or  an  individual  referable 
to  a  species  ;  as  trees  form  a  wood.  7.  '  Mergent,'  linga  ||; 
that  which  merges  into,  or  is  lost  or  resolved  into,  its  primary 
elements,  as  subsequently  explained.  Intellect  and  the  rest 
are  the  lingas,  signs,  marks,  or  characteristic  circumstances 
of  nature  :  and  when  they  lose  their  individuality,  or  discrete 
existence,  they  may  be  said  to  have  been  absorbed  by,  or  to 
have  fused  or  merged  into,  their  original  source.  Although 
therefore,  the  application  of  linga  as  an  attributive  in  this  sense 
is  technical,  the  import  is  not  so  widely  different  from  that  of 
the  substantive  as  might  at  first  be  imagined.  VACHASPATI, 
explaining  the  term,  has,  '  Linga,  the  characteristic  of  pra- 
dhdna,  for  these  principles,  buddhi  and  the  rest,  are  its  charac 
teristics,  as  will  be  hereafter  explained  IT:'  and  the  author 
of  Sankhya  Chandrika  has,  '  Linga  is  that  which  charac 
terizes,  or  causes  to  be  known  **  ;'  it  is  the  anumdpaka^, 
*  the  basis  of  the  inference:'  '  For  this  effect  (of  nature) 
is  the  parent  of  inference  that  an  undiscrete  cause 
exists  Jf.'  (See  also  Com.  on  V.  5.  p.  24.)  According  to 
these  interpretations,  '  predicative'  or  *  characteristic'  would 
perhaps  be  a  preferable  equivalent ;  but  *  mergent'  or 
'dissoluble  §§'  is  conformable  to  the  Sankhya  Bhdshya. 


^:  srfa?[:  i 


§  anfeRT  i 
IF  TOT  5T«rnrw  ^^r  %rr 

*^  feaf  feiWft  IfT^frT  I  ft 


8 


(     58     ) 

'The   commentator   on  the  S.  Pravachana    explains  it  by  both 
terms   '  inferential'   or   '  resolvable :'    Effect   is  termed  linga 
either   from  its  being   the  ground  of  inference  of  cause,  or  from 
its    progress  to  resolution  *.'    8.     '  Combined,  conjunct,'   s&va- 
yavat ;  explained   by   VACHASPATI,   '  mixing/    misrana$,  or 
'junction/   samyoga§,     as   the   elements   combine    with    one 
another.     It  might   be  said,   then,  that  nature  is  a  compound 
as  its   products   combine    with  it ;  but   this  is  not  so,  for  their 
union   with  nature   is  not  mere   'mixture  or   conjunction,  but 
identification    from  the   sameness   of   the    cause   and   effect  ;|| 
a  notion   which   distinguishes   the  pradhana    of  the  Sankhyas 
from   the  first   principles   of  those    Grecian  philosophers,   who, 
if  their   doctrines   have   been  rightly    represented,  taught  that 
substances   existed  either  as  distinct   particles  of  an  aggregate, 
or  component   parts   of  a   mixture,    in  their  original  form.     In 
the  Sankhya   they   separate   or  reunite   as  one   and  the   same, 
10.  c  Governed  H:'   the  effects   of  nature   depend   upon  its  exis 
tence,    and  each    in  its  turn    produces    its    peculiar    effect  or 
product,   in  furtherance   of  the    influence    of  nature,  or  in  con 
sequence   of  its  existence,   without  which   they  would  cease  to 
be,   and   their   effects   would   be   null;  as,   'In   the   effect   of 
egotism,   which    intellect   has   to   produce,    the    fulfilment    of 
nature  is  regarded;   otherwise  intellect,  being  ineffective,  would 
not  be  able  to  produce  egotism.**' 

The  properties  of  nature,  or  the  undiscrete  principle,  are 
the  reverse  of  these  ;  it  has  no  cause;  it  has  no  end;  it  is  omni 
present;  it  is  immutable  ;  it  is  single;  it  is  self-sustained ;  it  is 
the  subject,  not  the  predicate;  it  is  entire,  or  one  whole;  it  is 
supreme. 


IF 


(     59     ) 

Although  the  especial  object  of  the  text  here  is  the  dis 
similarity  between  the  effects  of  nature  and  their  material  cause 
yet  the  term  avyakta  applies  equally  to  purusha,  or  '  soul,' 
also  an  invisible  or  undiscrete  principle;  and  accordingly  soul 
differs  from  discrete  principles  in  the  same  circumstances  as 
nature.  In  the  properties,  therefore,  of  non-causability, 
constancy,  omnipresence,  immutability,  singleness,  self-support, 
substantiveness.  entireness,  and  supremacy,  soul  and  nature 
correspond.  They  differ,  however,  in  other  respects,  and 
particularly  in  those  in  which  nature  and  its  effects  assimilate, 
as  enumerated  in  the  succeeding  stanza. 


XI. 

A  DISCRETE  principle,  as  well  as  the  chief  (or  un 
discrete)  one,  has  the  three  qualities  :  it  is  indiscrimi- 
native,  objective,  common,  irrational,  prolific.  Soul  is 
in  these  respects,  as  in  those,  the  reverse. 


5«JTT 


<     60     ) 


fr*"f  I 


^r 


^fanfft 


(     61     ) 

for* 


:  i        ^q^w    snrnr 
:  i 


BHASHYA. 

t/ie  iArce  qualities  :  it  is  that  of  which  goodness,  foul 
ness,  and  darkness,  are  the  three  properties.  A  discrete  prin 
ciple  is  indiscriminative  ;  discrimination  does  not  belong 
to  it  :  that  is,  it  cannot  distinguish  which  is  a  discrete  prin 
ciple  and  which  are  properties,  or  that  this  is  an  ox,  that  is 
a  horse  :  such  as  the  properties  are,  such  is  the  principle  ;  such 
as  is  the  principle  such  are  the  properties  ;  and  the  like. 
Objective;  a  discrete  principle  is  to  be  enjoyed  (made  use  of), 
from  its  being  an  object  to  all  men.  Common  ;  from  being 
the  common  possession  of  all,  like  a  harlot.  Irrational  ;  it 
does  not  comprehend  pain,  pleasure,  or  dulness.  Prolific  ; 
thus,  egotism  is  the  progeny  of  intellect  ;  the  five  rudiments 
and  eleven  organs  of  egotism  ;  and  the  five  gross  elements  of 
the  five  rudiments.  These  properties,  to  prolific  inclusive, 
are  specified  as  those  of  a  discrete  principle  ;  and  it  is  in  them 
that  the  chief  (or  undiscrete)  one  is  similar:  "  Such  as  is  a 
discrete  principle,  such  is  the  chief  (or  undiscrete)  one/? 
Therefore  as  a  discrete  principle  has  three  qualities,  so  has, 


(     62     ) 

the  undiscrete,  or  that  of  which  intellect  and  the  rest,  having 
the  three  qualities,  are  the  effects  :  so  in  this  world  effect  is 
of  the  like  quality  with  cause,  as  black  cloth  is  fabricated  with 
black  threads.  A  discrete  principle  is  ^discriminative- ;  so  i& 
the  chief  one,  it  cannot  discern  that  qualities  are  distinct  from 
nature,  that  qualities  are  one  thing,  and  that  nature  is  an 
other  ;  therefore  the  chief  one  is  indiscriminative.  A  discrete 
principle  is  objective  ;  so  is  the  chief  one,  from  its  being  the 
object  of  all  men.  A  discrete  principle  is  common  ;.  so  is  the 
chief  one,  being  common  to  all  things.  A  discrete  principle 
is  irrational ;  so  is  the  chief  one,  as  it  is  not  conscious  of  pain 
or  pleasure,  or  dulness.  Whence  is  this  inferred  ?  From  the 
irrationality  of  its  effects ;  from  an  irrational  lump  of  clay 
proceeds  an  irrational  water-pot.  Thus  has  (nature)  the  chief 
one  been  explained.  Soul  is  in  these  respects,  as  in  those,  the 
reverse :  this  is  now  explained. 

Reverse  of  both  the  discrete  and  undiscrete  principles.  Soul 
is  the  reverse  of  both,  thus  :  Discrete  and  undiscrete  have  (the 
three)  qualities ;  soul  is  devoid  of  qualities :  they  are  indis 
criminative  ;  soul  has  discrimination  :  they  are  objects,  (of  sense 
or  fruition) ;  soul  is  not  an  object  (of  sense  or  fruition)  :  they 
are  common  ;  soul  i.s  specific  :  they  are  irrational ;  soul  is  ra 
tional  ;  for  inasmuch  as  it  comprehends,  or  perfectly  knows, 
pleasure,  pain,  and  dulness  it  is  rational :  they  are  prolific  ; 
soul  is  unprolific  ;  nothing  is  produced  from  soul.  On  these 
grounds  soul  is  said  to  be  the  reverse  of  both  the  discrete  and 
undiscrete  principles. 

It  is  also  said,  as  in  those,  referring  to  the  preceding  verse  ; 
for  as  the  chief  (or  undiscrete)  principle  is  there  said  to  be 
without  cause,  &c.  such  is  the  soul.  It  is  there  stated  that  a 
discrete  principle  is  causable,  inconstant,  and  the  like ;  and 
that  the  undiscrete  one  is  the  reverse ;  that  is,  it  has  no  cause, 
&c.,  so  soul  is  without  cause,  being  no  production.  A  discrete 
principle  is  inconstant;  the  undiscrete  one  is  constant;  so  is  soul; 
and  it  is  immutable  also,  from  its  omnipresence.  A  discrete 
principle  is  multitudinous  ;  the  undiscrete  is  single ;  so  is  soul. 


(     63     ) 

A  discrete  principle  is  supported  ;  the  undiscrete  is  unsup 
ported  ;  so  is  soul.  A  discrete  principle  is  mergent  ;  the  un- 
diserete  immergent  (indissoluble)  ;  so  is  soul  ;  it  is  not  in  any 
way  decomposed.  A  discrete  principle  is  conjunct  ;  the  un 
discrete  one  uncorabined  ;  so  is  s©ul  ;  for  there  are  no  (com 
ponent)  parts,  such  as  sound,  &o.,  in  soul.  Finally,  discrete 
principles  are  governed  ;  the  undiscrete  one  is  independent  *, 
so  is  soul,  governing  (or  presiding  over)  itself.  In  this  way 
the  common  properties  of  soul  and  nature  were  described  in 
the  preceding  stanza  ;  whilst  those  in  which  they  differ,  as 
possession  of  the  three  qualities,  and  the  like,  are  specified  in 
this  verse.  Next  follows  more  particular  mention  of  these 
three  qualities,  with  which  both  discrete  principles  and  the 
undiscrete  one  are  endowed. 

COMMENT. 

In  this  verse  the  properties  common  to  crude  nature  and  to 
its  products  are  specified,  continuing  the  reference  to  the  eighth 
verse,  in  which  it  was  asserted,  that  in  some  respects  the  effects 
of  nature  itself  were  analogous.  This  being  effected,  the  text 
proceeds  to  state  that  soul  has  not  the  properties  which  are 
common  to  nature  and  its  products,  but  possesses  those  which 
are  peculiar  to  the  former  ;  agreeing  therefore  in  some  respects 
with  crude  nature,  but  dissimilar  in  every  respect  to  its  effects 
or  products. 

The  three  qualities,*  or  satwa^,  '  goodness/  rajasl,  '  foulness,' 
and  tamas\\,  '  darkness',  which  are  familiar  to  all  the  systems  of 
of  Hindu  speculation,  are  more  particularly  described  in  the 
nextaverse  ;  soul,  has  them  not.  Pradhana?  'the  chief  one,'  crude 
nature,  and  its  products,  have  not  discrimination,  iiveka§,  tha 
faculty  of  discerning  the  real  and  essential  differences  of  things, 
of  <  distinguishing  between  matter  and  spirit,  of  knowing  self. 
the  exercise  of  which  is  the  source  of  final  liberation  (from' 
-existence)T.  By  the  term  '  objective**'  is  intended  that  which 


if 

** 


(     64     ) 

may  be  used  or  enjoyed,  such  as  the  faculties  of  the  mind 
and  the  organs  of  sense;  or  such  as  may  be  perceived  by 
observation,  vijndna* :  such  nature,  or  pradhdna,  may 
also  be  considered  as  the  origin  of  all  things  inferable  by  rea 
son.  Soul,  on  the  contrary,  is  the  observer  or  enjoyer,  as  after 
wards  explained.  Achetana'f  '  irrational;'  that  which  does  not 
think  or  feel  unconscious,  non-sentient;  as  in  the  Meghaduta; 
'Those  afflicted  by  desire  seek  relief  both,  from  rational  and  irra 
tional  objects,!''  explained  either  '  living  and  lifeless§'  or 
*  knowing  and  ignorant)!'  chetana^  being  defined  knowledge 
of  right  and  wrong,  or  '  of  what  ought,  and  what  ought  not,  to 
be  done  **.' 

The  general  position,  that  the  properties  of  soul  are  the 
reverse  of  those  of  the  products  of  nature,  requires,  however, 
some  modification  in  one  instance.  A  discrete  principle  is 
said  to  be  multitudinous,  many,  awe/caff;  consequently  soul 
should  be  single,  eka  JJ;  and  it  is  so,  according  to  the  8m 
JBhdshya§§.  On  the  other  hand,  the  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi 
makes  soul  agree  with  discrete  principles,  in  being  multitudi 
nous  :  The  properties  of  non-causability,  constancy,  and  the 
rest,  are  common  to  soul  and  nature ;  multitudinousness  is  a 
property  common  to  (soul  and)  an  undiscrete  principle||||.'  The 
8.  Chandrika  confirms  the  interpretation,  '  The  phrase  tathd, 
cha  implies  that  (soul)  is  analogous  to  the  undiscrete  principle 
in  non-causability  and  the  rest,  and  analogous  to  discrete 
principles  in  manifold  enumeration1^.'  This  is,  in  fact,  the 
Sankhya  doctrine,  as  subsequently  laid  down  by  the  text,  ver. 
18,  and  is  conformable  to  the  Sutra  of  KAPILA  ;  *  Multitude 


*  ftflR  I 

11 


» 

**      f^mp&^rr  i  ft 

:  t 


(     65     ) 

of  souls  is  proved  by  variety  of  condition* :'  that  is,  '  the 
virtuous  are  born  again  in  heaven,  the  wicked  are  regenerated 
in  hell ;  the  fool  wanders  in  error,  the  wise  man  is  set  freet/ 
Either,  therefore,  GAURAPADA  has  made  a  mistake,  or  by  his 
4ka  is  to  be  understood,  not  that  soul  in  general  is  one  only, 
but  that  it  is  single,  or  several,  in  its  different  migrations ; 
or,  as  Mr.  Colebrooke  renders  it  (R.  A.  S.  Trans,  vol.  I.  p.  31), 
'  individual/  So  in  the  Sutras  it  is  said,  '  that  there  may  be 
various  unions  of  one  soul,  according  to  difference  of  receptacle, 
as  the  etherial  element  may  be  confined  in  a  variety  of  ves- 
selsj.'  This  singleness  of  soul  applies  therefore  to  that  par 
ticular  soul  which  is  subjected  to  its  own  varied  course  of 
birth,  death,  bondage,  and  liberation ;  for,  as  the  commentator 
observes,  '  one  soul  is  born,  not  another  (in  a  regenerated 
body)||.'  The  singleness  of  soul  therefore,  as  asserted  by 
GAURAPADA,  is  no  doubt  to  be  understood  in  this  sense. 


:  sRjRrafRrftwil: 


XII. 

THE  qualities  respectively  consist  in  pleasure,  pain, 
and  dulness  ;  are  adapted  to  manifestation,  activity, 
and  restraint  ;  mutually  domineer  ;  rest  on  each  other; 
produce  each  other  ;  consort  together  ;  and  are  reci 
procally  present. 


#  5F 


.    W 


(     66     ) 


i  I  rT5T 


fwil  ^T^mc 


:  I  iff  T^?T 


?pir  ffw 


|fRt  f  s 


(     67     ) 


BEASHYA. 

The  qualities  goodness,  foulness,  and  darkness,  are  severally 
the  same  as  what  is  agreeable,  what  is  disagreeable,  and  what 
is  indifferent  :  thus  goodness  is  all  that  is  pleasure,  priti 
meaning  '  pleasure  ;'  being  one  with  (or  consisting  of)  that 
(pleasure)  :  foulness  is  one  with,  or  consists  of,  disagreeableness 
(apriti)  :  darkness  consists  of,  or  is  the  same  with,  dulness  ; 
vishdda  meaning  moha,  '  dulness,  stupidity.*  Next,  are  adapt 
ed  to  'manifestation,  &c.  ;  a-rtha  signifying  '  competency'  or 
'  fitness.'  Groodness,  then,  is  for  the  sake  of  manifestation  ;  it 
is  fit  for,  or  adapted  to  it  :  foulness  is  for  activity  ;  darkness 
for  restraint  :  that  is,  the  qualities  are  connected  with,  or 
possessed  of,  manifestation,  action,  and  inertia.  They  mu 
tually  domineer  :  they  are  mutually  paramount,  sustaining, 
productive,  cooperative,  and  coexistent.  Thus,  they  are  said 
to  domineer  mutually  ;  that  is,  they  severally  prevail  or  pre 
dominate  over  each  other,  or  they  are  displayed  by  the  pro 
perties  of  pleasure,  pain,  or  dulness.  When  goodness  is 
dominant,  it  overpowers  foulness  and  darkness  by  its  own  pro 
perties,  and  is  exhibited  or  identified  with  light  and  joy. 
When  foulness  predominates,  it  overpowers  goodness  and  dark 
ness,  and  exists  in  pain  and  action.  When  darkness  triumphs* 
it  suppresses  goodness  and  foulness,  and  is  supreme  as  one 
with  insensibility  and  inaction.  So  they  rest  on  each  other  : 
the  qualities  combine  with  one  another,  like  binary  atoms. 
They  produce  each  other,  as  the  lump  of  clay  generates  the 
earthen  jar.  Tliey  consort  together,  as  males  and  females 
cohabit:  as  it  is  said,  "Goodness  is  the  consort  of  foulness* 
foulness  of  goodness  ;  darkness  is  called  the  consort  of  both  " 


(     68     ) 

that  is,  they  are  respectively  associates.  They  are  recipro 
cally  present :  they  abide  or  exist  reciprocally,  according  to  the 
text,  "  qualities  abide  in  qualities"  (that  is,  the  same  qualities 
may  be  regarded  as  different,  according  to  their  different 
effects)  :  thus,  a  beautiful  and  amiable  woman,  who  is  a  source 
of  delight  to  every  one  else,  is  the  cause  of  misery  to  the  other 
wives  of  her  husband,  and  of  bewilderment  (insensibility)  to 
the  dissolute :  and  in  this  manner  she  is  the  cause  of  the 
influence  of  all  three  qualities.  Thus  also,  a  king,  assiduous 
in  protecting  his  people,  and  curbing  the  profligate,  is  the 
cause  of  happiness  to  the  good,  of  misery  and  mortification  to 
the  bad  :  here  foulness  (activity)  produces  the  effects  of  good 
ness  and  darkness.  So  darkness,  by  its  investing  nature,  pro 
duces  the  effects  of  goodness  and  foulness,  as  clouds,  over 
shadowing  the  heavens,  cause  delight  upon  earth,  animate  by 
their  rain  the  active  labours  of  the  husbandman,  and  over 
whelm  absent  lovers  with  despair.  In  this  manner  the  three 
qualities  are  reciprocally  present  (or  perform  the  functions  of 
one  another). 

COMMENT- 

The  three  qualities  are  here  described,  by  their  effects  and 
relations;  by  the  production  of  pleasure,  pain,  and  indifference; 
and  by  the  manner  in  which  they  are  detached  or  combined  in 
their  operations  and  influence. 

The  terms  priti  and  apriti  are  here  used  as  synonymes  of 
sukha,  l  pleasure,'  and  dukha,  '  pain  ;'  vishdda  as  a  synonyme 
of  moha,  '  bewilderment,  stupefaction,  dulness,  or  insensibility.' 
The  composition  of  dtma  with  these  terms,  prity&tmaka, 
implies  '  essential  or  inseparable  presence,'  like  that  of  life  or 
soul  in  the  living  body.  &n  exact  equivalent  for  such  a 
compound  can  scarcely  perhaps  be  supplied,  but  the  sense 
maybe  conveyed  by  such  expressions  as  'consists  of,  com 
prehends,  is  one  or  identical  with/  and  the  like.  A'tma  is 
here  used  also  to  shew  that  the  properties  have  positive 


(     69     ) 

existence  ;  that  is,  pleasure  is  not  the  mere  absence  of  pain  ; 
pain  is  not  the  mere  absence  of  pleasure  ;  as,  '  Negatives  could 
not  be  essential  ingredients  in  any  thing  :  pleasure,  pain,  and 
insensibility  are  therefore  entities  ;  the  work  dtma  implying 
being,  existence,  existent  nature,  or  property*.' 

The  absolute  and  relative  influence  of  the  several  qualities 
is  sufficiently  illustrated  by  GAUKAPA'DA  ;  but  VA'CHASPATI 
understands  the  text  as  in  some  respects  differently  construct 
ed.  Instead  of  considering  the  last  term,  vrittaya^,  as  a  dis 
tinct  condition,  anyonyavrittaya].,  expounded  in  the  8.  Bhdshya, 
parasparam  varttante\\,  they  are  reciprocally  present,  he  inter-^ 
prets  vritti  by  kriyd,  '  act,  operation,  function,'  and  compounds 
it  with  each  of  the  foregoing  terms§.  In  all  other  respects 
his  explanation  of  the  terms  coincides  with  that  of  the  elder 
commentator.  The  passage  quoted  by  GAUBAPA'DA  is  cited  by 
VA'CHASPATI,  with  some  difference,  from  the  Vedas  :  *  As  it  is 
said  in  the  dgctma,  all  universally  present  are  the  associates 
of  each  other  :  goodness  is  the  partner  of  foulness,  foulness  of 
goodness ;  both  are  the  companions  of  darkness,  and  darkness 
is  said  to  be  the  associate  of  both.  Their  original  connexion, 
or  disjunction,  is  never  observedHV  The  Chandrikd  concurs 
with  the  8.  Tatwa  Kaumudi  in  the  explanation  of  vritti**. 
This  commentary  likewise  offers  some  additional  interpretation 
of  the  terms  priti,  &c.  Thus  prtti  is  said  to  comprise  '  recti- 


ftq^r^fr 


## 


(     70    ) 

tude,  gentleness,  modesty,  faith,  patience,  clemency,  wisdom  :' 
apriti,  besides  c  misery,'  implies  *  hatred,  violence,  envy,  abuse, 
wickedness  ;'  and  vishdda  is  not  only  '  insensibility/  but  '  tardi 
ness,  fear,  infidelity,  dishonesty,  avarice;  and  ignorance.  When 
ever  either  of  these  is  observed,  it  is  referable  to  the  corres 
ponding  quality*.' 

In  speaking  of  qualities,  however,  the  term  guna  is  not  to  be 
regarded  as  an  insubstantial  accidental  attribute,  but  as  a 
substance  discernible  by  soul  through  the  medium  of  the  facul 
ties.  It  is,  in  fact,  nature,  or  prakriti,  in  one  of  its  three 
constituent  parts  or  conditions,  unduly  prominent  ;  nature  en 
tire,  or  unmodified,  being  nothing  more  than  the  three  qualities 
in  equipoise,  according  to  the  Sutra,  Prakriti  is  the  equal 
state  of  goodness,  foulness,  and  darknesst,  on  which  the  com 
mentator  remarks,  Satwa  and  the  rest  are  "things,"  not  specific 
properties,  from  their  being  subject  to  combination  or  disjunc 
tion,  and  from  their  having  the  properties  of  lightness,  heavi 
ness,  and  strength}  ;'  and  again  '  From  the  construction  of  in 
tellect  and  the  rest  endowed  with  the  three  properties,  like 
cords  wherewith  to  bind  the  victim  the  soul||.'  So  in  the  S. 
Sara,  i  Goodness  and  the  rest  are  not  the  faculties  of  that 
(prakriti),  being  of  the  same  nature§'  —  '  Such  expressions  as 
"  qualities  of  nature"  are  to  be  understood  (in  the  same  sense) 
as  (the  term)  "  the  trees  of  a  f  orest"HV  that  is,  the  forest  is 


* 

m  : 


surfer, 


(     71     ) 

nothing  different  from  the  trees  of  which  it  is  the  aggregate, 
although  particular  trees  or  clumps  may  sometimes  be  indivi 
dualized.  In  like  manner  nature  is  not  different  from  the 
qualities,  but  is  the  aggregate  of  them.  '  Ingredients  or  con 
stituents  of  nature,'  therefore,  would  be  preferable  term  per 
haps  to  '  quality  ;'  but  '  quality'  is  the  more  ordinary  accepta 
tion  of  the  word  guna,  and  it  may  therefore  be  used,  re 
membering  only  the  distinction  made  by  the  Sankhyas  of  its 
materiality,  as  a  constituent  part  of  nature  itself;  the  qualities 
being,  in  fact,  only  the  conditions  of  things,  and  therefore  not 
separable  from  the  things  themselves.  It  may  be  thought 
possible  that  there  is  some  connection  between  the  qunas 
which  are  the  constituents,  of  prakriti,  and  the  qualities,  pas 
sions,  or  affections  of  primary  matter  of  the  older  philosophers, 
alluded  to  by  Aristotle  ;  from  the  changes  produced  by  which 
on  one  unaltered  substance  all  things  originated  :  Trjg  (J.GV  ovo-ias 
v7ro/uL€vov(rr]$,  TOt$  Se  TraOeon  /u.eTa/3a\\ovarr]$,  TOVTO  <TTOiyeiov  Kal 
Tavrrjv  TCOV  OVTCOV  TY\V  ap\/jv  <pa<Tiv  elvai.  Metaph.  I.  3. 
Another  analogy  may  be  conjectured  in  the  identification  of 
the  two,  gunas,  satwa  and  rajas,  with  prtti,  '  affection,'  and 
apriti,  '  aversion,'  as  they  thus  correspond  with  the  <pi\la  and 
vetKo?,  the  '  love'  and  '  strife'  of  Empedocles  as  the  principles 
of  creation  ;  respectively  the  source  of  what  is  good  or  evil. 

The  sense  in  which  the  several  terms  for  the  three  gunas 
is  employed  is  sufficiently  clear  from  the  .explanation  given  of 
them  in  the  text ;  and  the  meaning  of  the  equivalents  which 
Mr.  Colebrooke  has  assigned  them  must  be  understood  ac 
cording  to  the  same  interpretation.  Prof.  Lassen  renders  them 
essentia,  impetus,  and  caligo ;  which,  similarly  understood, 
are  equally  unobjectionable  :  but  as  the  name  of  a  £  quality  t 
sativa,  is  not  perhaps  well  rendered  by  '  essence,'  or  even  by 
'  existence,'  which  is  its  literal  purport,  '  goodness,'  denoting 
exemption  from  all  imperfection,  seems  to  be  preferable. 
Impetus  is  rather  the  effect  of  rajas,  than  the  quality  ;  and 
the  term  '  foulness,'  derived  from  its  etymology  from  ranf 


(     72    ) 

'  to  colour  or  stain/  will  better  comprehend  its  characteristic 
results.  The  quality  bears  a  striking  analogy  to  the  perturbatio 
of  the  Stoics,  and  might  be  rendered  by  that  word,  or  by 
*  passion/  in  its  generic  acceptation.  '  Darkness/  or  caligo, 
expresses  both  the  literal  and  technical  signification  of  tamas. 


em:  sim«fir  f  r:  M  ^  I 

XIII. 

GOODNESS  is  considered  to  be  alleviating  and  en 
lightening  :  foulness,  urgent  and  versatile  :  darkness, 
heavy  and  enveloping.  Like  a  lamp,  they  cooperate 
for  a  purpose  (by  union  of  contraries). 


f  FH 


fT  f  f% 


(     73     ) 
BHASHYA. 

Goodness  is  alleviating,  &c. — When  goodness  predominates, 
the  frame  is  light,  the  intellect  is  luminous,  and  the  senses  are 
acute.  Foulness  is  urgent  and  versatile. — What  urges,  urgent, 
exciting:  as  a  bull,  upon  seeing  another  bull,  exhibits  vehement 
excitement;  that  is  the  effect  of  foulness.  Foulness  is  also  seen  to 
be  versatile  ;  that  is,  a  person  under  its  influence  is  capricious. 
Darkness  is  heavy  and  enveloping. — Where  darkness  prevails, 
the  members  of  the  body  are  heavy,  the  senses  obtuse,  or  inade 
quate  to  the  performance  of  their  functions.  But  here  it  may 
be  said,  If  these  qualities  are  contraries  to  one  another,  what 
effect  can  they  produce  by  their  several  purposes,  and  how 
therefore  can  it  be  said,  they  co-operate,  like  a  lamp,  for  ct 
(common  purpose).  Like  a  lamp,  their  operation  is  for  a 
(common)  purpose  :  as  a  lamp,  which  is  composed  of  the  op- 
posites,  a  wick,  oil,  and  flame,  illuminates  objects,  so  the 
qualities  of  goodness,  foulness,  and  darkness,  although  contrary 
to  one  another,  effect  a  (common)  purpose. 

This  question  involves  another.  It  was  said  (in  ver.  11) 
that  a  discrete  principle,  as  well  as  the  chief  one,  has  the  three 
qualities,  and  is  indiscriminative,  objective,  and  the  like. 
Admitting  this  to  be  true  of  the  chief  one  (or  nature),  how  is 
it  ascertained  that  intellect  and  the  rest  have  also  the  three 
qualities,  and  are  indiscriminative,  and  the  like  ?  This  is  next 
explained. 

COMMENT. 

The  description  of  the  three  qualities  is  continued  in  this 
Verse. 

Goodness  is  alleviating  ;  lagliu,  '  light ;'  it  is  matter,  elastic 
and  elevating,  generating  upward  and  lateral  motion,  as  in  the 
ascent  of  flame,  and  the  currents  of  the  air.  It  is  the  cause  of 

active  and  perfect  functionality  also  in  the  instruments  of  vita" 
10 


(     74     ) 

iity*  ;     enlightening,    prakdsakam,    <  making   manifest/   the 
objects  of  the  senses.     The  term    ish'tam,  meaning   ordinarily 
'  wished,  desired/  imports  in  the  text  merely  drishtam,  '  seen, 
regarded,  considered'  —  *  by  the  Sankhya   teachers-)-.'     Foulness 
is  urgent  and  versatile.  —  The  qualities  of  goodness  and  dark 
ness  are  both  inert   and  inoperative,  even  with  regard  to  their 
own   peculiar   consequences  ;  and   it   is   only   by  the  restless 
activity  and  stimulating  agency  of  the  quality  of  foulness   that 
they  are  roused  to  action  ;  upash'tambhakam  }   being   here  ex 
plained  to  signify  '  stimulating,   impelling/  udyotakam,  preda- 
kam\\,  contrary   to   its   usual   sense    of  '  opposing,   hindering.' 
It  might   be  supposed  to  imply  some  relation  to  the  primitive 
shtabhi§,  '  stop,  hinder,  oppose,   be   stupid  ;'   inasmuch   as   the 
idea  appears  to  be  that  of  action  consequent  upon   obstruction, 
or  inertia,  '  reaction.'     Thus,  as   illustrated  in  the   8.  Bhdshya, 
a  bull  displays   excitement   on  beholding,  or  being  opposed  by, 
another.     The  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi   has,   '  The   qualities  good 
ness,    and  darkness,    on  account    of  their  own   inertia,  are   in 
operative,  in  regard  to  the  exercise  of  their   own  effects,    until 
excited  by  foulness.     Having  been  roused  from  inactivity,  they 
are  made  to  put  forth    vigour  and  energy  ;  and  therefore  foul 
ness   is  said   to  be   uigentK.'     The  Chandrikd  is  to  the   same 
effect  :  '  The  meaning  is  this  :    From  the  production   of  combi 
nation  and  activity  by  foulness,  the  definition  of  that  quality  is 
excitement   and   versatility**.'     It  is   not  necessary,   however, 
to  take  into   consideration   the  sense  of  the  primitive  sh'tabhi, 
for  upasKtambhaka   is  not   derived   from  that  root,  but  from 
stambhu^,   a    Sautra   root  ;    which    therefore,   although    the 
meanings   of  sh'tabhi  are  usually   also  assigned  to  it,  may  take 
the  import  required  by  the  text,  of  '  urging'  or  *  exciting.' 


*  jwrn      rrqr  t  Hirers  :  i       } 

i         I!  ssfara?  srs*  i         §  sfa  i 


** 

:  »  tt 


(     75     ) 

The  quality  of  darkness  is  '  heavy/  guru,  causing  sluggish 
ness  of  body  and  dulness  of  mind.  It  is  also  varynaka,  '  sur 
rounding,  enveloping/  so  as  to  obstruct  light,  retard 
motion,  &c. 

But  these  qualities,  although  contraries,  co-operate  for  a 
common  purpose ;  as  the  cotton,  the  oil,  and  the  flame,  al 
though  mutually  destructive,  combine  in  a  lamp  to  give  light. 
The  common  object  of  the  qualities  is  the  fulfilment  of  the 
purpose  of  soul,  as  is  subsequently  explained. 


XIV. 

INDISCRIMINATIVENESS  and  the  rest  xof  the  properties 
of  a  discrete  principle)  are  proved  by  the  influence  of 
the  three  qualities,  and  the  absence  thereof  in  the 
reverse.  The  undiscrete  principle,  moreover,  (as  well 
as  the  influence  of  the  three  qualities,)  is  demonstrat 
ed  by  effect  possessing  the  properties  of  its  cause 
(and  by  the  absence  of  contrariety), 


^nrfir 


(     76      ) 


BHASHYA. 

That  which  is  the  property  of  indiscriminativeness  and  the 
rest  is  proved  from  the  influence  of  the  three  qualities  in 
mahat  and  the  other  discrete  principles  :  but  this  is  not  proved 
in  the  ur  discrete  ;  therefore  it  is  said,  by  the  absence  the  reverse 
of  it  :  the  reverse  of  it  ;  the  absence  ;  the  non-existence  of  the 
reverse  of  that:  thence  the  undiscrete  principle  is  established;  as, 
where  there  are  threads,  there  is  cloth  ;  the  threads  are  not  one 
thing,  and  the  cloth  another.  Why  so  1  From  the  absence  of 
the  reverse  (they  are  not  contraries  to  each  other).  In  this 
manner  the  discrete  and  undiscrete  principles  are  established. 
The  latter  is  remote,  the  former  is  near  :  but  he  who  perceives 
discrete  principles,  perceives  the  undiscrete  one  also,  as  there  is 
no  contrariety  between  them.  Hence  also  the  undiscrete  one 
is  proved  by  effect  possessing  the  properties  of  cause  in  this 
world  :  such  as  is  the  nature  of  the  cause,  such  is  that  of  the 
effect;  thus  from  black  threads  black  cloth  is  made.  In  the 
same  mariner,  as  the  characteristics  of  intellect  and  the  rest 
are  their  being  indiscriminative,  objective,  common,  irrational, 
prolific,  such  as  they  are,  such  the  undiscrete  is  proved  essenti 
ally  to  be.  From  the  influence  of  the  three  qualities,  indis, 
criminativeness  and  the  rest  are  proved  to  be  in  discrete  princi 
ples  ;  and  from  there  being  no  difference  between  them  (and 


(     77     ) 

the  undiscrete),  and  from  essential  identity  of  the  properties 
of  cause  and  effect,  the  nndiscrete  principle  also  is  demon 
strated. 

But  it  is  replied,  this  cannot  be  true  ;  for  in  this  world  that 
which  is  not  apprehended  is  not ;  but  the  undiscrete  one  is, 
although  not  applicable. 

COMMENT. 

It  was  stated  in  ver.  8,  that  mahat  and  the  other  effects  of 
prakriti  were  in  some  respects  like,  and  in  others  unlike,  to 
their  original.  The  circumstances  in  which  they  were  dis 
similar  were  specified  in  ver.  10,  and  those  in  which  they 
agreed  in  ver.  11.  In  the  latter  stanza,  the  first  of  the  con 
current  properties  that  was  named  was  that  of  their  possessing 
the  three  qualities ;  and  in  verses  12  and  13  it  was  explained 
what  was  meant  by  the  three  qualities.  In  the  present  stanza 
it  is  asserted,  that  as  the  effects  of  prakriti  have  the  three 
qualities,  they  must  have,  as  a  necessary  consequence,  the  other 
properties,  want  of  discrimination  and  the  rest,  enumerated  in 
ver.  11 ;  and  that  as  they  have  them,  their  origin,  or  prakriti, 
must  have  them  also,  as  there  is  no  essential  difference  bet 
ween  the  properties  of  cause  and  effect. 

The  influence  of  goodness,  foulness,  and  darkness,  or  the 
varied  affections  and  conditions  of  all  substances,  is  the  obvious 
cause  of  perplexity,  or  want  of  discrimination,  &c.;  being,  in 
fact,  the  same  state  or  condition.  Traigunya  is  the  influence 
or  any  consequence  of  the  three  gunas.  The  next  expression 
is  variously  interpreted. 

Mr.  Colebrooke  renders  tad  viparyaya  abhdvdt*,  i  and  from 
the  absence  thereof  in  the  reverse ;'  that  is,  the  absence  of  want 
of  discrimination,  &c.  in  that  subject  which  is  the  reverse  of  the 


(     78     ) 

material  products  of  nature,  as,  for  instance,  soul,  is  a  negative 
proof  of  their  existence  in  the  former.  The  properties  of 
contraries  are  contrary.  Soul  and  matter  are  contraries,  and 
consequently  their  properties  are  mutually  the  reverse  of  each 
other :  but  one  property  of  soul  is  freedom  from  the  three 
qalities,  whilst  that  of  matter,  or  any  material  product  of  pra 
kriti,  is  their  possession  ;  consequently  the  former  must  be  cap 
able,  of  discrimination.  The  same  may  be  said  of  the  other 
properties  of  mahat  arid  the  rest.  Thus  YACBESPATI  observes  : 
'  It  (the  assertion)  is  first  plainly  affirmatively  expressed  in  the 
natural  order :  it  is  then  put  negatively,  or  in  the  inverted 
°rder  ;  from  the  absence  thereof  in  the  reverse  ;  from;  the  ab 
sence  of  the  three  qualities  in  soul,  as  the  reverse  of  the  pro 
ducts  of  prakriti,  in  regard  to  want  of  discrimination  and  the 
like*/  The  S.  Chandrika  has-  a  similar  explanation :  '  The 
reverse  of  that  want  of  discrimination  j  where  that  is  that  is  the 
reverse  (of  mahat,  &c.),  or  soul:  for  in  soul  there  are  not  the 
three  qualities  ;  or,  where  there  is  not  want  of  discrimination 
there  are  not  three  qualities,  as  in  sourf :'  intimating,  therefore, 
that  tad,  '  thereof,'  may  refer  either  to  the  three  qualities 
traigunya,  or  to  want  of  discrimination,  &c. 

There  is,  however,  another  sense  attached  to  the  expression  T 
and  the  reverse  is  understood  not  to  signify  souly  or  any  thing 
contrary  to  mahat  and  the  rest,  but  to  imply  contrariety  or  in 
compatibility  in  the  properties  of  their  origin,  or  prakriti:  that 
is,  iiidiscriminativeness  and  the  rest  are  the  properties  of  mahat 
&c.  not  only  from  their  possessing  the  three  qualities,  but  be 
cause  there  is  nothing  contrary  to  indiscriminativeness,  &c.  in 
prakriti.  This  proposition  is  indicated  by  VACHESPATI,  who, 
after  explaining  the  passage  as  above,  adds,  '  Or  it  may  be 
understood  as  taking  for  its  two  subjects  vy&kta  and  avyakta 


(    79     ) 

((discrete  and  undiscrete  matter),  and  by  the  inverted  proposi 
tion  (or  negatively)  asserting  that  there  is  no  reason  (to  the 
contrary)  arising  from  one  being  exempt  from  the  three  quali 
ties*.'  The  same  is  more  explicitly  stated  by  GAURAJPADA. 
The  absence  of  indiscriminativeness,  he  observes,  as  deduced 
from  the  influence  of  the  three  qualities,  relates  in  the  first  in 
stance  to  vyakta,  'discrete  matter/  mot  to  avyakta,  or  'indiscrete:' 
but  the  same  must  apply  to  the  latter  also,  because  there  is  no 
.property  belonging  to  it  which  is  incompatible  with,  or  the  re 
verse,  of,  the  properties  of  the  vyakta,  or  *  discrete  matter,' 
mahat,  &c,;  as  in  the  case  ©f  the  cloth  sund  the  threads  of  which 
it  is  woven,  there  is  no  incompatibility  between  them. 

The  first  portion  of  the  stanza  having  shewn,  then,  either 
simply  that  discrete  matter  is  possessed  of  indiscriminativeness, 
^&c.  or  that  both  it  and  indiscrete  matter  are  equally  devoid  of 
discrimination,  proceeds  to  draw  the  conclusion  that  such  an 
indiscrete  cause  must  exist,  endowed  with  properties  similar  to 
those  of  its  indiscrete  effects,  because  there  is  no  difference  of 
.property  between  cause  and  effect;  agreeably  to  the  Sutra, 
'  The  three  qualities,  insensibility  and  the  -rest,  belong  to  both 
^prakriti  and  its  .products)!:'  and  VACHESPATI  observes,  '  Effect 
is  seen  to  be  the  same  in  its  properties  with  cause,  As  the 
.properties  of  the  threads,  &c.  are  identical  with  those  of  cloth 
and  the  like,  so  the  attributes  of  pleasure,  pain,  and  insensibi 
lity,  evidenced  in  the  effects,  which  are  distinguished  as  mahat 
•and  the  rest,  are  .proofs  that  similar  conditions  must  belong  to 
their  cause :  the  existence  of  $radh&na  or  avy&kta^  as  a,  cause, 
of  which  pleasure,  pain,  and  insensibility  -are  the  conditions,  is 
consequently  established!/ 


# 

t 


. 


(     80     ) 


XV. 

SINCK  specific  objects  are  finite  ;  since  there  is  homo- 
geneousness  ;  since  effects  exist  through  energy  ;  since 
there  is  a  parting  (or  issue)  of  effects  from  cause,  and 
a  reunion  of  the  universe,  — 


f  5 


JT*R 


W: 


(      81      ) 


BHASHYA. 

The  undiscrete  principle  is  cause  :  this  is  the  completion  of 
the  construction  of  the  sentence.  Since  specific  objects  are 
finite  :  as  in  the  world,  wherever  the  agent  is,  his  limits  are 
observed  :  thus,  a  potter,  makes  certain  jars  with  certain  por 
tions  of  clay  ;  so  with  intellect:  intellect  and  the  other  charac 
teristics  (of  nature)  as  finite,  as  specific  effects  o'f  it.  Intellect 
is  one,  egotism  is  one,  the  subtile  rudiments  are  five,  the  organs 
eleven,  the  gross  elements  five  :  from  the  limitation  of  these 
species  nature  is  their  cause,  which  produces  finite  discrete 
principles.  If  nature  were  not  the  cause,  then  discrete  princi 
ples  would  have  no  limit:  from  the  measure  (or  limit)  of  specific 
objects,  therefore,  nature  exists,  whence  discrete  principles  are 
produced.  Since  there  is  homogeneoiisness  :  as  in  the  world  ^ 
that  which  is  notorious  is  observed  ;  for  having  seen  a  religious 
student  engaged  in  sacred  study,  it  follows  that  his  parents 
were  assuredly  of  the  Brahmanical  tribe  :  so  having  observed 
that  mahat  and  the  other  characteristics  have  the  three  quali 
ties,  we  conclude  what  their  cause  must  be  ;  and  in  this  way 
11 


(     82     ) 

from  homogeneousness  the  chief  one  exists.  Since  effects  exist 
through  energy :  in  life,  that  which  is  effective  in  any  thing  is 
active  in  the  same  :  a  potter  is  able  to  make  a  jar,  therefore  he 
makes  a  jar,  not  a  piece  of  cloth.  Since  there  is  a  parting  of 
effect  from  cause  :  the  chief  one  is  cause  ;  that  which  makes  is 
cause,  that  which  is  made  is  effect :  the  separation  of  cause  and 
effect :  thus ;  a  jar  is  competent  to  hold  curds,  honey,  water, 
milk  ;  not  so  is  its  cause,  .or  the  lump  of  clay  ;  but  the  lump  of 
clay  produces  the  jar,  the  jar  does  not  produce  the  lump  of  clay. 
So  having  observed  intellect  and  the  other  effects,  it  is  inferred 
that  cause  must  have  been  separated,  of  which  these  discrete 
principles  are  detached  portions.  Again,  since  there  is  a 
reunion  of  the  universe  (vaiswarupa).  Viswa  here  means 
'  the  world  ;'  rupa,  '  individualization'  (or  specific  form)  :  the 
abstract  condition  of  the  form  of  the  world  is  the  uni verse:  from 
its  reunion,  nature  exists  (as  cause) ;  whence  there  is  no  mu 
tual  separation  of  the  five  gross  elements,  earth  &c.,  composing 
the  three  worlds ;  or,  the  three  worlds  are  comprised  in  the 
gross  elements.  The  five  gross  elements  are  earth,  water,  fire, 
air,  ether ;  which  at  the  season  of  general  dissolution  return  in 
the  order  of  creation  to  a  state  of  non -separation,  or  into  the 
modified  five  subtile  rudiments :  they  and  the  eleven  organs 
reunite  in  egotism ;  egotism  resolves  into  intellect ;  and  intellect 
into  nature.  Thus  the  three  worlds,  at  the  period  of  general 
dissolution,  reunite  in  nature;  and  from  such  reunion  of  the  dis 
crete  and  undiscrete  principles,  like  that  of  curds  and  milk,  it 
follows  that  the  undiscrete  principle  is  cause. 

COMMENT- 

.  The  sentence  is  incomplete,  the  government  being  in  the 
first  member  of  the  following  verse  ;  kdranam  asti-avyaktam, 
There  is  (a  general)  cause  (which  is  undiscrete).'  Hitherto 
the  subjects  discussed  haye  been  the  existence  of  effects,  and 
their  correspondence  or  disagreement  with  their  cause.  It  if 
now  she>rn  that  cause  exists  imperceptible,  or  undiscrete. 


(     83     ) 

From  specific  effects  being  finite :  from  the  certain  or  definite 
measure  of  the  varieties  of  discrete  principles,  as  one  intellect, 
one  egotism,  five  rudiments,  and  the  like.  If  there  were  no 
certain  and  defined  cause,  the  effects  would  be  indefinite  and 
unlimited :  the  water-jar,  however,  must  be  limited  by  the 
earth  of  which  it  consists,  and  which,  as  a  distinct  body,  is  no 
longer  extant.  '  Homogeneousness/  samanwaya,  is  defined 
*  the  common  nar  ure  of  different  things*,'  as  the  property  of 
generating  pain,  pleasure,  and  dulness,  which  is  possessed  by 
intellect  and  the  rest.  Effects  exist  through  energy  :  '  through 
the  energy,  ability,  or  power  of  cause  they  become  activef:* 
A  parting,  or  issue,  of  effect  from  cause,  and  final  reunion  of 
the  separated  effect.  Vaiswartipa  is  merely  a  synonyme  of 
kdrya, {  effect ;'  that  which  is  of  various,  or  every,  sort  of  form» 
or  nature.  The  evolution  of  effect  from  unseparated  cause  is 
illustrated  by  comparing  nature  to  a  tortoise,  the  limbs  of 
which  are  at  one  time  protruded,  and  at  another  retracted 
within  the  shell :  '  As  when  the  limbs  which  are  in  the  body  of 
the  tortoise  protrude,  then  they  are  distinguished,  or  (it  is  said) 
this  is  the  body,  those  are  the  limbs  :  so  when  they  are  with- 
drawn  into  it  they  are  undistinguished  (from  the  body)!'.  $• 
Tatwa  Kaumudi.  In  like  manner  the  water-jar  or  the  diadem 
exist  in  the  lump  o-f  clay  or  of  gold,  but  are  distinguished  from 
it  only  when  individually  manifested ;  they  become  mere  clay  or 
gold  again  on  losing  their  detached  condition  :  thus  earth  and 
the  rest  exist  in  the  subtile  rudiments ;  those  and  the  organs  of 
sense  and  action  in  egotism;  egotism  in  intellect;  and  intellect  in 
nature:  when  manifested  or  put  forth  they  are  separated  or  dis 
tinguished  from  their  several  sources,  but  at  the  period  of  univer 
sal  dissolution  lose  their  distinct  form,  and  become  progressively 


(     84     ) 

ene  with  their  common  original :  the  existence  of  which  there 
fore,  as  their  undiscrete  cause,  is  proved  both  by  their  appear 
ance  or  separation.,  and  disappearance  or  reunion. 


XVJ. 

THERE  is  a  general  cause,  which  is  undiscrete.  It 
operates  by  means  of  the  three  qualities,  and  by  mix 
ture,  by  modification,  as  water;  for  different  objects 
are  diversified  by  influence  of  the  several  qualities  re 
spectively. 


qz 


BHASHYA. 


That  which  is  known  as  the  undiscrete  principle  is  the 
cause  ;  whence  intellect  and  the  other  effects  proceed.  It 
operates  by  means  of  the  three  qualities.  —  That  in  which  are 
the  three  qualities,  goodness,  foulness,  and  darkness,  is  the 
(aggregate  of  the)  three  qualities.  What  then  is  that  ?  The 
equipoised  condition  of  goodness,  foulness,  and  darkness,  is  the 
chief  one  (nature).  Also,  from  mixture.  —  In  like  manner  as 
the  Ganges  unites  into  one  river  the  three  streams  that  descend 
upon  the  head  of  Rtidra,  so  the  (aggregate  of  the)  three 
qualities,  the  undiscrete,  produces  a  single  discrete  principle  . 
or,  as  many  threads  combined  from  one  piece  of  cloth,  so  the 
undiscrete  generates  intellect  and  the  rest  from  the  inter 
weaving  of  the  three  qualities  :  and  thus  from  the  influence  of 
the  three  qualities  and  their  aggregation  the  discrete  world 
proceeds.  But  if  discrete  principles  proceed  from  one  un 
discrete,  then  one  form  should  be  common  to  all.  This  objec 
tion  is  invalid  ;  for  it  is  by  modification,  like  water,  from 
a  variety  in  the  receptacles  of  the  several  qualities,  that  the 
three  worlds,  derived  from  one  undiscrete  principle,  assume 
different  conditions  of  being.  The  gods  are  united  with  plea 
sure,  mankind  with  pain,  animals  with  dulness  ;  so  that  a 


(     86     ) 

discrete  principle,  emanating  from  one  nature,  becomes  modi 
fied,  like  water,  according  to  the  diversified  receptacles  of  the 
q  ualities.  Prati  prati  implies  '  several  order  :'  gund  srayat 
'  a  receptacle  of  the  qualities,'  by  the  difference  of  that  recep 
tacle  (according  to  that  several  receptacle)  in  which  it  is 
lodged.  Discrete  principles  are  varied  from  modification  ;  as  the 
simple  element  water,  when  fallen  from  the  atmosphere,  ia 
diversely  modified  as  various  fluids,  according  to  its  various 
combinations,  so  from  one  pradhdna  proceed  the  three  worlds, 
which  are  no  longer  of  one  (uniform)  character.  In  the 
divinities  the  quality  of  goodness  predominates,  foulness  and 
darkness  are  inert ;  therefore  they  are  supremely  happy.  In 
men  the  quality  of  foulness  abounds,  and  goodness  and  dark 
ness  are  inert ;  therefore  they  are  supremely  miserable,  la 
animals  goodness  and  foulness  are  inactive^  and  darkness  pre 
vails  ;  and  therefore  they  are  supremely  insensible. 

In  these  two  stanzas  the  existence  of  nature  (pradhdna)  has 
been  determined :  in  the  next  place,  that  of  soul  is  to  be 
•stablished. 

COMMENT 

In  this  verse,  besides  the  conclusion  drawn  from  the  argu 
ments  in  the  preceding  stanza,  it  is  here  explained  how  nature, 
which  is  one,  produces  diversified  effects.  This  is  said  to  be 
through  the  influence  of  the  three  qualities,  the  combination, 
or  several  predominance  of  which  in  various  objects  is  attended 
with  a  modification  and  diversity  of  that  which  is  essentially 
one  and  the  same. 

'  Modified  condition/  according  to  VA'CHESPATI,  '  is  the  cha 
racter  of  the  three  qualities,  which  are  never  for  a  moment 
stationary*,'  except  when  creation  is  not :  and  from  this 
constant  vicissitude  ensues  combination  in  different  proper- 


<     87     ) 

tions,  or  the  predominance  of  one  or  other  in  different  objects 
for  they  are  always  combined,  or  mixed,  in  different  propor 
tions.  This  is  the  mixture,  the  blending,  or  contention  of  the 
qualities  which  the  text  intends.  Hence  proceeds  the  modi 
fication  of  the  original  matter ;  as  rain  water,  falling  upon 
different  trees,  is  modified  as  the  juice  of  their  different  fruits. 
'  As  simple  water  shed  by  the  clouds,  coming  into  contact  with 
yarious  situations,  is  modified  as  sweet,  sour,  bitter,  pungent, 
or  astringent,  in  the  character  of  the  juice  of  the  cocoa-nut, 
palm,  bel  karanja,  and  wood-apple.*'  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi. 
So,  according  to  Cud  worth,  the  Italic  philosophers  maintained 
that  the  forms  and  qualities  of  bodies  were  only  different 
modifications  of  primary  matter.  "  The  same  numerical 
matter,"  he  observes,  "  differently  modified,  causing  different 
phantasms  in  us,  which  are  therefore  vulgarly  supposed  to  be 
forms  and  qualities  in  the  things,  as  when  the  same  water  is 
successively  changed  and  transformed  into  vapour,  snow,  hail, 
and  ice."  Intellect.  System,  III.  426. 

It  may  be  doubted  if  the  latter  portion  of  the  verse  should  not 
be  preferably  rendered,  By  '  modification,  like  water,  according 
to  the  receptacle,  or  subject,  of  the  qualities-f*.'  Such  is  evi 
dently  the  sense  in  which  the  S.  Bhdshya  understands  it,  and 
such  appears  to  be  that  of  the  above  illustration ;  the  simple 
water  being  modified,  as  sweet,  sour,  &c.,  according  to  the  tree 
by  which  it  is  absorbed,  and  the  fruit  of  which  it  constitutes 
the  juice.  So  certain  objects  are  fitted  for  certain  qualities ;  as 
the  gods  for  goodness,  men  for  foulness,  animals  for  darkness ; 
and  nature  is  modified  in  them  accordingly ;  that  quality  pre 
dominating  which  is  conformable  to  the  receptacle  :  the  ques 
tion  here  being,  not  the  origin  of  things,  but  of  their  different 
properties,  VACHESPATI,  however,  seems  to  make  the  diversity 


(     88      ) 

of  objects  depend  upon  the  qualities,  not  the  difference  of 
qualities  upon  the  subject ;  explaining  the  pharse  prati  gund- 
sraya  vishfahdt,  ( The  difference  which  is  produced  by  the 
recipience  of  each  several  quality  ;  thence,  &c.*'  The  Chan- 
drikd,  has  the  same  explanation,  adding,  '  Diversity  is  from 
diversity  (different  ratio)  of  qualitiesf.'  There  is  no  incom 
patibility,  indeed,  in  the  two  views  of  the  meaning  of  the  text, 
as  the  variety  of  things  depends  upon  the  difference  or  dispro 
portion  of  the  three  primary  qualities,  whether  those  qualities 
modify,  or  be  modified  by.  the  subject  to  which  they  belong  : 
in  either  case  the  variety  is  not  a  different  thing,  it  is  only  a 
modification  of  the  same  thing,  pradhdna. 


ii  3  «  u 

> 

XVII. 

SINCE  the  assemblage  of  sensible  objects  is  for 
another's  use  ;  since  the  converse  of  that  which  has 
the  three  qualities,  with  other  properties  (before  men 
tioned,)  must  exist  ;  since  there  must  be  superinten 
dence  ;  since  there  must  be  one  to  enjoy  ;  since  there 
is  a  tendency  to  abstraction  j  therefore,  soul  is. 


?r 


Jfff 


^rrat 


frpraftftfrftro  w$  ' 
i 


BHASHYA, 


As  'it  is,11  said,  "  Liberation  is  obtained  by  discriminative 
knowledge  of  discrete  and  undiscrete  principles  ;"  and  whereas 
the  undiscrete  has  been  shewn  to  be  distinct  from  the  discrete 
by  five  arguments  (ver.  9),  so  soul  being,  like  the  undiscrate 


(     90     ) 

principle,  subtile  (not  cognizable  by  the  senses),  its  existence 
is  now  established  by  inference.  Soul  is. — Why  ?  Because  the 
assemblage  of  objects  is  for  another's  use. — The  assemblage  of 
intellect  and  the  rest  is  fpr  the  use  of  soul :  this  is  inferred 
from  the  irrationality  (of  nature  and  its  effectf),  like  a  bed. 
In  like  manner  as  a  bed,  which  is  an  assembk.gc  of  bedding, 
props,  cprds,  cotton,  coverlid,  and  pillows,  is  for  another's  use, 
pot  for  its  own ;  and  its  several  component  parts  render  no 
mutual  service  ;  thence  it  is  concluded  that  there  is  a  man  who 
Bleeps  upon  the  bed,  and  fpr  whose  use  it  was  made  :  so  this 
body,  which  is  an  assemblage  of  the  five  elements,  is  for  an- 
pther's  use  ;  or,  there  is  soul,  for  whpse  enjoyment  this  enjoy- 
$ble  body,  consisting  pf  an  aggregate  of  intellect  and  the  rest* 
has  fyemi  produced. 

Again,  soul  is,  because  the  reverse,  of  thai  which  has  the 
three  qualities  Jias  been  declared :  as  it  was  stated  in  a  former 
yerse  (11),  '  A  discrete  principle  has  the  three  qualities-  is 
indiscriminatiye,  objective,  &c.;"  an  4  it  is  added,  "  Soul  L  in 
these  respects  the  reverse." 

Again,   soul  is,  because  there  must  be  superintendence. — A 
It  charioteer   guides   a  chariot   drawn  by   horses  able  to  curvet, 
to  prance,   to  gallop,   so  the  soul   guides  the  body  :  as  it  is  said 
jn  the  Shasjithi  Tantra,   "  Nature,  directed  by  soul,  proceeds.' 
Soul  is,   because  there  irnust  be  an   enjoyer. — In  like  manner 
as  tliere   must  be  some   one  to  partake   pf  food  flavoured  with 
sweet,   spur,   salt,  pungent,   bitter,    and  astringent  flavours,  so 
as  there  is  no   capability   pf  fruition,   in  intellect  and  the  other 
products  pf  nature,   there  must  be  soul,   by  which  this  body  is 
to  be  enjoyed. 

Again,  soul  is,  because  there  is  a  tendency  to  abstraction. — • 
Kaivalya  is  tjie  abstract  noun?  derived  from  kevala,  '  sole 
pnly' — i'or,  on  account  pf,  tiiat  (abstraction)  ;  the  practice  of  it : 
from  the  exercise  of  (or  tendency  to)  abstraction  (for  the  sake 
pf  its  own  separation  or  detachment)  it  is  inferred  that  soul  is. 
[That  is,  Every  one,  whether  wise  or  unwise,  equally  desires  im- 
perishable  release  from  succession  of  worldly  existence. 


(     91     ) 

It  is  next  to  be  determined  whether  this  soul  be  but  one 
superintendent  over  all  bodies,  like  the  string  that  supports  sdl 
the  gems  of  a  necklace  ;  or  whether  there  be  many  souls  pr^~ 
siding  severally  over  individual  bodies. 

COMMENT- 

Arguments  for  the  existence  of  soul  as  a  distinct  principle 
are  here  adduced. 

The  existence  of  soul  is  established  by  inference  :  a  bed  im 
plies  a  sleeper  ;  nature,  made  up  of  its  effect s,  is  for  the  pro 
duction  of  pain,  pleasure,  and  insensibility,  of  whidh  soul  alone 
is  conscious*.  But  admitting  that  the  assemblage  is  for  the 
benefit  of  another,  why  should  that  other  be  soul  ?  because  soul 
is  not  a  similar  aggregate  ;  it  is  not  made  up  of  qualities  and 
the  like,  but  is  the  reverse  of  nature  in  these  respects,  as  was 
explained  in  verse  11 :  or,  as  the  commentator  on  the  Sutra* 
Sankata  par&rthatwat^,  observes,  because  the  property  of 
pain  or  pleasure,  which  is  identical  with  body,  must  be  dif 
ferent  from  that  which  enjoys  the  cine,  or  suffers  tlie  other; 
Because  there  must  be  an  enjoyer.—ThQ  existence  of  an  en- 
joyer  implies  the  existence  of  both  pleasure  and  pain  ;  election 
between  which  cannot  be  made  by  intellect  and  the  rest,  which 
are  inseparable  from  them,  and  it  must  be  the  act  of  something 
else,  which  is  soul.  '  Intellect  and  the  rest  are  the  things  to  be 
used  (bhogya)  or  perceived  (drisya),  and  consequently  imply 
one  who  perceives^:.'  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi. 

The  term  kaivalya,  rendered  '  abstraction,'  signifies  '  detach 
ment  from  the  world  ;'  or,as  itis  explained,  'absolute suppression 
of  the  three  kinds  of  pain,  as  a  property  of  sacred  writ,  holy 
sages,  and  inspired  teachers  or  prophets.  It  must  therefore  be 
something  different  from  intellect  and  the  rest,  which  are  th@ 


(     92     ) 

same  thing  as  pain,  and  cannot  effect  a  separation  from  their* 
own  essence*/  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi.  So  VIJNANA  BHIKSHU 
explains  kaivalya, '  absolute  extirpation  of  paint.' 

The  arguments  in  the  text  for  the  existence  of  soul  are  so 
many  original  aphorisms  ofKAPiLA;  as,  1.  'Soul  is  distinct 
from  body,  &c.J:'  2.  '  From  an  aggregate  being  for  another's 
iise||:'  3.  '  From  (the  properties  of)  soul  being  the  converse  of 
the  three  qualities,  &c.§:'  4.  '  From  superintendence's.  'From 
the  tendency  to  abstraction**.'  The  commentator  notices  a 
different  reading  of  the  last  Sutra,  '  From  nature  not  being 
competent  to  abstraction  :'  but  this  he  considers  erroneous**-)-. 
The  fifth  book  of  the  8.  Pravachana  contains  other  Sutras 
affirmative  of  the  separate  existence  of  souL 


11 

ra^    rn<"?re^i     in  c  n 

XVIII. 

SINCE  birth,  death,  aiid  the  instruments  of  life  are 
allotted  severally  ;  since  occupations  are  not  at  once 
universal  ;  and  since  qualities  affect  variously  ;  multi 
tude  of  souls  is  demonstrated. 


^  i        t  |-.^R^r%^:i         J 
§  r^wrr^^qwcT 
i  tt  ^?%^z?[§  uft:  i 


(     93     ) 


ftr- 


f  f% 


BHASHYA, 

ii/e  and  death,  and  the  instilments  (of  life).  —  Fwm  the 
several  allotment  of  these  :  this  is  the  meaning  of  the  text. 
Thus,  if  there  was  but  on6  soul)  then  when  one  was  bonij  all 
would  be  born  ;  when  one  died,  all  would  die  ;  if  there  was  any 
defect  in  the  vital  instruments  of  one,  such  as  deafness,  blind 
ness,  dumbness,  mutilation,  or  lameness,  then  all  would  be 
blind,  deaf,  dumfy  maimed,  and  halt  :  but  this  is  not  the  case  ; 
and  therefore,  from  the  several  apportionment  of  death;  birth, 
and  instruments  of  life,  multiplicity  of  soul  is  demonstrated. 
Since  occupations  are  not  at  once  universal.  —  Yugapat 
means,  '  at  one  time.'  Not  at  once  ;  or,  at  one  time.  Occupa* 
tion  :  as  engaging  in  acts  of  virtue  and  the  like  are  not  observ 
ed  to  occur  at  one  moment  ;  but  some  are  busy  with  virtuous  j 
others  with  vicious,  actions  ;  some  cultivate  indifference  to  the 
world,  and  some  acquire  true  wisdom  :  therefore)  from  the  non- 


Contemporaneousness  of  occupation,  multitude  bfsoulsis  conclud 
ed.  Also,  since  qualities  affect  variously. — From  the  contrary 
fcature  of  the  qualities  multitude  of  souls  is  proved  ;  as,  in  birth 
in  general,  one  endowed  with  the  quality  of  good-ness  is  happy; 
another  with  that  of  foulness  is  wretched  ;  and  a  third  having 
that  of  darkness  is  apathetic :  hence,  therefore,  multitude  of 
souls  is  proved. 

Soul  is  hot  agent :  this  is  next  declared. 

dOMMENT- 

The   multitudinous   existence   of  soul,   or  the  individual  in- 
borporatibn  of  soul  in  different  bodies,  is  here  maintained. 

Birth  is  defined  to  be  the  association  of  soul  with  body ;  death 
its  detachment :  soul  being  always  existent,  and  not  in  itself, 
Subject  to  birth  or  death  ;  as  in  the  S.  Pravachana  Bhdshya*- 
also  the  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi ;  '  Life  is  the  combination  of 
soul  with  the  pains  incident  to  body,  &c.;  not  any  modification 
of  soul.  Death  is  the  abandonment  of  those  bodies,  &c. ;  not 
the  destruction  of  soulf/  The  ins  tr  urn  eats  of  life  are  the 
brgans  of  perception  and  action,  with  egotism  and  intellect. 
8  Allotment/  niyama,  properly  '  rule,  regulation/  is  explained 
by  vyavasthd,  which  may  import  '  distribution ;'  as,  '  The 
distribution  is  in  regard  to  different  souls  in  several  bodies^:' 
so  also  the  Sutra  of  KAPILA  ;  *  From  the  distribution  of  life 
&c.  folltiws  the  multitudinousness  of  soul.il'  The  term  is 
especially  understood,  however,  of  the  distribution  which  is 
laid  down  by  religious  and  legal  authorities,  '  a  prescribed 
distribution  or  allotment/  as  the  commentator  o'n  the  Sutra 
observes,  after  stating, '  The  virtuous  man  is  "happy  in  heaven* 


?r  3 


(     95     ) 

.&c,  (see  p.  48),  •  Souls  are  many,  as  otherwise  there  would  not 
.be  the  occurrence  of  such  division,  or  appointment  of  conditions, 
as  is  laid  down  in  the  Ye'da  and  the  law.'*  If  soul  were  one, 
all  the  accidents,  vicissitudes  and  interests  of  existence  would, 
simultaneously  affect  all  individuals. 

But  though  manifold,  as  individualized,  this  individual  soul 
is  one  and  unchanged,  through  all  its  migrations  into  various 
forms,  until  its  final  liberation.  It  is  the  disguise  which  is 
changed,  not  that  which  wears  it,  as  has  been  before  explain 
ed  (p.  48). 

The  multiplied  existence  of  soul  ig  in  especial  contradiction 
to  the  doctrine  of  the  Ve'dantis,  of  the  universality  of  one  sup 
reme  soul  of  the  world,  from  which  all  human  souls  are  derived. 
as  in  such  texts  as  this  ;  '  One  only  existent  soul  is  distributed 
in  all  beings  ;  it  is  beheld  collectively  or  dispersedly,  like  the 
reflection  of  the  moon  in  still  or  troubled  water.  Soul,  eternal 
omnipresent,  undisturbed,  pure,  one,  is  multiplied  by  the  power 
of  delusion,  not  of  its  own  nature  f.'  This  is  undoubtedly  the 
doctrine  of  the  Vedas,  and  the  Sankhya  teachers,  who  profess 
to  receive  those  worfcs  as  authority,  are  obliged  to  interpret 
the  texts  unfavourable  to  their  dogmas  in  a  peculiar  manner. 
Thus  the  Sutra  of  KAPILA  asserts,  '  There  is  no  contradiction 
(to  the  doctrine  of  many  souls)  in  the  unity  of  the  Vedas,  from 
its  reference  to  the  comprehensiveness  of  genus  J:'  that  is,  Soul, 
considered  as  genus,  is  but  one  ;  its  nature  and  properties  are 
common  to  all  souls,  individualized  and  manifold  in  connection 
with  individual  aggregates  of  the  products  of  nature.  '  G«nus 
here  means  community,  unity  of  nature  ;  such  is  the  purport  of 
the  unity  of  the  Ve'das  ;  not  indivisibility,  from  the  absence  of 


* 
^  ff 


any  motive  (for  its  continuing  undivided.) This  is  the  meaning  of 
the  Sutra*. '     The  subject  is   discussed  at  considerable  length 
by  VIJNANA  BHIKSHU  ;  but,  notwithstanding  his  arguments,  it 
is  clear  that  the   Sankhya  doctrine  is  contradictory   to  that  o 
the  Vedas. 


f 

1 


The  doctrines  of  those  Grecian  philosophers,  who  maintained 
the  immateriality  and  eternity  of  soul,  conformed  to  that  of  the 
Ve'das.  As  far  as  we  are  able  to  learn  of  the  doctrines  of 
Pythagoras,  he  taught  that  human  souls  were  portions  of  one 
supreme  soul.  Plato  held  the  souls  of  men  to  be  emanations 
from  God,  through  the  soul  of  the  world.  Souls  and  bodies 
were  both  portions  of  the  TO  Jy,  the  '•  one  existent,'  of  the 
Stoics ;  and  even  Aristotle  appears  to,  have  conceived  the> 
human  soul  to,  be  an  intellectual  energy,  derived  from  an, 
eternal  intelligence.  Cudworth,  asserts  that  none  of  the  ancient 
philosophers  maintained  the  Sa,nkhya  notion  of  the  eternity 
of  individual  souls.  "  It  doth  not  follow/'  he  remarks,  "because 
they  held  sou  Is  to  be  ingenerable,  that  therefore  ^hey  supposed 
souls  to  have  existed  from  eternity  of  themselves  unmade- 
This  was  never  asserted  by  theist  or  atheist.  The  philosophic 
theists,  who  maintained  ceternitatem  Q,niniorw&i,  did,  notwith 
standing,  assert  their  essentia.1  dependence  upon  the  Deity, 
like  that  of  the  lights  upon  the  sun,  as  if  they  were  a  kind  of 
eternal  effulgenoy,  emanation,  or  eradiation,  from  an  eternal 
Sun."  Intell.  Syst.  III.  429. 


II 

ii 


(     97     ) 
XIX. 

And  from  that  contrast  (before  set  forth)  it  follows, 
that  soul  is  witness,  solitary,  bystander,  spectator, 
and  passive. 


BH/SHYA. 

Vom  ito  contrast  :  the  contrast  of  the  possession  of 
the  three  qualities.  Contrast  :  reverse.  Soul  is  void  of  quali 
ties,  is  discriminative,  enjoyer,  &c.  The  contrast  is  that  pre 
sented  by  these  attributes  of  soul  ;  and  thence,  the  qualities 
of  goodness,  foulness,  and  darkness  being  agents  (active),  it 

follows  that  soul  is  (passive)  witness.     This  sentence  is  syn.. 
13        * 


(     98     ) 

tactically  connected  with  the  preceding,  regarding  the  multi- 
tudinousness  of  soul.  The  qualities,  as  agents,  act ;  a  witness 
neither  acts  nor  desists,  from  action.  Again,  abstraction  (de 
tachment)  is  an  attribute  (of  soul)  ;  the  property  of  being  sole 
is  detachment  or  abstraction,  difference  or  distinctness  (from 
all  others)  ;  that  is,  it  is  distinct,  or  separate,  from  the  three 
qualities.  Next,  being  a  bystander  (is  an  attribute  of  soul)  : 
the  condition  of  a  middle  man  (or  looker-on,  or  neutral).  Soul 
is  a  bystander,  like  a  wandering  mendicant :  as  a  vagrant 
ascetic  is  lonely  and  unconcerned,  whilst  the  villagers  are 
busily  engaged  in  agriculture,  so  soul  does  not  act  where  the 
qualities  are  present.  Hence  also  proceed  the  properties  of 
being  a  spectator  and  passive.  From  being  a  bystander,  soul  is 
a  spectator,  and  is  not  a  performer  of  those  acts  (which  it 
contemplates).  The  three  qualities,  goodness,  foulness,  and 
darkness,  engage  in  acts  in  the  relation  of  agent  and  act ;  not 
soul :  and  in  this  manner  the  existence  of  soul  is  demonstrated. 


But  if  soul  is  a  non-agent,  how  does  it  exercise  volition  ?  as 
I  will  practise  virtue,  I  will  not  commit  crime  :  here  soul  must 
be  the  agent ;  for  if  soul  is  not  the  agent  (then  these  purposes 
cannot  be  entertained).  This  is  a  dilemma:  to  explain  which 
it  is  said — 

'     COMMENT- 

In  the  preceding  verse  it  was  stated  that  soul  was  many ;  in 
this,  its  other  attributes  are  enumerated. 

The  conjunction  cha,  in  the  term  tasmdt-cha,  connects  the 
sentence  with  the  preceding,  or  with  baJtutwam,  '  inultitudi- 
nousness.'  The  contrast  alluded  to  is  that  intimated  in  ver.  14, 
and  is  this  :  Soul  has  not  the  three  qualities,  it  is  discrimina 
tive,  it  is  perceptive,  it  is  specific,  it  is  rational,  it  is  unprolific  ; 
being  the  reverse,  in  these  respects,  of  nature  and  its  effects. 
Not  being  an  object  of  sense,  but  percipient  of  such  objects,  it 
observes  and  testifies  to  the  existence  of  nature  and  its  pro- 


(      99      ) 

ducts,  like  au  evidence  in  a  lawsuit  being  plaintiff  and  defen 
dant.  '  That  which  is  irrational  cannot  observe,  and  that  to 
which  an  object  is  apparent  is  a  witness*.'  Solitariness  is  '  ex 
emption  from  the  three  kinds  of  painf  ;'  or,  in  fact,  total  ab 
straction  from  the  world :  this  is  the  necessary  consequence 
of  being  devoid  of  the  three  qualities,  which  are  essentially  the 
same  with  pleasure,  pain,  and  dulness  ;  and  from  them,  there 
fore,  soul  is  equally  free.  From  the  same  cause,  absence  of 
qualities  and  insusceptibility  of  agreeable  or  disagreeable  emo 
tions,  proceeds  the  next  property  of  soul,  that  of  being  a 
bystander ;  madkyastJia,  *  neutral,  indifferent,  unconcerned  ;' 
vtddslna,  (  neither  rejoicing  in  pleasure,  nor  sorrowing  in  pain. 
Qualities,  and  particularly  foulness,  are  indispensable  to  acti 
vity  ;  and  being  without  them,  soul  is  consequently  inert :  the 
same  is  considered  to  be  also  the  necessary  result  of  its  being 

*  discriminative   and   uuprolific,    or   unproductive;.'    VUNA'NA 
BHIKSHU   restricts  the  term  sdkski,  '  witness,'   to  the   sense  of 

*  beholder,'   distinguishing  it   from  the   other    term,  to    which 
such  a  translation   is  more  applicable,   dmshtri,  as   importing 
one  who  has   the  object  near   to,  or  before,  his  eyes  ;  the  latter* 
implies   seeing  in    general :  hence    he  says,  '  Soul    witnesses  or 
contemplates  Iniddlu  (intellect),  and  sees  the  other  principles)),' 


f 

:  II  ^  «   II 


r^:  %^??T  i      J  N^K^r 
^rr^ft  2^tr^Wr  3 


(    ioo   ) 

XX. 

THEREFORE,  by  reason  of  union  with  it,  insensible 
body  seems  sensible  :  and  though  the  qualities  be  ac 
tive,  the  stranger  (soul)  appears  as  the  agent. 


3- 


f^rnit 


:  f% 


BHASHYA. 


Here  soul  is  said  to  "be  possessed  of  sensation  ;  and  in  connec 
tion  with  it,  intellect  and  the  other  predicates  of  nature  assum 
ing  the  appearance  of  sense  seem  sentient  :  as  in  life,  a  jar 
•with  cold  water  appears  to  be  cold,  with  warm  water  seems  to 
be  warm  ;  so  intellect  and  the  rest,  from  union  with  it,  with 
soul,  seem  sensible.  But  the  qualities  perform  the  active 
application,  (of  sense),  not  the  soul  :  for  although  in  common 
it  is  said,  soul  is  the  doer,  the  goer,  yet  soul  is  not  the  agent. 
How  so  ?  Though  the  qualities  be  active,  (soul)  the  stranger 
appears  as  the  agent.  There  being  activity  of  the  qualities, 


(     101     ) 

which  is  indifferent,  or  inactive,  appears  as  if  it  was  the 
agent ;  which  it  is  not.  Here  is  an  illustration  :  as  a  man  who 
is  not  a  thief,  being  taken  np  along  with  thieves,  is  suspected 
to  be  a  thief  also  ;  so  soul,  being  connected  with  three  active 
qualities,  is  supposed,  though  inert,  to  be  active  also. 

In  this  manner  the  distinction  of  the  perceptible,  impercep 
tible,  and  thinking  principles  (ver.  2.  p»  13)  has  been  explained  ; 
from  the  discrimination  of  which  liberation  is  obtained.  It  is 
next  expounded  why  the  union  of  the  two  (chief)  principles, 
nature  and  soul,  takes  place* 


COMMENT. 


It  is  here  taught  that  the  sentient  faculty  resides  in  soul, 
mid  not,  as  it  appears  to  do,  in  the  products  of  nature ;  and 
that  activity  resides  in  the  qualities,  not,  as  it  appears  to  do, 
in  soul. 

The  term  chetand,  from  chUt '  to  reflect/  means  in  general 
c  reason,  intelligence ;'  but  it  is  here  applied  to  the  possession 
or  exercise  of  every  faculty  proper  to  a  sentient  and  thinking 
being.  It  is  the  attribute  of  soul  only,  as  will  be  more  dis 
tinctly  made  clear  when  the  functions  of  the  senses,  of  con 
sciousness,  and  intellect  are  explained,  and  they  are  shewn  to  be 
merely  the  vehicles  or  instruments  through  which  ideas  and 
notions  are  conveyed.  They  seem,  however,  to  act  indepen 
dently,  but  this  is  merely  from  their  union  with,  or,  more 
correctly,  proximity  to,  soul ;  samyoga  being  explained  by  the 
commentators  to  mean  here  merely  sannidhdna,  '  approxima 
tion.  In  like  manner,  soul,  which  is  contemplative,  not  active^ 
mover,  though  itself  unmoved,  appears  to  be  active  through  a 
similar  contiguity.  '  I  am  sentient ;  wishing  to  do,  I  do  :  here 
a  common  origin  or  subject  of  action  and  reflection  is  appre- 


(     102    ) 

liendecl*.'  8.  Tcdwa  RaumufU.  But  this  is  an  error,  as  the 
site  or  subject  of  action  and  reflection  is  distiuctf.  The  term 
linga  in  the  first  line  is  explained  to  denote  makat  and  the 
subtile  products  of  pradlidna.  UOA^ina^  '  indifferent,'  is  said 
also  to  mean  '  inert  J.' 

But  it  appears  that  there  are  passages  in  the  Vedas  and  in 
the  law-books  which  attribute  agency  to  soul,  and  knowledge 
to  buddki\\:  and  to  meet  this  is  supposed  to  be  the  purpose  of  the 
aphorism,  '  Agency  from  affection,  intelligence  from  propin 
quity^'  that  is,  c  The  apparent  agency  of  soul  is  from  the 
affection  (or  operation)  of  buddhi  ;  the  apparent  intelligence 
of  buddhi  (understanding)  is  from  the  proximity  of  soul  ; 
neither  is  actual.  Their  mutual  transfer  of  properties  is  like 
that  of  fire  arid  iron  in  a  heated  bar,  or  of  the  sun  and  water, 
in  the  reflected  rays  of  the  former  from  the  latterHV  &  Prav. 
8.  In  like  manner  the  &  Chdnd  riled  exemplifies  the  doctrine 
by  reference  to  buddhi,  the  organ  of  the  understanding  ;  and 
furnishes  also  an  example  of  the  sense  in  which  cketand, 
*  intelligence,'  is  to  be  understood  :  '  Thence  the  effect  (of 
pradhdna),  the  category  buddM?,  which  is  unintelligent,  is  as 
it  were  intelligent,  (seems  to  be  that  which  says)  I  know,  be 
comes  as  it  were  endowed  with  knowledge**  :'  that  is,  it  is  not 
the  understanding,  but  soul,  that  knows.  This,  however,  ap 
plies  equally  to  all  the  other  products  of  nature,  as  far  as  to 
the  subtile  rudiments,  whether  individually  considered,  or 


^rcrtfrfa  ^  m%rRi?fr: 


IF 


fef 


(     103     ) 

as  composing  subtile  body*.  They  are  all  non-sentient,  or 
irrational  and  inert.  Their  activity  depends  on  combination 
with  the  qualities;  their  sentient  power  on  proximity  to  soul : 
and  the  conjoint  presence  of  these  two  properties  leads  to  the 
erroneous  belief  that  soul  is  agent,  as  well  as  sentient. 


XXI. 

For  the  soul's  contemplation  of  nature,  and  for  its 
abstraction,  the  union  of  both  takes  place,  as  of  the 
halt  and  blind.  By  that  union  a  creation  is  framed. 


^fr 


#  few 


(     104     ) 


:  i  ^f  nff 


BHASHYA. 


The  union  of  soul  with  nature  is  for  its  contemplation  (of  na 
ture);  that  is,  soul  contemplates  nature  (in  the  state  of)  intellect 
and  the  other  effects  to  the  gross  elements  inclusive.  For  that 
object  is  the  union  of  nature  with  soul  ;  and  the  same  union, 
which  is  also  for  the  abstraction  (of  the  latter),  is  like  the 
association  of  the  halt  and  blind.  As,  a  lame  man  and  a 
blind  man,  deserted  by  their  fellow-travellers,  who  in  making 
their  way  with  difficulty  through  a  forest  had  been  dispersed 
by  robbers,  happening  to  encounter  each  other,  and  entering 
into  conversation  so  as  to  inspire  mutual  confidence,  agreed  to 
divide  between  them  the  duties  of  walking  and  of  seeing  ; 
accordingly  the  lame  man  was  mounted  on  the  blind  man's 
shoulders,  and  was  thus  carried  on  his  journey,  whilst  the 
blind  man  was  enabled  to  pursue  his  route  by  the  directions  of 
his  companion.  In  the  same  manner  the  faculty  of  seeing  is  in 
soul,  not  that  of  moving  ;  it  is  like  the  lame  man  :  the  faculty 
of  moving,  but  not  of  seeing,  is  in  nature  ;  which  resembles, 
therefore,  the  blind  man.  Further,  as  a  separation  takes  place 
between  the  lame  man  and  the  blind  man,  when  their  mutual 
object  is  accomplished,  and  they  have  reached  their  journey's 
end,  so  nature,  having  effected  the  liberation  of  soul,  ceases  to 
act  ;  and  soul,  having  contemplated  nature,  obtains  abstracted 
ness  ;  and  consequently,  their  respective  purposes  being  effected, 
the  connexion  between  them  is  dissolved. 

Again,  By  that,  by  that  union,  a  creation  is  framed.  —  As  the 
birth  of  a  child  proceeds  from  the  union  of  male  and  female,  so 
the  production  of  creation  results  from  the  connection  of  na 
ture  and  soul. 


(     105     ) 

The  text  next  describes  the  particulars  of  all  the  products 
of  nature. 

COMMENT. 

The  object  of  the  union  of  soul  and  nature,  or  the  final  libe 
ration  of  the  former  by  its  knowledge  of  the  latter,  is  here 
explained. 

1  Contemplation,'  darsana,  is  considered  to  comprise  '  frui 
tion/  bkoga.  As  nature  is  devoid  of  sensibility  and  reflection, 
it  can  neither  enjoy  nor  observe  ;  and  its  existence  would  be 
therefore  without  an  object,  unless  there  were  some  other  one 
capable  both  of  observation  and  fruition*.  This  other  one  is 
soul.  But,  again,  as  pain  is  inseparable  from  nature,  so  enjoy 
ed  soul  desires,  after  a  season,  to  be  loosed  from  the  combina 
tion  ;  and  this  detachment,  or  the  liberation  of  purified  soul, 
necessarily  requires  some  one  froni  which  to  be  liberated :  that 
some  one  is  nature  :  consequently,  for  the  fulfilment  of  their 
respective  ends— the  fruition  of  nature,  and  liberation  of  soul — 
their  mutual  cooperation  and  combination  are  essential.  '  Ab 
straction/  kaivalya,  is  explained  by  YACHESPATI,  '  The  cause 
of  the  attribution  of  separation  to  purified  soul,  which  cannot 
be  without  previous  union  with  nature f.'  But  these  results 
cannot  be  attained  without  the  evolution  of  the  products  of 
nature,  and  consequently  they  assume  their  several  develop 
ments,  or,  in  other  words,  a  creation  is  framed  ;  as  it  is  only 
in  the  state  of  discrete  principles  that  nature  is  to  be  contem 
plated  by  soul,  and  it  is  only  by  the  exact  appreciation  of  the 
same,  and  of  their  source,  that  soul  can  detach  itself  from  na 
ture.  For  both  purposes,  therefore,  the  world  must  exist,  as 
developed  from  its  material  cause. 

There  are  passages  in  the  Vedas,  however,  attributing  crea 
tion  to  soul ;  as,  '  That  was  from  it— From  this  soul  was  ether 


STOR 

t  fl 

14 


(     106     ) 

joroduced.*'  To  this  ib  is  replied,  that  all  that  is  herein  in 
tended  is  the  attribution  of  the  act  of  the  inferior,  or  nature, 
to  the  superior  soul :  '  As  in  the  world  it  is  said  that  a  king 
triumphs  or  is  defeated,  -  when  it  is  not  he,  but  his  army,  that 
suffers  a  defeat  or  achieves  a  victoryf.'  8.  Prav.  Sdra. 


XXIL 


FROM  nature  issues  the  great  one  ;  thence  egotism : 
and  from  this  the  sixteenfold  set  :  from  five  among 
the  sixteen  proceed  five  elements. 


rrftr 


(     107     ) 


BHASHYA. 

Nature  (pratriti)  is  also  termed  '  the  chief  one'  (pradhdna\ 
'  the  supreme'  (brahmi/Q,\  'the  undistinguished'  (avyaktam),  'the. 
multi-comprehending'  (bakudhdndka)  and   mdyd.     Such   are. 
its  synonymes.     From  that  which  is  devoid  of  characteristic  at 
tributes,  or  from  (crude)  nature,  the  great  one  (mahat)  is  pro 
duced  :  this  is  also  termed  '  intellect'  (buddfii)  ;  it  is  also  called 
dmri,    or  'demoniac;'  mat-it  or  'understanding;'    'notoriety' 
(khydti),    '  knowledge'    (jndna),    '  wisdom'   (pr&jna).      From 
thence   proceeds   egotism,   also    called  '  the  origin    of  the    ele 
ments/  &o.  (bhutddi),  '  the  luminous,  (taijasa),  6-  the    modified' 
(vaikrita),   '  conscience'   (abhijndna).     From  this  the  sixteen 
fold  set.  —  From  this,  from   egotism,  the  class    of  sixteen   is  de 
rived.     This  consists  of  the   five  subtile  elements,  or  the  arche 
types  of  sound,  touch,  form,  flavour,  and    odour  :  the  synonymes, 
of  tan-mdtra  are  all  words  denoting  '  subtile'  (sukshma)  :  also 


(     108     ) 

the  eleven  organs,  the  ear,  the  skin,  the  eye.  the  tongue,  the 
nose,  which  are  the  five  organs  of  perception ;  the  voice,  the 
hand,  the  foot,  and  the  organs  of  excretion  and  generation, 
which  are  the  five  organs  of  action ;  and,  besides  these,  mind, 
making  the  eleventh,  and  being  an  organ  of  both  action  and 
sensation.  These  constitute  the  class  of  sixteen  produced  from 
egotism.  From  five  among  the  sixteen. — From  the  five  subtile 
elements  proceed  the  five  gross  elements  :  as  it  is  said,  "  From 
the  archetype  sound,  ether  is  produced  ;  from  touch,  air  ;  from 
form,  light  (or  fire) ;  from  flavour,  water  ;  from  odour,  earth  : 
and  thus  from  these  five  rudiments  the  five  gross  elements 
proceed."  As  also  it  is  said,  "  From  discriminative  knowledge 
of  perceptible  and  imperceptible  principles  and  the  thinking 
soul  (see  ver.  2)  liberation  is  obtained."  Now  therefore  intel 
lect  and  the  rest,  to  the  gross  elements  inclusive,  forming 
twenty-three  categories,  have  been  specified  (in  the  text) ;  the 
undiscrete  principle  has  been  described  (see  ver.  15,16);  and 
soul  has  been  explained  (ver.  18,  19)  ;  and  these  constitute  the 
tiventy-five  tatwas  (physical  and  metaphysical  categories  of  the 
Sa"nkhya  system  of  philosophy).  He  who  knows  the  universe 
to  be  composed  of  these  principles — called  tatwas,  from  the 
abstract  of 'tad,  '  that,'  implying  the  abstract  existence  of  those 
principles — as  it  is  said,  "  He  who  knows  the  twenty-five 
principles,  whatever  order  of  life  he  may  have  entered,  and 
whether  he  wear  braided  hair,  a  top-knot  only,  or  be  shaven* 
he  is  liberated  :  of  this  there  is  no  doubt."  (See  p.  1.)  The 
twenty-five  categories  are,  nature,  soul,  intellect,  egotism,  the 
five  subtile  (or  rudimental)  elements,  the  eleven  organs  of 
sensation  and  of  action,  and  the  five  gross  elements. 

It  is  stated  in  this  stanza,  from  nature  issues  the  great  one. 
What  is  meant  by  that  great  one  is  next  defined. 

COMMENT. 

The  categories  of  the  Sankhya  system  have  been  before 
alluded  to  (ver.  3.  p.  16),  in  explanation  of  their  mutual  re 
lations,  and  of  the  properties  which  they  have  in  common,  or 


(     109     > 

by  which  they  are  discriminated  from  one  another;  but  we 
have  them  here  enumerated  in  the  order  of  their  production, 
as  prefatory  to  a  detailed  description  of  them  and  of  their  func 
tions  contained  in  the  following  stanzas. 

The  generic  term  for  the  twenty-five  principles,  tattwa, 
or  as  usually  and  with  equal  correctness  written  tatwa,  is  ex 
plained  by  GAURAPADA  to  mean  '  the  abstract  existence/ 
astitiva*,  ov<rla,  essentla  of  tat+t  THAT  ;  that  thing,  which  is 
the  object  of  philosophical  investigation,  or  which  has  a  real 
existence,  and  must  be  known.  The  more  common  etymology, 
tat,  '  that/  and  twam,  '  thou'  belongs  to  the  Ve'danta  system  ; 
as  in  the  Mahdvdkya,  tat-twam  asi,  l  that  (supreme  soul)  thou 
art/  implies  the  identity  of  universal  and  individualized  spirit. 
We  have  in  the  scholia  of  GAURAPADA,  on  this  stanza  some 
synonymes  of  nature  and  the  two  first  principles,  the  analysis 
of  which  elucidates  the  ideas  entertained  of  them  by  the  San- 
khyas.  The  succeeding  stanzas  will  afford  an  opportunity  of 
adverting  to  the  terms  used  for  intellect  and  egotism,  and  we 
may  here  confine  the  enquiry  to  the  synonymes  of  nature, 
or  matter. 

PraJcriti,  as  has  been  previously,  mentioned  (p.  17),  inti 
mates,  that  which  precedes,  or  is  prior  to,  making ;  that  which 
is  not  made  from  any  thing  else.  It  is  also  used  relatively,  to 
signify  that  which  is  the  source  from  which  a  product  is  deriv 
ed  ;  so  that  mahat  is  the  prakriti  of  ahankdra,  &c.  (see  p.  18). 
Here,  however,  our  business  is  with  the  primary  source  of  all 
material  products,  and  the  term  indicates  merely  that  which 
preceded  (pro)  production  (kriti)  ;  what  that  may  have  been 
is  left  wholly  undefined  or  unimplied  by  the  particular  term. 
The  same  maybe  said  of  it  agreeably  to  another  etymology 
given  in  the  Sdnkhya  Sara,  where  pra  is  interpreted  by  prak- 
rishta,  '  principal,  chief,  best/  analogously  to  its  other  denomi 
nation,  pradhdna,  'the  chief/  Pradhdna  is  derived  from 
pra,  *  principal/  and  dhd,  to  '  hold  :'  '  that  in  which  all  genera- 


(    no    ) 

ted  effect  is  comprehended*.'  The  next  synonyme,  avyakta 
Hhe  unseparated,  the  undistinguished,  the  unperceived/  has 
teen  also  previously  noticed  (p  41).  as  derived  from  anja,  '  to, 
make  clear/  with  vi,  separative  preposition,  and  the  negative  a 
prefixed  :  the  term  is  of  as  frequent  occurrence  as  either  of  the 
preceding,  and  is  constantly  used  as  a  synonyme  of  prakriti 
in  the  Puranas  and  in  Manu.  Brahme,  which  is  to  be  carefully 
distinguished  frp,m  ftrqhmd,  the  personified  creative  power,  is 
ordinarily  applied  either  to  the  Ve'das  or  supreme  spirit,  and  is 
an  uncommon  synonyme  of  prakriti',  hut  as  derived  from 
vriha,  ( to  increase/  it  implies  the  first  principle  of  which  the 
expansion  becomes  all  perceptible  objects.  Bahudhdnaka  is 
derived,  like  pradhdna  from  dfyd,  '  to  hold ;'  dhdnaka,  ( the 
holder'  or  '  cornprehender'  of  bahu,  '  much/  of  all  things.  Md- 
yd,  \0(  ita  ordinary  sense  of '  illusion/  is  applied  to  prakriti, 
not  by  the  Saukhyas,  for  they  maintain  the  reality  of  existing 
things,  but  by  the  Vedantis  arid  Pauranikas,  who  regard  crea 
tion  as  a  delusion  or  as  a  sport  of  the  creator :  it  is  derived 
from  the  root  md,  '  to  measure/  and  may  here  perhaps  imply 
either  '  comprehension/  like  pradhdna,  or  '  extension.'  There 
is  no  explanation  of  the  term  by  any  of  the  Scholiasts, 
VIJNANA  BHIKSHU  quotes  the  Vedas  to  shew  that  it  is  synony 
mous  with  prakriti-^.  In  the  Sdnkhha  we  have  other  syno- 
nymeS;  as,  sakti,  '  power,  §vvcyjLi$;  aja,  'the  unborn,  the  un- 
produced  ;'  tamos,  darkness  ;'  and  avidyd,  '  ignorance^/ 

Now  what  is  tp.  be  considered  as  the  sense  of  these  words  ? 
By  what  equivalent  is  prakriti  to  be  best  i^en^ered  ?  Professor 
Lassen.  translates  it  procreatrix,  but  this  seems  to  convey  too 
much  the  idea  of  personality,  and  therefore,  although  very 
well  agreeing  with  the  original  term  as,  used  by  the  Pauraniks, 
where  prakriti  is  commonly  personified,  yet  it  can  scarcely  be 


t 


(  111  ) 

considered  as  indicative  of  that  which  not  only  produces,  bufc 
is  the  thing  produced,  being  at  once  the  origin  and  substance 
'of  all  things.  Mr.  Colebrooke  has  rendered  the  term  some 
times  by  '  nature/  and  sometimes  by  *  matter:'  the  former  ex 
presses  both  the  parent  and  the  progeny,  and  agrees  in  being 
also  the  constant  subjects  of  prosopopeia.  It  is  therefore,  pre 
ferable  to  perhaps  any  synonyme  that  the  English  language 
can  offer.  At  the  same  time  the  correct  equivalent  is  '  matter, 
materia,  quasi  matter,  '  the  substance  and  source  of  material 
things  ;'  not,  however,  crude,  visible,  or  divisible  matter,  but 
that  first  principle  of  the  Pythagoreans  and  Platonists,  and  of 
Aristotle,  which  having  neither  parts,  nor  form,  nor  seiise,  nor 
quantity,  nor  any  of  the  properties  of  body,  was  yet  the  one 
universal-,  .incorporeal,  invisible  substance  from  which  all  bodies 
were  derived.  Ato  8r]  r^y  TOV  yeyoi/oro?  opctTov  /ecu  TTCLVTW? 
'aio-Ot]TOV  /ULtjTepa  KOI  VTroSoxw  /m^re  yr\v  /^re  aepa  /x>/re  7rvp 
jjirjrG  vS(*)p  Aeyco/xei/,  /xrjre  oera  e/c  TOVTCOV  juujTe  e£  &v  TOUTO. 
yeyovev.  aXX'  avoparov  e?Sd<?  ri  KCU  a/jLop(f>ov  Trav$\e<s.  Timoeus. 
See  also  the  Physics,  p.  III.  c.  6.  That  w£  are  to  understand 
this  of  the  prakriti  of  the  S&nkhyas  is  evident  from  the  mean 
ing  of  its  several  appellations.  It  is  also  said  by  YIJNANA 
BHIKSHU,  that  '  the  world  is  merely  modification  of  form,  of 
which  prakriti  is  the  materiality*.'  '  It  is  not  individual  or 
formal,  but  universal  materialf  .'  S.  Pr.  fehasJiya.  Its  invi 
sibility  is,  as  we  have  seen  (ver.  8.  p.  29),  attributed,  not  to  its 
non-existence,  but  to  itg  subtilty  (saukshmya).  Prakriti  is 
also  defined  €  the  equilibrium  of  the  three  qualities^  ;'  and  here 
it  differs  from  the  subject  matter  of  Aristotle  in  having  quali 
ties.  These  qualities  however,  whilst  prakriti  is  yet  unevolved, 
neutralize  each  other,  and  are  scarcely  qualities  as  regards 
primary  nature,  because  their  loss  of  equilibrium,  or  their  ac 
tivity,  is  concurrent  with  the  discontinuance  of  prakriti  as 
Separate  from  its  products.  So  far,  however,  prakriti  may 


t 
i 


be  considered  as  different  from  the  brute  matter  of  the 
ancient  physiologists,  that  it  produces  products  of  its  own 
energy  or  power  for  a  special  cause,  and  is  therefore 
friore  akin  to  the  "  plastic  nature  that  acts,  evexa  TOV, 
for  the  sake  of  something."  In  the  Sankhya  system,  how- 
erer,  such  nature  is  not  distinct  from  matter  itself,  whilst 
it  appears  to  be  a  different  principle  in  the  writings  of  the 
Greek  philosophers,  although  not  always  very  intelligibly 
'described ;  for,  as  Cudworth  observes  of  Aristotle,  "  he  nowhere 
declares  of  this  nature  of  his,  whether  it  be  corporeal  or  in 
corporeal-,  substantial  or  accidental."  To  conclude,  we  are  to 
understand  of  the  pmkriti  of  the  Sankhyas,  primary,  subtile, 
universal  substanc'e;  Undergoing  modification  through  its  own 
energy,  and  for  a  special  motive,  by  which  it  is  manifest  as 
individual  and  formal  substance,  varied  according  to  the  pre 
dominance  of  qualities,  which  are  equipoised  a'nd  inert  in  the 
parent,  and  unequal  and  active  in  the  progeny. 


XXIII. 

ASCERTAINMENT  is  intellect.  Virtue,  knowledge,  dis 
passion,  and  power  are  its  faculties,  partaking  of  good 
ness.  Those  partaking  of  darkness  are  the  reverse. 

I 


(     113     ) 


i  $TR  JWRff^nifj-  TRRTW 


I  PR 


15 


i 
i 


(     H4     ) 

\ 
i 


BHA'SHYA. 


The  definition  of  intellect  is  ascertainment.     Ascertaining 
(discerning,   determining)  is  ascertainment  :    as  in  the  seed  the 
future  germinating  shoot  is  contained,    so  is  determination  (in 
intellect).     This  is  a  jar,  this  is  cloth  :  that   intellect  which 
will   so   determine    is    so   denned.     This    intellect    has    eight 
members,   according    to  the  twofold   affection  of  goodness  and 
darkness.     The  first  kind,  or  intellect,  partaking  of  goodness, 
is  of  fou*  kinds,  virtue,  knowledge?  di&pa&sion,  'power.      Virtue, 
comprises  humanity,  benevolence,  and  acts  of  restraint  (yrnna)< 
and  of  obligation  (niyama).   The  former  are  said  in  the  Pdtan- 
jala  to  be,   restraint    of  cruelty,    of  falsehood,   of  dishonesty,  of 
incontinence,   and  of  avarice  :    the  latter   are  the  obligations  of 
purification,  contentment,  religious  austerity,  sacred  study,  and 
worship  of  God.     Knowledge  has  for  its  synonyrnes,.  manifesta 
tion,  certainty,  light.     It  is  of  two  kinds,  external  and  internal, 
The  former  is   (knowledge  of)  the  Yedas  and  their  six  subordi 
nate  branches,  recitation,   ritual,   grammar,  glossary,  prosodyr 
and  astronomy  ;  also  (of)  the  pwrdnas,  and  of  logic,    theology, 
and   law.     Internal   knowledge    is  that  of  nature    and  soul,    or 
(the  discrimination  that)    this  is  nature,  the   equipoised  condi 
tion  of  goodness-,   foulness,  and  darkness  :  that  is  soulr    perfect; 
devoid    of    qualities,    pervading,    and    sentient.     By    external 
knowledge   worldly   distinction   or   admiration   is  acquired  ;:  by 
internal    knowledge,    liberation.     Dispassion    is  also    of  two 
kinds,  external  and  internal.     The  former  is  the    indifference  of 
one  who  contemns  sensible  objects  from  observing  their  defects, 
or  the    trouble  of  acquiring   and  preserving  them  ;   the  incon 
venience    of  attachment   to  them  ;  their  liability  to  decay  ;  and 
the  injustice   they  cause.     The  latter  is  the  indifference  of  one 


(     115     ) 

who  Is  desirous  of  liberation,  and  looks  upon  nature  as  if  it 
was  a  piece  of  witchcraft  or  a  dream.  Power,  is  the  abstract 
property  of  a  superior  (or  divine)  being  :  it  is  eightfold,  (the 
capacity  of)  minuteness,  magnitude,  heaviness,  lightness,  reach, 
gratification  of  will,  dominion,  subjugation,  and  irresistible 
purpose.  Atomic  existence  is  meant  by  '  minuteness;'  so  that 
u  person  becoming  atomically  subtile  or  minute  may  traverse 
the  world :  '  magnitude'  is  said  of  one  who  may  make  himself 
a  giant :"  lightness5  is  having  limbs  like  the  fibres  of  the  lotus 
stalk,  or  like  cotton,  so  as  to  be  able  to  stand  upon  the  tops  of 
the  filaments  of  a  flower  :  '  reach'  is  attainment  of  a  desired 
object  by  going  to  the  place  where  it  is  situated,  wherever  that 
may  be:  'gratification  of  will'  is  obtaining  or  effecting  what 
ever  is  desired  :  r  dominion'  is  governing  the  three  worlds,  as  a 
king:  'subjugation'  is  having  all  things  subject :' irresistible 
purpose'  is  compelling  the  site,  rest,  and  motion  of  all  things, 
from  Brahma  to  a  block,  agreeably  to  the  will  of  the  person 
endowed  with  this  faculty.  These  are  the  four  properties  of 
intellect  which  soul  obtains  when  the  qualities  of  foulness  and 
darkness  -are  overcome  by  that  of  goodness. 

But  those  partaking  of  darkness  are  tJie  reverse. — When 
Intellect  is  influenced  by  the  quality  of  da-rkness,  then  its  four 
properties  are  the  reverse  of  the  above  ;  they  are,  vice,  igno 
rance,  passion,  and  weakness.  In  this  manner  intellect  having 
-eight  members,  as  it  is  affected  by  goodness  or  foulness,  is 
produced  from  the  imdiscrete  principle  having  the  three 
-qualities. 

Intellect  feas  thus  been  explained.  Egotism  is  next  des 
cribed. 


COMMENT- 

The  first  product  of  nature,  or  intellect,  is  here  described  by 
its  properties. 


(     116     ) 

Intellect  (buddhi)  is  adhyavasdya*.  It  is  not  easy  to  offer 
a  satisfactory  equivalent  for  this  word,  nor  to  understand  pre 
cisely  what  is  meant  by  it.  In  the  Amara  Kosha  it  occurs  as 
a  synonyrne  of  utsdlia"^,  '  effort,  strenuous  and  continued  effort* 
perseverance ;'  according  to  RA'MA'SRAMA,  '  possessing  gieat 
power}/  He  derives  it  from  so  antakarmmani\\,  '  finishing, 
making  end  of/-  with  adhi§,  '  over/  and  aralT,  '  off ;'  that  is,  en 
tirely  or  absolutely  ending  or  effecting  ;  as  in  the  Hitopadesa  : 
'  The  precepts  of  knowledge  confer  not  the  least  benefit  on  one 
who  is  afraid  of  exertion  :  of  what  use  is  a  lamp  to  a  blind  man, 
though  it  be  within  his  reach**/  In  the  Mitdkshara,  utsdha 
is  explained,  *  Effort  (or  perseverance)  in  the  performance  of 
acts  accomplishing  the  objects  of  manft/  In  the  Bhatti 
Kavyct,  we  have  the  word  used  in  the  sense  of '  wish,  purpose* 
determination :'  '  The  bird  said  to  the  monkeys;  You  have  not 
studied  the  law,  if  at  such  a  season  you  wish  (or  resolve) 
to  die^J/ 

In  a  preceding  passage  (ver.  5)  the  phrase  prati  vishaya 
adhyavasdya\\\\j  '  ascertainment  of  several  objects,  was  given  as 
the  definition  of  drish'ta,  '  perception  ;'  and  the  explanation  of 
the  Scholiast,  buddhivyapdra  jndnam§§,  '  knowledge,  which 
is  the  exercise  of  the  intellectual  faculty/  was  cited  (p.  23). 
The  same  commentator,  YACHESPATI,  here  defines  it,  '  the 
specific  function  of  intellect,  not  differing  from  intellect,  itself;' 
or,  to  quote  the  passage  at  length,  'Ascertainment  is  intellect, 
from  the  identity  of  the  act  and  the  agent,  as  will  be  explained. 


:  i        ft 


f  i  3T^>i  r 

r^^^rfr^rs^^^r^:  i 
srrvawfM  ^ft:  i  15 

§§  5 


(     H7     ) 

Every  one  who  engages  in  any  matter  first  observes,  or  crni* 
siders  ;  he  next  reflects,  it  is  I  who  am  concerned  in  this  ;  arid 
then  determines,  this  is  to  be  done  by  me  ;  thence  he  pro 
ceeds  to  act  :  this  is  familiar  to  every  one.  Thence  this  as- 
certainment  that  such  act  is  to  be  done  is  the  determination 
of  intellect,  which  is  as  it  were  endowed  with  reason,  from  the 
proximity  of  the  sentient  principle.  This  is  the  specific  func 
tion  of  intellect,  not  differing  from  intellect  itself;  and  the  defi 
nition  of  intellect  is  ascertainment,  as  that  comprehends  both 
its  generic  and  specific  distinctions*.' 

The  explanation  of  the  $.  Chandrikd  is  to  the  same  effect  : 
Adkyavasdya  is  a  sort  of  modified  condition  of  intellect,  as 
flame  is  of  a  lamp  ;  it  is  certainty  in  this  form,  such  an  act  is 
to  be  done  by  me.f 

The  explanations,  however,  would  rather  seem  to  intimate 
intention,  or  volition,  or,  at  least,  the  determination  to  act  after 
reflection  ;  but  the  determination  or  conclusion  that  such  an 
act  should  be  done,  does  not  necessarily  signify  that  it  shall  be 
done  :  it  is  only  the  conclusion  or  ascertainment  of  its  fitness. 
This  function  of  the  intellect,  also,  is  not  indispensably  con 
nected  with  the  notion  of  will  ;  as  in  the  example  given  by 
GAURAPADA  ;  where,  in  the  simple  conclusion  after  considera 
tion,  "this  object  is  ajar;  that,  is  a  piece  of  cloth/'  no  wish, 
or  will,  is  indicated;  no  act  follows.  It  is  clear  also  that  he 
considers  adhyavasdya  merely  as  the  functions  of  intellect,  in 


i  srtf  s 


exercise  :  they  are  in  intellect,  and  part  of  it,  as  the  germ  is 
in  the  seed,  until  brought  into  activity.  Intellect  is  only  an 
instrument ;  that  which,  having  received  the  ideas  or  images 
conveyed  through  the  organs  of  sense,  and  the  mind,  constructs 
them  into  a  conclusive  idea,  which  it  presents  to  soul.  Its 
function  in  exercise,  therefore,  is  ascertainment  or  certainty,  as 
described  in  the  >Sf.  Pravackana  Bhashya,  which  explains 
adJiyavasdya,  '  the  synonyme,  as  well  as  buddhi,  of  great  prin 
ciple  (mahat),  and  its  specific  function  denominated  ascer 
tainment  *.' 

The  other  synonymes  of  this  principle  are,  buddhi,  derived 
from  biidh,  *  to  know/  '  knowing,  intellect.'  Mahat,  'great,  the 
great  principle  ;'  *  The  first  and  most  important  of  the  products 
of  nature,  and  presiding  over  and  pervading  the  wholet/  Asuri^: 
this  is  a  very  unusual  and  questionable  denomination.  It 
occurs  only  in  the  S.  JShashya,  and  may  be  an  error,  perhaps 
for  semushi,  one  of  the  synonymes  of  buddhi  in  the  Amara 
koska.  It  cannot  be  connected  with  asura,  ( a  demon/  as  if  the 
faculty  were  incompetent  to  convey  divine  knowledge  ;  for  one 
of  its  properties,  in  connexion  with  the  quality  of  goodness,  is 
jnydna,  '  true  knowledge/  There  is  no  good  reason  why  it 
should  be  derived  from  ASURI,  the  pupil  of  KAPILA,  unless 
allusion  is  made  to  some  personification  of  intellect,  as  the 
bride  of  the  sage.  No  explanation  of  the  word  is  given  in  the 
Bhashya,  and  I  must  confess  my  inability  to  suggest  one  en 
titled  to  any  confidence.  Matl  means  '  understanding  :'  man- 
ydte  anaya,  that  by  which  any  thing  is  understood.  Khy&ti 
properly  signifies  ( fame  but  here  means  '  notoriety,  notion, 
familiar  knowledge ;'  as  in  the  Smriti,  '  The  great  one  it  is, 
whence  the  familiar  notions  of  the  universe  are  always  pro- 


i  t 

J  ^rrjfr  i 


(     119      ) 

duced*/  Jnyana  is  usually  the  term  for  *  true  or  divine 
knowledge  ;'  knowledge  of  matter  and  spirit  leading  to  libera 
tion  ;  but  it  is  here  employed  in  its  generic  purport,  '  that  by 
which  things  are  known.'  The  same  may  be  said  of  prajna, 
which  is  also  commonly  used  in  the  sense  of '  true  wisdom/ 
but  here  implies  merely,  '  that  by  which  knowledge  is  obtain 
ed,'  prajndyate  anayti,  as  RAMASRAMA  expounds  it.  Several 
of  these  terms,  in  their  technical,  as  well  as  literal  application , 
bear  an  analogy  to  the  vovs  of  Aristotle,  and  the  ^>poi>ri<Ti<s  of 
Plato.  M.  Cousin  considers  the  category  to  be  '  une  sorts 
d'ame  du  monde.'  It  is,  however,  the  instrument  most  proxi 
mate  to  soul,  by  which  the  latter  perceives,  wills,  and  acts. 

Intellect  is  of  two  kinds,  or  has  two  sets  of  properties,  as  it 
is  influenced  or  affected  by  the  opposite  qualities,  goodness  and 
darkness.  The  former  are,  'virtue,'  dhcrnta]  'knowledge1, 
jnyana  ;  '  dispassion/  wiragya  ,  and  '  power/  ai&waryya.  The 
latter  are  their  negatives,  '  vice,'  ad/tcrmu  ; '  ignorance,'  ajuyana', 
'passion/  avniragya\  and  *  weakness/  anuwjvaryya.  These 
again  comprehend  specific  varieties. 

Dherma,  '  virtue/  according  to  the  S.  Bhasliya,  comprehends 
morality  and  religion.  The  S.  Tutwa  KoMinudi  explains  it, 
'  The  cause  of  happiness  arid  liberationf.'  As  the  source  of 
prosperity  and  happiness  in  life,  it  is  the  discharge  of  religious 
and  moral  obligations!  ;  as  the  means  of  liberation,  it  is  the 
observance  of  the  eightfold  yoya,  or  eight  modes  of  contempla 
tive  devotion[j.  Jnyana,  or  '  knowledge,'  is  defined  by  the 
same  Scholiast  to  bey  '  distinct  notion  of  the  difference  between 
the  three  qualities  and  soul§.'  '  Dispassion/  vaimqya,  is  the- 
extinction  of  rdqa,  '  colour,''  or  passion,  which  like  dyes  of  vari 
ous  hues  tinctures  the  soul^l.'  '  Power,'  a'ixwaryya,  is  the  posses- 


(     120     ) 

fclon  of  superhuman  faculties,  It  is  always  termed  eightfold, 
even  in  the  S.  Bhdshya,  although  nine  varieties  are  there 
named  :  one  of  them,  however,  '  heaviness/  garimtni)  finds  no 
place  among  the  definitions  given  there,  any  more  than  in 
other  authorities.  It  may  be  supposed  to  be  included  under 
the  faculty  of  magnitude. 

The  four  first  faculties,  minuteness/  animd  ;  '  lightness/ 
laghimd  ;  '  reach/  prdpti  ;  and  *  magnitude,'  mahiwd;  explain 
ed  and  illustrated  every  where  in  the  same  way.  According 
to  VACHESPATI.  the  person  endowed  with  the  first  can  make  his 
•way  into  a  solid  rock;  with  the  second,  he  may  ascend  to  the 
solar  sphere  upon  a  sunbeam;  or,  as  Moore  has  it,  "  may  dance 
on  a  beam  of  the  sun  :"  with  the  third,  he  can  touch  the  moon 
•with  the  tip  of  finger :  and  with  the  fourth,  he  may  expand 
himself  so  as  to  occupy  all  space.  The  latter  four  faculties  are 
less  distinctly  defined,  and  are  sometimes  confounded :  the 
shades  of  difference  are  indeed  so  slight,  that  they  may  all  be 
resolved  into  one,  *  absolute  power  over  matter.7  '  Gratifica 
tion  of  will/  prakamya,  is  generally  defined  by  ichchha-ntibhi- 
ghata*,  unobstr notion  of  wish  ;'  or.  as  explained  by  HEMACHAN- 
DRA,  in  his  commentary  on  his  own  Lexicon,  '  The  wishes  of  a 
person  possessing  this  faculty  are  unimpeded  by  the  properties 
of  material  nature,  such  as  form  and  the  like  ;  so  that  he  can 
swim,  dive,  or  float  in  earth  as  readily  as  in  waterf/  This  is 
sometimes  adduced  in  illustration  of  the  meaning  of  the  next 
faculty,  but  less  accurately.  That,  is  termed  vasitd,  which 
VACHESPATI  defines,  ;  absolute  subjugation  of  the  elements  and 
elementary  beingsj/  The  Chandrikd  makes  it  '  independance 
on  matter||/  which  is  much  the  same  as  prakdmya ;  and  A 
similar  confusion  occurs  in  RAMASRAMA's  commentary  on 
AMARA,  for  he  illustrates  it  by  '  swimming  or  diving  on  dry 
land§/  '  Subjugation  of  nature'  is  the  usually  accepted  import 


(     121     ) 

as  HEMACHANDRA.  *  Thus  as  (with  this  faculty)  any  one  deter 
mines  the  elements  shall  be,  so  they  remain*."  The  next 
faculty  is  '  dominion,'  foitd,  According  to  VACHESPATI,  it  is 
'  disposition  at  will  of  the  production,  arrangement,  and  ex 
penditure  of  the  elements  and  elementary  beingarj".'  NARA- 
YANA  explains  it,  '  directing  or  impelling  them  at  will}.'  RAMAS- 
RAMA  interprets  it  prabkutva,  '  dominion,  sovereignty  ;  under 
which  inanimate  things  obey  command)].'  The  last  faculty  is 
termed  yatrakdmdvasdyitd.  In  RAMASRAMA'S  commentary  he 
reads  the  word  kdmdvasdyitd§  ;  and  the  only  variety  he  notices 
is  that  of  the  sibilant,  which  is  sometimes,  he  observes,  the 
dental,  instead  of  the  palatal  letter^".  According  to  the  latter 
reading  it  is  derived  from  si*  *  '  to  sleep  ;'  to  the  former, 
from  sof-f^  '  to  destroy  :'  in  either,  with  ava  prefixed, 
meaning,  as  RAMASRAMA  explains  it,  'he  who  tranquillizes 
or  destroys  (that  is,  accomplishes)  his  desires}}.'  The 
reading  of  GAURAPADA  is,  however,  yatrakarndvasdyitd, 
as  one  compound  ;  and  the  common  definition  of  the 
term  is  '  true  (infalliable)  purposej|||,'  wherever  exercised  : 
'  Whatever  the  person  having  this  faculty  intends  or  proposes 
must  be  complied  with  by  that  which  is  the  subject  of  his  pur 
pose  ;  the  elements  themselves  must  conform  to  his  designs§§. 
The  Cliandrikd  has,  '  Whatever  the  will  proposes,  that  it 
obtainslfllV  HE'MACHANDRA,  in  his  text,  gives  the  word  as  in 
the  BhAshya,  yatrakdmdvasdyitwom  ;  and  explains  it,  'he 
who  accomplishes  his  desires,  to  whatever  they  may  be  direct 
ed***  :'  and  he  illustrates  it  by  saying  that  •'  an  arhat,  or 


tfr  i        ft 
i 


16 


(     122     ) 


Bav.ddha  saint,  can,  by  virtue  of  this  faculty,   convert  poison 
into  ambrosia,  and  administer  it  as  means  of  vitality*/ 


rv  rv  C«s 

*I*T:  II 


II  *  8  (I 

XXIV. 

CONSCIOUSNESS  is  egotism.  Thence  proceeds  a  two 
fold  creation.  The  elevenfold  set  is  one :  the  five 
elemental  rudiments  are  the  other. 


BHASHYA. 

The  elevenfold  set:  the  eleven  organs.  The  five  elemental 
rudiments  :  elementary  matter  of  five  kinds,  or  the  rudiments, 
sound,  touch,  form,  flavour,  and  odour.  What  sort  of  creation 
proceeds  from  that  which  is  thus  defined  is  next  explained. 

COMMENT- 

The  third  category  is  here  specified,  and  described  as  the 
source  of  the  senses  and  their  respective  objects. 

The  term    here  given   as  the   synonyme   and   definition   of 


(     123     ) 


'egotism,'  ahankdra'f,  is  abhimdn&Zr  translated  'conscious 
ness/  The  ordinary  sense  of  both  words  is  pride,  and  the- 
technical  import  is  '  the  pride  or  conceit  of  individuality  •/ 
'  self-sufficiency  ;'  the  notion  that  'I  do,  I  feel,  I  think,  I  am/ 
as  explained  by  VACHESPATI  :  c  I  alone  preside  and  have  power 
over  all  that  is  perceived  and  known,  and  all  these  objects  of 
sense  are  for  my  use.  There  is  no  other  supreme1  except  I  ;  I 
AM.  This  pride,  from  its  exclusive  (selfish)  application,  is 
egotism!!/  The  principle,  therefore,  is  something  more  in 
Hindu  metaphysics  than  mere  consciousness,  or  conscience. 
It  might  be  better  expressed,  perhaps,  by  'Te  nM>i,'  as  it  adds 
to  the  simple  conception  of  individuality  the  notion  of  self- 
property,  the  concentration  of  all  objects  anJ  raterests  and 
feelings  in  the  individual, 

The  other  synonymes  of  this  category  express  rather  modifi 
cations  of  it,  as  the  next  stanza  intimates.  Taijasa,  '  the  active' 
or  (  the  ardent/  from  tejas*,  '  light,  splendour,  ardour,'  refers  to 
its  animating  or  exciting  influence  on  human  actions,  in  con 
nection  with  the  quality  of  foulness-:  Bh&tddvf9  '  primitive 
element/  and  vaikrita].,  t  the  modified,'  as  explained  in  the 
Bhdshya  o-n  the  next  verse,  regard  its  being,  in  connection 
with  darkness  and  goodness,,  the  principle  from  which  the 
organs  and  objects  of  sense  proceed:  for  it  roust  not  be  for 
gotten,  that  this  category  of  egotism  or  consciousness  has  a 
physical,  not  a  metaphysical,  character,  according  to  the 
Sankhya  philosophy,  being  the  organ  or  instrument  by  which 
the  impression  of  individuality  is  conveyed  to  so-ui.  It  is  in 
this  capacity  that  it  may  be  considered  the  primary  element, 
the  parent  of  the  rudiments  of  the  elements,  or  the  objects  of 
sense,  and  of  the  organs  by  which  they  are  perceived.  It  is, 


(     124     ) 

in  fact,  the  same  with  both  these,  as  it  is  only  by  the  applica 
tion  of  our  own  senses  to  the  objects  of  sense  that  we  can 
become  conscious  of  individual  existence. 


XXV. 

FROM  consciousness,  affected  by  goodness,  proceeds 
the  good  elevenfold  set  :  from  it,  as  a  dark  origin  of 
being,  come  elementary  particles  :  both  issue  from 
that  principle  affected  by  foulness. 


*TIT 


IT 


(     125     ) 


BHASHYA. 

When  goodness  predominates  in  egotism  over  darkness  and 
foulness,  that  egotism  is  of  the  pure  kind  ;  the  name  of  which, 
according  to  ancient  teachers,  was  vaikrita,  '  the  modified/ 
From  this  modified  egotism  the  class  of  eleven  organs  is  pro 
duced.  The  good  set:  perfect  organs  ;  adequate  to  their  func 
tions  :  the  set  is  thence  called  good.  Again  -from  it  as  a  dark 
origin  of  beings,  &v.  —  When  darkness  predominates  in  egotism 
over  goodness  and  foulness,  that  egotism  is  called  dark,  or,  as 
it  was  named  by  the  old  masters,  *  primitive  element/  bhiitddi. 
From  it  come  elementary  particles  ;  the  fivefold  set.  The 
first  element  of  the  elements  is  darkness  ;  therefore  it  is  usually 
called  the  dark  :  from  that  primitive  element  the  fivefold  nidi- 
mental  set  proceed.  Both  issue  from  that  principle  affected 
by  foulness  :  that  is,  the  egotism  in  which  foulness  predomi 
nates  over  goodness  and  darkness  takes  the  denomination 
taijasa,  '  the  active  ;'  and  from  that  both  proceed  ;  both  the 
eleven  organs  and  five  rudiments.  For  the  pure  egotism,  which 
is  vaikrita,  '  the  modified,'  becoming  so  modified,  produces  the 
eleven  organs  :  but  to  do  this  it  takes  active  egotism  for  its 
assistant  ;  for  pure  (sdtwika)  egotism  is  inert,  and  is  only  able 
to  produce  the  organs  when  combined  with  the  active.  In 
like  manner  the  dark  egotism,  or  that  which  is  called  '  primi 
tive  element/  is  inert,  and  becomes  active  only  in  union  with 
the  active,  when  it  produces  the  five  rudiments.  Therefore  it 


(     126     ) 

as  said,  both  the  organs  of  sense  and  their  objects  issue  from 
the  modification  of  egotism  affected  by  foulness.  The  good 
elevenfold  set  proceeds  from  modified  egotism,  or  that  which 
is  affected  by  the  quality  of  goodness.  They  are  next 
particularized. 

COMMENT. 

The  products  of  egotism  are  here  described  as  proceeding 
from  three  modifications  of  that  principle,  varied  by  the  in 
fluence  of  the  three  qualities. 

The  terms  used  to  designate  the  '  pure/  &r  sdfwika  principle; 
the  '  dark,'  or  tdmasa  ;  and  the  '  foul,'  or  vdjasa ;  '  variety  of 
egotism,'  or  vaikrita,  bJtutddi,  and  taijasti ;  have  been  explain 
ed.  According  to  our  text,  as  understood  by  the  Scholiasts, 
the  eleven  organs  of  sense  issue  from  pure  or  modified  egotism, 
and  the  five  rudiments  from  elemental  egotism ;  both  being 
influenced  by  ardent  or  active  egotism.'  The  commentator 
on  the  S.  Pravachavia  has  a  rather  different  explanation,  in 
terpreting  e'kadasaka,  '  eleventh/  not  '  elevenfold  :'  according  to* 
him,  this  eleventh,  which  is  mind,  proceeds  from  the  first  kind 
of  egotism  ;  the  other  ten  from  the  second  kind  ;  and  the  ele 
ments  from  the  third.  "  Sutra  :.  The  pure  eleventh  (organ)' 
proceeds  from  modified  egotism.  Comments  Eleventh,  is 
mind,  which  in  the  class  of  sixteen  organs  and  rudiments  is 
of  the  quality  of  goodness  ;  there-fore  it  is  born  from  egotism,, 
affected  by  goodness,  called  vaikvita*.  This  is  the  sense.  Hence 
it  follows,  that  from  egotism,  affected  by  foulness,  proceed  the 
other  ten  organs  of  sense ;  and  from  egotism,  affected  by 
darkness,  proceed  the  rudiments*/*  This  interpretation 
he  defends  by  the  authority  of  the  law-books  and  Puranas ; 


(     127    ) 

and  he  gives  a  similar  turn,  although  rather  indistinctly 
expressed,  to  the  text  of  the  Karika.  In  the  stanzas  subse 
quent  to  this,  to  ver.  37,  the  organs  of  sense  are  fully 
described,  and  in  ver.  38  the  text  returns  to  the  ele 
ments.  It  is  not  necessary,  therefore,  to  enter  upon  any 
explanation  of  them  in  this  place.  There  is  a  remarkable  ex 
pression  in  the  Bhdshya,  which  presents  a  notion  familiar  to 
all  ancient  cosmogonies.  GAURAPADA  says,  '  the  first  of  the 
elements  was  darkness*.'  It  is  the  first  of  the  '  elements/  not 
the  first  of  '  things  ;'  for  it  was  preceded  hy  unevolved  nature 
and  intellect,  and  it  is  itself  a  modified  form  of  individuality. 
It  therefore  harmonizes  perfectly  well  with  the  prevailing  ideas 
in  the  ancient  world,  of  the  state  of  things  anterior  to  ele 
mentary  or  visible  creation,  when  "  chaos  was,  and  night," 
and  when 

Nullus  adhuc  mundo  prwbetxit  lumina' Titan, 
Nee  nova  crescendo  reparabat  cornua  Phoebe. 

In  the  influence  of  the  quality  of  foulness,  or  passion,  for  the 
word  rajas  has  both  senses,  may  be  suspected  an  affinity  to 
the  doctrine  of  an  active  principle,  the  moving  mind,  the  eros, 
that  set  inert  matter  into  motion,  and  produced  created  things. 


II 


XXVI. 


INTELLECTUAL  organs  are,  the  eyes,  the  ears,  the  nose, 
the  tongue,  and  the  skin  :  those  of  action  are,  the 
voice,  hands,  feet,  the  excretory  organ,  and  that  of 
generation. 


(     128     ) 


BHA'SHYA. 

Beckoning  from  the  eye  to  the  organ  of  touch,  the  organs 
are  called  *  intellectual.'  Touched  by  it,  the  organ  of  touch, 
which  is  the  skin  :  thence  the  term  for  the  skin  which  is  used 
(in  the  text),  *  that  which  touches,'  sparsanaka.  Intellectual 
organs  are  five,  as  they  ascertain  or  know  (severally)  five  ob 
jects,  or  sound,  touch,  form,  flavour,  and  smell.  Those  of  ac 
tion,  &c.  —  They  perform  acts,  whence  they  are  called  '  organs 
of  action  :'  thus,  the  voice  articulates  ;  the  hands  variously 
manipulate  ;  the  feet  effect  motion  ;  the  excretory  organ,  excre 
tion  ;  and  the  sexual  organ,  generation.  Thus  are  enumerated 
ten  organs,  five  of  intellect  and  five  of  action.  The  character 
and  nature  of  the  eleventh,  or  mind,  is  next  described. 

COMMENT- 

The  five  instruments  or  means  of  perception  and  five  of  ac 
tion,  products  of  egotism,  are  enumerated  in  this  stanza. 

The  term  '  organs'  is  correctly  applicable  to  the  material 
instruments  by  which  perception  is  exercised  ;  but  it  is  not  to 
be  understood  of  the  gross  corporeal  bodies,  the  visible  eye, 
ear,  hand,  &e.,  which  are  parts  of  gross  body.  The  werd  *  sen* 


(     129     ) 

Be's'  would  therefore  be  a  less  equivocal  term,  only  that  it  does 
not  so  distinctly  convey  the  idea  of  an  instrument  which,  though 
subtile,  is  substantial.  The  original  word,  indriya,  is  defined 
to  mean  whatever  relates  or  belongs  to  i/nd/rfy  said  to  be  a 
synonyme  of  soul,  the  senses  being  indicative,  being  marks  or 
signs,  of  the  presence  of  soul*:  accordingly  each  is  donomina- 
ted  a  linga  (see  p.  24),  'a  characteristic  feature  or  indication.'f 


.11 
II  ^  II 

^^ 

XXVII, 

(!N  this  set  is")  mind,  which  is  both  (an  organ  of 
sensation  and  of  action).  It  ponders,  and  it  is  an  or 
gan  as  being  cognate  with  the  rest.  They  are  numer 
ous  by  specific  modification  of  qualities,  and  so  are 
external  diversities* 


c 


* 

t 


17 


(     130     ) 


^rro  ^arr^w^r  I 

i 


BHASHYA. 


Here,  as  one  of  the  class  of  organs,  mind  is  said  to  be  both. 
Among  the  organs  of  sensation  it  is  one  of  sensation,  and 
among  those  of  action  it  is  an  organ  of  action  also.  As  it 
performs  the  function  of  the  organs  of  sensation  and  of  those 


of  action  it  belongs  to  .both.  It  ponders  (or  purposes) ;  whence 
the  term  sankalpaka.  It  is  also  an  organ  as  being  cognate 
with  the  rest ;  for  such  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  sadhermya. 
The  organs  of  sensation  and  action  being  (cognate  or)  produced, 
along  with  mind,  from  egotism  affected  by  goodness,  have  this 
(property,  of  origin)  in  common  with  mind ;  and  from  this  com 
mon  property  mind  is  an  organ  likewise. 

Thus  eleven   organs  are   produced  from  egotism   affected  by 
goodness.     What,  then,  is    the  function  (vritti)    of  mind  ?  Re 
flection  (sankalpa)  is  its  function.     Sound  and  the  rest  are  the 
functions  of  the  organs  of  sensation.     Speech  and  the  rest  are 
the  functions  of  the    organs  of  action.     Now  are  these    various 
organs,    apprehending  various   objects,  so   created    by  Iswara  ? 
or  are  they  self-generated  ?  since   nature,  intellect,  and  egotism, 
are   devoid  of  sense ;  and   soul  is    devoid   of  action.     Thence 
according  to  the  Sankhya  doctrine,  a  certain  spontaneity  is  the 
cause  (of  the  variety  of  the  senses).     Therefore   it  is  addded. 
They   are   numerous   by  specific   modification  of  qualities, 
and  so  are  external   diversities :  that   is,   the   several   objects 
of  these  eleven  organs,   or   sound,  touch,    form,   flavour,   and 
odour,   which    are  the    objects   of  five ;    speech,    manipulation, 
motion,   excretion,    and   generation,   the  objects   of  other  five  ; 
and   reflexion,   the   object    of  mind;    these    all   proceed    from 
specific  modification  of  qualities.     From  the  variety  (or  special 
difference)   of  such  modifications  of  the  qualities  the  multifari- 
ousness   of   the    organs   proceeds,   as  well   as  the   diversity  of 
external  objects  :  consequently  this  variety  is  not  the   work  of 
Iswara,   nor  of  egotism,   nor  of  intellect,  nor  of  nature,   nor  of 
soul ;    but   from   modification   of   the    qualities,    produced   by 
spontaneity.     It  does  not  proceed  designedly    (it  is  not  the  re 
sult   of  a  will  to  act),   because    the    qualities   are   non-sentient 
(unconscious   or   irrational).     How    then    does    it   take  place  ? 
This,  as  will  be  afterwards   explained,    is  in  like  manner  as  the 
secretion   of  milk  is  for  the  growth    of  the  calf,  so  the  proceed 
ings  of  nature   take   place   for  the   liberation  of  soul,  without 


(     132     ) 

soul's  being  cognizant  of  them  ;  so  the  unconscious  qualities 
become  modified  by  the  existence  of  the  eleven  organs,  and 
their  varieties  are  thence  derived.  Hence  the  eye  is  placed 
in  its  elevated  orbit  for  the  purpose  of  looking  up  to  heaven  ; 
and  in  like  manner  the  nose,  the  ear,  the  tongue  are  comrnodi- 
ously  situated  for  the  apprehension  of  their  respective  objects  : 
the  organs  of  action  are  also  distributed  conveniently  for  the 
discharge  of  their  several  duties  of  their  own  nature,  through 
the  modification  of  the  qualities,  not  as  their  objects  ;  as  it  is 
elsewhere  said,  "  Qualities  abide  in  qualities  ;  that  which  is 
the  function  of  the  qualities  is  their  object."  External  diversi 
ties,  therefore,  are  to  be  regarded  as  made  by  the  qualities  : 
this  is  the  meaning  of  the  text.  Of  which  nature  is  the 
cause. 

The  several  functions  of  the  organs  are  next  specified, 

COMMENT. 

After  defining  mind  as  an  instrument  both  of  sensation  and 
of  action,  this  verse  explains  how  it  is  that  there  are  various 
organs  and  objects  of  sense  ;  and  it  is  said  to  depend  in  both 
cases  upon  specific  modifications  of  the  qualities  of  nature. 

Mind  is  an  instrument  both  of  sensation  and  of  action.  Its 
function  is  sankatya,  a  word  that  more  commonly  means  '  re 
solve,  purpose,  expectation  ;  as  in  the  Hitopadesa,  '  the  crow,' 
Laghupatanaka,  says,  '  All  has  been  heard  by  me  ;  and  this  is 
my  resolve,  that  we  must  be  friends*.'  And  MENU:  'Desire 
is  the  root  of  expectation ;  sacrifice  is  its  productf:'  or,  as 
KULLUKA  BHATTA  explains  it,  '  Sankalpa  is  understanding  to 
this  effect,  that  by  a  certain  ceremony  a  desired  consequence 
is  effected}.'  In  both  passages  the  notion  of  *  conclusion  from 


m\ 

I  *J!ir: 


(     133     ) 

foregone  premises'  is  conveyed,  and  that  seems  to  be  its  mean 
ing  here.  Thus  VACHASPATI  explains  it:  'The  mind  carefully 
considers  a  substance  perceived  by  an  organ  of  sense,  (and 
determines)  this  is  simple,  that  is  not  so ;  or  discriminates  them 
by  their  condition  of  predicate  and  predicable*.'  Again,  it  is 
said,  "  First,  knowledge  or  perception  ia  simple  (inconsiderate), 
like  the  knowledge  of  a  child,  a  dumb  man,  or  the  like  :  it  is 
produced  by  the  mere  thing  ;  but  when,  after  this,  the  thing, 
as  distinguished  by  its  properties,  by  its  genus,  and  the  like, 
is  recognised  by  the  understanding,  and  intellect  is  in  accor 
dance  with  perception,  that  period  (or  interval)  of  determina 
tion  is  the  operation  of  the  mind."  Here,  then,  sankalpa  is  the 
process  of  reflection,  the  consideration  of  the  object  of  simple 
perception,  so  as  to  form  a  definite  idea,  which  mind  transmits, 
through  individuality  and  intellect,  to  soul.  In  this  way  mind 
is  an  organ  both  of  perception  and  action ;  perceiving  the  ob 
jects  presented  by  the  senses,  and  forming  them  into  a  positive 
idea.  It  is  further  identified  with  both  classes  of  organs  by 
originating  from  the  same  source,  egotism  affected  by  goodness  ; 
and  consequently  it  consists  of  the  same  materialf. 

The  second  portion  of  the  stanza  conveys  a  doctrine  that  is 
not  very  intelligible.  The  variety  of  the  senses  and  of  the  ob 
jects  of  the  senses  is  said  to  arise  spontaneously  in  them,  from 
specific  modification  of  the  three  qualities.  VACHASPATI  under 
stands  the  allusion  to  external  objects  to  be  merely  illustrative  ; 
that  is,  the  internal  organs  are  diversified  by  modification  of 
the  qualities,  in  the  same  manner  that  external  objects  are 
varied  by  the  same  modification^:'  and  the  translation  follows 
this  explanation.  In  the  Bhashya  a  different  reading  in  the 
original  occurred,  which  would  require  the  passage  to  be  ren 
dered,  '  and  from  variety  of  external  objects)!:'  thus  ascribing 


(     134     ) 

the  diversity  of  the  organs,  not  only  to  modification  of  the 
qualities,  but  to  the  diversity  of  external  objects,  which  require 
suitable,  and  therefore  various  organs  for  their  apprehension. 
The  reading  is,  however,  clearly  incompatible  with  his  argu 
ment,  although  GAURAPADA  is  somewhat  obscure ;  but  the 
variety  is  noticed  and  admitted  by  the  author  of  the  Chandrika*. 
The  S.  Pravachana  Bhashya  considers  the  multifariousness 
spoken  of  in  the  Sutra,  which  conveys  apparently  a  similar 
doctrine  to  that  of  the  Karika,  as  restricted  to  mind :  '  Multi 
fariousness  is1  from  modification  of  qualities,  as  the  variety  of 
human  condition  (is  from  various  association)  :  that  is,  as  the 
very  same  individual  assumes  different  characters,  according 
to  the  influence  of  his  associations  ;  becoming  a  lover  with  a 
mistress,  a  sage  with  sages,  a  different  person  with  others  ;  so 
mind,  from  its  connection  with  the  eye  or  any  other  organ, 
becomes  identified  with  it,  and  consequently  is  diversified 
according  to  the  function  of  sight  and  the  rest  of  the  organs 
with  which  it  is  severally  associated^.'  The  association  of  mind 
with  the  organs  is  intimated  by  the  Ve'das,  as  in  the  text,  '  My 
mind  was  elsewhere,  I  did  not  hear.J'  The  very  illustration 
used  by  Locke  :  "  A  man  whose  mind  is  intently  employed  in 
the  contemplation  of  some  objects,  takes  no  notice  of  im 
pressions  made  by  sounding  bodies  upon  the  organ  of  hearing  : 
therefore  it  is  evident  that  perception  is  only  when  the  mind 
receives  the  impression,"  says  the  English  philosopher ;  and  the 
Hindu  infers,  that  '  the  mind  must  cooperate  with  the  organs 
of  sense,  even  for  perception,  as  they  would  otherwise  be  in 
capable  of  performing  their  f unctions. || 


*  s          s  :  i  t  JTUT- 

nr% 
grrf 
J  ^ 


(     135     ) 

The  materiality  of  mind,  considered  as  distinct  from  con 
sciousness,  intelligence,  and  soul,  and  as  neither  more  nor  less 
than  an  internal  sense,  a  sensorium,  is  much  less  absurd  than 
the  same  character  of  it  when  considered  as  part  of,  or  identical 
with,  soul,  as  was  the  doctrine  of  the  Epicureans,  whose  des 
cription  of  mind,  as  an  organ  merely,  agrees  well  enough  with 
the  Hindu  notion  : 

Primum  ;  animum  clico  mentem  quam  ssepe  dicamus 

Esse  hominis  partem  nihilo  minus  ac  mantis  ac  pes 

Atque  oculei,  partes  aiiimantes  totius  exstant.     LUCRETIUS,  III.  94, 


\\'\c\\ 

XXVIII. 

THE  function  of  five,  in  respect  to  colour  and  the 
rest,  is  observation  only.  Speech,  handling,  treading, 
excretion,  and  generation  are  the  functions  of  five 
(other  organs). 


f%: 


I 


(     136     ) 

BHA'SHYA, 

The  term  6  only'  (matra)  is  to  be  understood  in  the  sense 
of  speciality,  or  the  exclusion  of  what  is  not  specified ;  as  in  the 
sentence,  "  Alms  only  are  received ;"  that  is,  nothing  else  is 
received.  Thus  the  eyes  are  observant  of  colour  (form),  not 
of  flavour  and  the  rest ;  and  so  of  the  other  senses.  And 
in  this  way  the  function  of  the  eye  is  colour  (vision) ;  of 
the  tongue,  taste  ;  of  the  nose,  smell ;  of  the'  ear,  sound  (hear 
ing)  ;  of  the  skin,  touch  :  these  are  the  functions  of  the  Intellec 
tual  organs.  Speech  and  the  rest  (are  the  functions)  of  the 
five  organs  of  action  ;  or,  speech  is  the  function  of  the  voice 
(larynx,  <&c.)  ;  handling  of  the  hands ;  treading,  of  the  feet ; 
dejection  of  excrement  separated  from  food,  of  the  rectum  ;  and 
generation  of  offspring,  of  the  sexual  organs  :  '  function  or  ob 
ject'  being  required  for  each  term  by  the  grammatical  eronstruc- 
tion  of  the  sentence. 

The  functions  of  intellect,  egotism,  and  mind  are  next 
described. 

COMMENT. 

The  text  particularizes  the  functions  of  the  organs  of  sense 
severally. 

The  general  term  for  the  office  of  the  sense  is  dlochan-a* , 
literally  '  seeing,  beholding,  perceiving,  observing.'  According 
to  ancient  authorities  it  is  said  to  comprise  both  the  first  un- 
deliberative,  and  the  second  deliberative  knowledge ;  or,  in 
short,  what  is  understood  by  '  perception-*-.'  The  commentator 
on  the  8.  Pravachana,  who  gives  this  explanation,  observes, 
however,  that  some  consider  deliberative  perception  to  be  the 
property  of  the  mind  only,  whilst  simple  or  tftadetiberative  per- 


t 
swr  nwtf  i  qrrnir  ^wrrnrrT  i   <rere     r- 


(     13?     ) 

fception  is  that  of  the  external  senses  ;  and  this  appears  to  be 
the  doctrine  of  the  Sankhyas :  the  senses  receive  simple  im 
pressions  from  without  of  their  own  nature ;  whether  those  im 
pressions  are  perceived,  depends  upon  the  cooperation  of  the 
internal  sense,  or  mind.  The  term  for  '  function'  is  vritti,  ex 
plained  by  vyapara,  '  active  exercise  or  application  ;'  also  by 
samarthydm,  '  ability,  adequacy ;'  and  phala,  '  fruit,  result.' 
GAURAPADA  has  vishayd,  '  object ;  and  it  may  be  said,  that  the 
function  and  object  of  a  sense  is  the  same  thing,  sight  being 
both  the  function  and  the  object  of  the  eye.  There  is  some 
difficulty  in  translating  some  of  the  terms  satisfactorily,  al 
though  there  is  none  in  understanding  what  is  meant  by  them, 
Thus  rtipa,  '  form,'  or,  as  rendered  in  the  text,  '  colour,'  is  the 
object  and  office  of  the  eye  ;  it  is  therefore  equivalent  both  to 
visible  substance  and  sight.  So  of  sabda,  '  sound ;'  it  is  both 
hearing  and  that  which  is  heard.  Spersa,  '  touch,'  is  the  faculty 
and  the  substance  to  which  contact  may  be  applied.  In  rasa> 
'*  taste,'  and  gandha, '  smell,5  we  have  the  double  equivalents, 
as  both  words  in  English,  as  well  as  in  Sanscrit,  express  both 
the  sense  and  the  sensible  property.  In  English,  '  voice'  is 
a  function ;  but  here,  at  least,  vach*  is  also  the  instrument  of 
speech.  In  the  other  organs  of  action  the  function  is  more 
readily  rendered ;  but  the  difficulty  in  any  case  is  only  that  of 
language,  and  the  sense  is  sufficiently  explicit. 


n 

II 


is 


(     138     ) 
XXIX. 

OF  the  three  (internal  instruments)  the  functions 
are  their  respective  characteristics  :  these  are  peculiar 
to  each.  The  common  function  of  the  three  instru 
ments  is  breath  and  the  rest  of  the  five  vital  airs. 


I 


m- 


ffTTFTT  f  f%:  flfr  JTr^ 

i 


(     139     ) 


f 

BHA'SHYA. 

The  natural  properties,  which  are  the  several  characteristics, 
are  the  respective  characteristics  (as  previously  defined).  As 
certainment  is  intellect  (ver.  23)  :  that  also  is  the  function  of 
intellect.  Consciousness  is  egotism  (ver.  24)  :  consciousness 
is  both  its  characteristic  and  its  function.  Mind  ponders 
(ver.  27)  :  such  is  its  definition  ;  and  reflection,  therefore,  is  the 
function  of  mind.  Of  these  three,  intellect,  egotism,  and  mind, 
their  respective  characteristics  are  their  specific  functions. 
The  functions  of  the  intellectual  organs,  as  before  explained,  are 
also  specific  (the  same  is  the  case  with  the  organs  of  action). 
But  now  their  common  function  is  described.  The  common 
function  of  the  instruments.  —  The  function  of  the  instruments 
in  common  is  breath  and  the  rest  of  the  jive  vital  airs  ;  the  airs 
called  prana,  apana,  samana,  udana,  and  vyana.  These  are 
the  five  airs  which  are  the  common  function  of  all  the  organs 
of  sense.  The  air,  for  instance,  called  prana  is  that  which  is 
perceptible  in  the  mouth  and  nostrils,  and  its  circulation  is  the 
common  function  of  the  thirteen  kinds  (of  instruments)  :  that 
is,  where  there  is  breath,  the  organs  acquire  (are  connected 
with)  soul  (they  become  living).  Breath,  like  a  bird  in  a  cage, 
gives  motion  (vitality)  to  the  whole.  It  is  called  prana 
*  breath'  or  '  life,'  from  '  breathing.'  From  carrying  downwards 
(apanaya/na))  the  air  apana  is  so  named  ;  the  circulation  of 
which,  also,  is  the  common  function  of  the  organs.  Samana  is 
so  named  from  conducting  equally  (samanayana)  the  food,  &c« 
(through  the  frame).  It  is  situated  in  the  central  part  of  the 
body,  and  its  circulation  is  the  common  function  of  the  in 
struments.  The  air  udana  is  denominated  from  ascending, 
or  from  drawing  or  guiding  best  (un-nayana).  It  is  percep 
tible  in  the  space  between  the  navel  and  the  head,  and  the 
circulation  that  it  has  is  the  common  function  of  the  organs. 


(     140     ) 

Lastly,  the  air  by  which  internal  division  and  diffusion  through 
the  whole  body  is  effected  is  called  vyana,  from  its  pervading 
(vyapti)  the  body  like  the  etherial  element.  The  circulation 
of  that,  also,  is  the  common  function  of  the  assemblage  of  the 
organs.  In  this  manner  these  vital  airs,  as  the  common  func 
tion  of  the  instruments,  are  explained ;  that  is,  the  common 
function  of  the  thirteen  kinds  (of  organs). 

COMMENT. 

Besides  the  peculiar  functions  of  the  three  internal  instru 
ments,  mind,  egotism,  and  intellect,  which  as  the  same  with 
their  definitions  have  already  been  specified,  they  have  a  com 
mon  office  in  the  evolution  or  circulation  of  the  internal  aerial 
humours  which  constitute  vitality. 

The  translation  limits  this  community  of  function  to  the 
three  internal  instruments  only,  or  to  intellect,  egotism,  and 
mind ;  and  such  is  the  interpretation  of  VACHASPATI  MISRA  ; 
'  The  five  airs,  or  life,  is  the  function  of  the  three  (internal) 
instruments,  from  being  present  where  they  are,  and  absent 
where  they  are  not*."  So  the  8.  Pravachana  Bh  explains  the 
Sutra  Sdmdnya  karana  vrittit ;  which  is  also  the  phrase  of 
the  Kdrikd,  '  the  function  of  the  three  internal  instruments^. 
GAURAPADA,  however,  understands,  vitality  to  be  the  common 
function  of  all  the  organs,  external  and  internal ;  or  thirteen 
instruments,  ten  of  the  former,  and  three  of  the  latter  kind. 
The  expression  of.  the  text  also  is  general,  and  applicable  either 
to  all  the  organs,  or  to  any  of  them,  as  variously  understood. 
The  two  meanings  are  not  irreconcilable,  although,  strictly 
speaking,  the  sense  followed  in  the  translation  is  most  correct ; 
for  although  vitality  is  the  common  function  of  all  the  senses, 
yet  it  is  essentially  so  of  the  internal  senses  only  ;  it  might 


J  a^ 


(     141     ) 

continue  with  the  privation  of  any  or  all  of  the  external  senses, 
but  could  not,  as  VACHESPATI  states,  subsist  without  the  inter 
nal  organs,  as  it  depends  upon  their  existence  for  its  own.  So 
also  the  8.  Pravachana  Bhdshya  calls  the  vital  airs  not  only 
the  'functions,'  but  '  modifications,  of  the  internal  instruments)].' 
These  vital  airs  are  not  to  be  confounded  with  vdyu,  or 
'  elemental  air,7  for  the  Vedas  are  authority  for  their  different 
origin  :  *  From  him  is  born  vital  air,  mind,  and  all  the  senses, 
heaven,  wind,  light,  water,  and  the  all-sustaining  earth§.'  '  The 
attribution  of  aerial  operation  to  modification  of  the  internal 
instruments  arises  from  their  being  susceptible  of  a  sort  of 
motion  similar  to  that  of  air  and  from  their  being  governed  by 
the  same  deitylf.'  The  vital  airs  are,  in  fact,  the  vital  func 
tions  of  breathing,  circulation,  and  digestion.  That  these 
functions,  resulting  from  organization,  should  be  supposed  to 
partake  of  the  nature  of  aerial  humours,  originates  very  possibly 
from  some  misapprehension  of  the  phenomena  of  breathing, 
flatulence,  and  arterial  pulsation.  The  term  used  by  GAUIIA- 
PADA  to  designate  their  action  occurs  syandana,  *  moving, 
circulation,'  in  the  copy  ;  but  spandana,  '  throbbing,  pulsation/ 
were  perhaps  a  preferable  reading.  The  offices  assigned  to 
them  are  evidently  connected  with  notions  either  of  circulation 
or  a  pulse.  Thus  Prdna  is  breath,  expiration  and  inspiration. 
Apdna  is  flatulence,  crepitus.  Samdna  is  eructation,  supposed 
to  be  essential  to  digestion.  Uddna  is  the  pulsation  of  the 
arteries  in  the  head,  the  neck,  and  temples  ;  and  Vydna  is  the 
pulsation  of  the  rest  of  the  superficial  arteries,  and  occasional 
puffiness  of  external  parts,  indicating  air  in  the  skin.  The 
situations  assigned  to  the  five  airs  by  the  8.  Tatwa  Kaumudi 
are  much  less  consistent  and  intelligible.  Thus  Prdna  is  there 
said  to  be  the  function  of  the  tip  of  the  nostrils,  head,  navel, 


(     142     ) 

and  great  toes  ;  Apfaia,  of  the  back  of  the  neck,  the  back,  the 
feet,  and  the  organs  of  excretion  and  generation  ;  Samdna,  of 
the  heart,  the  navel,  and  the  joints  ;  Uddna,  of  the  head, 
throat,  palate,  forehead,  and  root  of  the  nose  ;  and  Vydna,  of 
the  skin.  With  exception  of  the  last,  it  is  not  easy  to  under 
stand  how  such  absurd  situations  should  have  been  selected. 
The  S.  Bhdshya  may  be  taken  as  the  expression  of  the 
earlier  notions. 


ftfegT  II 
:  II  9  •  li 

^ 

XXX. 

OP  all  four  the  functions  are  instantaneous,  as  well 
as  gradual,  in  regard  to  sensible  objects.  The  func 
tion  of  the  three  (.interior)  is,  in  respect  of  an  unseen 
one,  preceded  by  that  of  the  fourth. 


11  «r- 


f  i 


(     143     ) 


f  g 


f  r 


BHASHYA. 

O/  a^  four  the  functions  are  instantaneous.  —  The  four  are3 
Intellect,  egotism,  and  mind,  in  connection  with  any  one  of  the 
organs  of  sense.  Of  these  four  the  function  is  instantaneous 
in  regard  to  perception,  or  in  the  ascertainment  of  perceptible 
•objects.  Intellect,  egotism,  mind,  and  the  eye  see  form  at  once, 
in  one  instant,  (coming  instantly  to  the  conclusion)  that  is  a 
post.  The  same  three,  with  the  tongue,  at  once  appreciate 
flavour  ;  with  the  nose,  odour  :  and  so  with  the  ear  and  skin. 
Again  ;  their  functions  are  also  gradual  in  regard  to  sensible 
objects.  —  Of  that  aggregate  of  four  the  function  is  also  (oc 
casionally)  gradual  (progressive).  Thus,  a  person  going  along 
a  road  sees  an  object  at  'a  distance,  and  is  in  doubt  whether  it 
be  a  post  or  a  man  :  he  then  observes  some  characteristic 
marks  upon  it,  or  a  bird  perched  there  ;  and  doubt  being  thus 
dissipated  by  the  reflection  of  the  mind,  the  understanding 
discriminates  that  it  is  a  post  ;  and  thence  egotism  inter 
poses,  for  the  sake  of  certainty,  as,  verily  (or,  I  am  certain) 
it  is  a  post.  In  this  way  the  functions  of  intellect,  egotism, 
mind,  and  eye  are  (successively)  discharged.  And  as  in  the 
case  of  a  visible  object,  so  it  is  as  to  sound  and  the  rest  of  the 
objects  of  perception. 

But  in  respect  of  an  unseen  one,  the  functions  of  the  three 
are  preceded  by  that  of  the  fourth.—  Unseen  implies  time  past, 


(     144     ) 

or  future :  for  instance,  in  respect  to  '  form,'  the  function  of  thd 
eye  has  preceded  that  of  intellect,  egotism,  and  mind,  as  has 
that  of  the  skin  in  respect  to  touch  ;  of  the  nose  in  regard  to 
smell ;  of  the  ear  iti  relation  to  sound  ;  and  of  the  tongue  in 
respect  to  taste.  The  functions  of  intellect,  egotism^  and  mind 
are  preceded  in  order  by  those  of  tho  senses  in  regard  to  time 
future  or  past  whilst  in  regard  to  time  present  they  may  be 
either  instantaneous  or  gradual.  Further — 

COMMENT. 

The  consentaneous  or  successive  operation  of  the  three  in 
ternal  and  any  one  ot  the  external  organs  in  the  formation  of 
ideas  is  here  described. 

The  cooperation  of  the  three  internal  organs  and  any  organ 
of  sense  may  be  instantaneous  (yuga-pat).  like  a  flash  of  lightn 
ing,  or  as  at  the  sight  of  a  tiger,  when  the  recognition  of  him, 
knowledge  of  his  ferocity,  conclusion  of  personal  peril,  and 
determination  to  try  to  escape  are  the  business  of  one  and  the 
same  moment :  or  their  operation  may  be  gradual  or  succes 
sive  (kramasas),  allowing  leisure,  for  instance,  for  the  eye  to 
see,  for  the  mind  to  consider,  for  egotism  to  apply,  and  for 
intellect  to  conclude.  GTAURAPADA  rather  disarranges  the  order 
of  succession,  and  places  the  function  of  egotism  last,  assigning 
to  it  the  office  of  belief  or  conviction.  VACHESPATI'S  illu 
stration  is  more  regular :  '  Thus,  the  ear  hears  the  twang 
of  a  bowstring  ;  mind  reflects  that  this  must  be  for  the  flight 
of  an  arrow  ;  egotism  says,  It  is  aimed  at  me  ;  and  intellect 
determines,  I  must  run  away*.'  Whenever  the  object  is  un 
seen,  adristita,  not  present,  whether  it  be  past  or  be  to  come, 
there  must  have  been  a  prior  perception  of  it ;  that  is,  as  the 
text  is  explained  by  the  commentators,  there  must  have  been 
a  prior  perception  of  it  by  an  organ  of  sense.  The  expression 


(    145    ) 

of  the  text,  tat  purviJcd  vritti,  '  their  prior  function,9  might  be 
thought  to  refer  to  a  prior  notion  gained  by  the  conjoint  opera 
tion  of  the  internal  and  external  organs  at  some  former  period* 
This,  however,  would  be  recollection,  the  seat  of  which,  as 
well  as  of  judgment  or  inference,  is  in  buddhi,  or  '  intellect,' 
alone  ;  as  in  the  Pdtanjala  Sutra,  '  Proof,  refutation,  delibera 
tion,  sleep,  memory;  these  are  said  to  be  the  functions  of 
intellect*.'  The  prior  operation,  therefore,  is  merely  percep 
tion  or  observation  by  the  external  sense,  alockanam  (see  ver. 
28),  conveying  simple  ideas  to  the  mind.  Taking,  then,  this 
prior  simple  idea  acquired  through  an  external  organ,  any  fur 
ther  consideration  of  it  is  the  gradual  operation  of  the  three 
internal  instruments.  Where  the  object  is  present,  conviction 
may  be  either  momentary  or  successive  :  the  Sankhyas  main 
taining  the  possibility  of  consentaneous  operation  of  the  organs 
of  sense  and  mind,  egotism  and  intellect,  in  opposition  to  the 
doctrine  of  the  Vaiseshikas,  that  the  formation  of  ideas  is  in 
all  cases  a  graduated  process  :  Where  the  object  is  absent,  the 
idea  must  be  formed  by  the  internal  organs  so  far  in  successive 
order  that  they  must  be  consequent  upon  a  former  impression 
received  by  an  external  sense ;  but  as  concerns  themselves, 
their  action  may  be  either  simultaneous  or  successive^.  The 
illustration  which  occurs  in  the  Bhdskya  and  other  commen 
taries,  of  the  course  of  reasoning  by  which  the  nature  of  a 
distant  object  is  determined,  is  something  like  that  with  which 
in  the  Philebus,  the  formation  of  opinion  is  elucidated. 


RT%<TCF%  q^qnf fTf prf  |T%  II 

\\ 


m  i 
i  t  3?^: 


19 


(     146     ) 
XXXI. 

THE  instruments  perform  their  respective  functions, 
incited  by  mutual  invitation.  The  soul's  purpose  is 
the  motive  :  an  instrument  is  wrought  by  none. 

i  ff%  m~ 


BHASHYA. 

Swam  is  repeated,  implying  '  several  order  :'  that  is,  intellect, 
egotism,  mind,  perform  their  respective  functions,  the  incite 
ment  to  which  is  mutual  invitation.  Akuta  implies  '  respect 
and  alertness.'  They  do  this  for  the  accomplishment  of  the 
purpose  of  soul.  Egotism  and  the  rest  effecting  it  through 
intellect  :  that  is,  intellect,  knowing  the  wishes  of  egotism  and 
the  rest,  proceeds  to  its  own  peculiar  function.  If  it  be  asked, 
why  it  does  so  1  the  answer  is,  the  purpose  of  the  soul  is  the. 
'motive.  Soul's  purpose  is  to  be  fulfilled  :  for  this  object  the 
activity  of  the  qualities  occurs,  and  thence  these  instruments 
make  manifest  the  object  of  the  soul.  How  is  it  that  (being 
devoid  of  intelligence)  they  act  ?  They  act  of  their  own  accord. 
An  instrument  can  be  wrought  by  none.  —  The  purpose  of  soul 
alone  causes  them  to  act  :  this  is  the  meaning  of  the  sentence  : 


(     147     ) 

an  instrument  is  not  made — not  roused — to  act  by  any  human 
superior. 

It  is  next  specified  how  many  (instruments)  intellect  and 
the  rest  are, 

COMMENT- 

The  circumstances  that  induce  the  internal  and  external 
organs  to  perform  their  respective  functions  are  said  to  be 
mutual  incitement,  and  spontaneous  disposition  to  effect  tha 
objects  of  soul. 

The  organs  of  sense  are  said  to  act  by  mutual  invitation  or 
incitement.  Their  cooperation  in  the  discharge  of  their  respec 
tive  functions  is  compared  to  that  of  different  soldiers  in  an 
army,  all  engaged  in  a  common  assault,  but  of  whom  one 
agrees  to  take  a  spear,  another  a  mace,  another  a  bow.  It  is 
objected,  that  the  organs  being  declared  non-sentient,  incapable 
of  intelligence,  cannot  be  supposed  to  feel,  much  less  to  know, 
any  mutual  design  or  wish,  dkuta*  or  abhiprdya'f ;  and  the 
terms  are  explained  to  signify  the  insensible  influence  which 
the  activity  of  one  exerts  upon  that  of  another,  if  there  be  no 
impediment  in  the  way  ;  a  sort  of  sympathetic  or  consentane 
ous  action.  *  Akrtta  here  means  incitement  to  activity ;  that 
is,  at  the  time  when  one  organ  is  in  action,  the  activity  of 
another,  if  no  obstruction  hinder  itj.'  *  With  this  view  the 
several  instruments  are  directed  by  a  presiding  power,  which 
may  be  termed  the  adaptation  of  the  mutual  fitness  of  their 
natures) (.'  The  motive  for  this  sympathetic  action  is  the  pur 
pose  of  soul,  fruition  or  liberation  ;  which  purpose  they  of  their 
own  accord,  but  unconsciously,  operate  to  fulfil,  in  the  same 
way  as  the  unconscious  breast  spontaneously  secretes  milk  for 


r  ?r%- 

rorcsRSRwr  ^  <w  ^raflt  *n*$s^rcqrft  i 
famr 


(     148     ) 

the  nourishment  of  the  infant ;  according  to  the  Sutra,  '  As  the 
cow  for  the  calf:'  that  is,  as  the  milk  of  the  cow  of  its  own 
accord  exudes  for  the  use  of  the  calf,  and  awaits  not  the  effort 
of  another,  so  the  organs  of  their  own  accord  perform  their 
office  for  the  sake  of  their  master,  soul*.  S.  Pravachana  Eh. 
They  must  act  of  their  own  nature  ;  it  is  not  in  the  power  of 
any  one  to  compel  them  to  act.  GAURAPADA'S  expression  is, 
'  Not  by  any  sovereign  manf  :'  perhaps  some  particle,  such  as 
V&,  may  have  been  omitted  in  the  copy,  making  the  sense, 
'  Neither  by  a  deity  nor  a  mortal ;'  or  the  phrase  may  imply, 
that  they  are  not  compelled  to  action  even  by  soul,  as  a  divi 
nity  ;  but  fulfil  soul's  purposes  through  an  innate  property, 
undirected  by  any  external  agent, 


n 

M  ^    II 
XXXII. 

INSTRUMENT  is  of  thirteen  sorts.  It  compasses,  main 
tains  and  manifests  :  what  is  to  be  done  by  it  is  ten 
fold,  to  be  compassed,  to  be  maintained,  to  be 
manifested. 


^tr.  ^tfft  ^frt 

'.  \     t 


(     149     ) 


BHASHYA. 

Instrument.  —  Intellect  and  the  rest  are  three  ;  the  intellec 
tual  organs  are  five  ;  the  organs  of  action  are  five  :  all  together 
thirteen.  What  this  performs  is  next  declared  :  it  compasses, 
maintains,  and  manifests  ;  that  is,  the  organs  of  action  com 
pass  and  maintain  ;  those  of  perception  manifest.  How  many 
kinds  of  action  there  are  is  next  specified.  Its  action,  that 
which  is  to  be  done  by  it,  is  tenfold  ;  of  ten  kinds,  as  hearing, 
touch,  &c.  by  the  instruments  of  perception  ;  speech  and  the 
rest  by  those  of  action  :  and  thus  by  the  former,  manifestation, 
and  by  the  latter,  comprehension  and  support,  are  effected. 

COMMENT. 

The  sense  of  the  term  karana,  '  instrument'  or  '  organ/  is 
here  explained,  as  a  generic  denomination  for  the  external  and 
internal  organs. 

The  instruments  or  organs  are  thirteen  ;  that  is,  three  inter 
nal,  intellect,  egotism,  and  mind  ;  and  ten  external,  or  the 
organs  of  sensation  and  action.  Their  respective  functions  as 
organs  have  been  explained  :  their  effects  as  instruments  are 
classed  under  three  heads,  '  compassing/  dharana*;  '  maintain 
ing/  dhdrana'f  ;  and  '  manifesting/  prakdsana]..  The  first 
which  means,  literally,  '  taking,  seizing/  and  rendered  in  the 
text  '  compassing/  signifies  '  the  application  of  an  organ  to  the 


(     150     ) 

cbject  to  which  it  is  adapted*/  and  is  the  especial  function  of 
the  organs  or  instruments  of  action.  *  Maintaining/  dhdrana* 
Supporting,  upholding/  is,  according  to  the  S.  Bhdshya,  also  the 
office  of  the  instruments  of  action  ;  but  the  authors  of  the  S. 
Tatwa  Kaumudi  and  S.  Chandrikd  assign  it  to  the  three 
internal  instruments,  intellect,  egotism,  and  mind,  as  being  es 
pecially  the  supporters  of  vitality.  '  Buddhi,  ahankdra,  and 
mind  uphold,  through  their  function  being  designated  as  the 
production  of  the  vital  airs,  &c.f  The  elder  commentator 
could  not,  of  course,  admit  this  doctrine  ;  for  we  have  seen  (ver. 
29)  that,  according  to  him,  all  the  senses  or  instruments  contri 
bute  to  support  the  vital  principle.  All  the  Scholiasts  agree  in 
attributing  '  manifestation,  enlightening/  prakdsana,  to  the 
intellectual  organs.  The  objects  to  be  effected  by  the  instru 
ments  are  tenfold,  reducible  to  the  same  three  classes  :  speech, 
manipulation,  walking,  excretion,  and  generation  are  to  be 
compassed,  to  be  effected,  dhdrya%,  by  the  actual  application 
of  the  several  organs :  sound,  taste,  touch,  smell,  form  to  be 
manifested,  to  be  made  sensible,  prakdsya  :  and  all  of  them, 
together  with  the  vital  airs,  constituting  in  fact  animal  life,  are 
to  be  dhdryya\\t  upheld  or  maintained. 


II  ^  II 
XXXIII. 

INTERNAL  instruments  are  three  ;  external  ten,  to 
make  known  objects  to  those  three.  The  external 
organs  minister  at  time  present :  the  internal  do  so  at 
any  time. 

t 
J  afrift:  i  H 


(     151     ) 


< 


f^lf  f 


frtf 


BHA'SHYA. 

..' 

Internal  instruments.  —  Intellect,  egotism,  and  mind  are 
three,  from  the  difference  between  intellect  and  the  others, 
External  ten.  —  The  five  organs  of  perception  and  five  of  action 
are  the  ten  external  instruments,  and  they  are  to  make  known 
objects  for  the  fruition  of  intellect,  egotism,  and  mind.  Time 
present  :  that  is,  the  ear  hears  a  present  sound,  not  one  that  is 
past,  nor  one  that  is  to  come  :  the  eye  sees  present  form,  not 
that  which  is  past,  nor  that  which  is  future  :  the  skin  touches 
present  substance  :  the  tongue  tastes  present  flavour  :  the  nose 


(    152    ) 

smells  present  odours,  nor  past  nor  future.  It  is  the  same  with 
the  organs  of  action :  the  voice  articulates  actual,  not  past  nor" 
future  words  :  the  hand  takes  hold  of  a  present  water-pot,  not 
one  that  has  been  or  is  to  be :  the  feet  traverse  a  present,  not 
a  past  nor  a  future  walk  :  and  the  organs  of  excretion  and 
generation  perform  present,  not  past  nor  future  offices  Exter 
nal  organs,  therefore,  minister  at  time  present.  The  internal 
ones  do  so  for  any  time. — Intellect,  egdfism,  and  mind  regard 
objects  of  any  period  :  thus  intellect  forms  an  idea,  not  only 
of  a  present  water-jar,  but  of  one  that  has  been  or  will  be 
made :  so  egotism  exercises  consciousness  of  an  object  past, 
present,  or  future  :  and  mind  considers  the  past  and  future,  as 
well  as  the  present.  Internal  instrument  is,  therefore,  for 
all  times. 

It  is  next  explained  which  of  these  instruments  apprehends 
specific,  and  which  unspecific  objects. 

COMMENT- 

The  difference  between  the  functions  of  the  external  and 
internal  organs,  as  concerns  time,  is  here  explained :  the  action 
of  the  former  being  confined  to  time  present ;  that  of  the  latter 
comprehending  also  the  past  and  the  future. 

Internal  instrument  is  so  denominated  from  operating  within 
the  body* ;  the  external  from  being  applied  to  exterior  objects 
making  them  known  to  the  internal  organization.  The  term 
vishaya,  i  object/  is  also  explained  by  bJiogya,  '  that  which  is 
to  be  enjoyed;'  and  vydpara,  'exercise;'  and  vishaydkhya^ 
'  that  which  declares  or  makes  objects  known.'  It  is  also 
defined  as  '  that  which  occasions  the  exercise  of  the  functions 
of  the  three  internal  instruments"!*.'  External  sensation  is 
necessarily  confined  to  present  objects,  but  mind,  conscious 
ness,  and  intellect  apprehend  from  present  objects  those  which 


(     153     ) 

have  past,  or  are  to  come ;  as  past  rain  from  the  swelling 
of  a  river ;  and  future  rain,  in  the  absence  of  any  other 
prognostic,  from  the  destruction  of  the  eggs  of  the  ants*. 
This  last  phrase  •  alludes  probably  to  the  well  known  destruc 
tion  of  various  species  of  the  ant  tribe,  which  in  the  East 
takes  place  immediately  before  the  setting  in  of  the  rainy 
season :  they  then  take  wing,  and  fly  abroad  in  vast  multi 
tudes,  of  which  few  survive  ;  according  to  the  Hindustani 
proverb,  ^f&  j*  y  ^5*  ^T  ^^  &  ^  \£*  *¥$  When  the 
ants  are  about  to  die,  their  wings  come  forth.'  The  expres 
sion  " ants'  eggs,"  pipttikanda,  is,  however,  rather  question 
able.  It  occurs  in  both  copies  of  the  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi. 


\\ 


xxxiv. 

AMONG  these  organs  the  five  intellectual  concern 
objects  specific  and  unspecific.  Speech  concerns  sound. 
The  rest  regard  all  five  objects. 


sfsftra  i 

20 


(     154     ) 


BHASHYA. 

The  intellectual  organs  concern  specific  objects  :  they  ap 
prehend  objects  which  have  specific  properties.  The  intellec 
tual  organs  of  men  distinguish  sound,  touch,  form,  taste,  smell, 
along  with  objects  of  indifference,  pleasure  and  pain.  The 
organs  of  the  gods  apprehend  objects  which  have  no  specific 
distinctions.  So,  amongst  the  five  organs  of  action,  speech 
concerns  sound.  Speech,  whether  of  gods  or  of  men,  articu 
lates  words,  recites  verses,  and  the  like  ;  and  this  instrument 
is  the  same  in  both  orders  of  beings.  The  rest  —  all  except 
speech  ;  the  hand,  the  foot,  and  the  organs  of  excretion  and 
generation  —  regard  all  Jive  objects  :  that  is,  sound  and  the 
other  four  objects  of  perception  belong  to  all  the  other  organs  ; 
for  there  may  be  sound,  touch,  form,  taste,  and  smell  in  the 
hands  ;  the  foot  treads  upon  the  earth,  of  which  sound  and  the 
rest  may  be  characteristics  ;  the  excretory  organ  separates 
that  in  which  the  five  objects  abide;  and  the  generating 
organs  produce  the  secretion  which  is  equally  characterised 
by  the  five  organs  of  sense. 

COMMENT. 

Another  distinction  is  made  in  the  functions  of  the  external 
instruments,  as  they  regard  objects  with  or  without  specific 
characteristics. 

Objects  arc  distinguished  as  having  specific  characters  or 
effects,  savise'sha*  ,  and  as  devoid  of  them,  nirviseslia^  and  the 


(     155     ) 

instruments  are  discriminated  according  to  their  capability  of 
conveying  notions  of  either  the  organs  of  sense  in  mortals 
can  apprehend  only  those  objects  which  have  specific  charac 
ters  ;  either  sensible,  as  colour,  form,  taste,  &c. ;  or  moral,  as 
pleasant,  painful,  or  indifferent.  The  faculties  of  the  gods  and 
of  sages  can  apprehend  objects  without  such  characteristic 
properties,  and  which  exercise  no  moral  effect,  producing 
neither  pleasure,  pain,  nor  indifference.  The  S.  Tatwa  Kau- 
mudi  identifies  '  specific'  with  '  gross  corporeal'  objects*,  and 
'  unspecific'  with  'subtile  and  redimental'  objects!  ;  the  latter 
of  which  are  cognizable  alone  by  the  organs  of  holy  men  and 
deitiesj.  This  distinction  applies  to  all  the  external  organs, 
except  the  voice,  which  in  men,  saints,  and  gods  can  articulate 
sensible,  specific,  or  corporeal  words  alone  ;  for  it  is  the  organ 
of  the  voice  that  is  the  origin  of  speech.  Speech  cannot,  like 
sound,  taste,  &c.,  originate  with  any  thing  gross  or  subtilo 
exterior  to  the  speaker ;  it  must  proceed  from  him,  through  the 
agency  of  a  gross  material  instrument,  and  must  therefore  be 
gross  or  sensible  itself.  Gross  corporeal  mechanism  cannot  bo 
the  source  of  a  subtile  product,  and  therefore  with  every  order 
of  beings  speech  must  be  specific.  e  The  rest,'  seskdni  refer 
ring  to  the  organ  of  speech,  implies  the  other  organs  of  action, 
all  of  which  may  regard  the  five  objects  of  perception  ;  that  is, 
they  may  comprehend  them  all ;  as  '  from  the  combination  (or 
capability)  of  sound,  touch,  colour,  smell,  taste,  in  objects  like 
a  water-jar  and  others,  which  may  be  compassed  or  taken  hold 
of  by  the  hand,  &c,||'  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi. 


f  RII     ?T*?TFf  II  3  H  II 


<2\ 

r4^f<m  ^  \ 
wmw%ww\ 


(     156     ) 
XXXV. 

SINCE  intellect,  with  the  (other  two)  internal  instru 
ments,  adverts  to  every  object,  therefore  those  threo 
instruments  are  warders  and  the  rest  are  gates. 


BHASHYA. 

With  the  internal  ;  that  is,  intellect,  with  egotism  and  mind. 
Adverts  to  ;  takes,  apprehends  ;  that  is,  apprehends  sound  and 
the  rest  at  all  three  seasons.  Therefore  these  three  are  ward 
ers,  and  the  rest  are  gates.  —  The  rest  ;  the  other  instruments  ; 
instruments  being  understood.  Further.  — 

COMMENT- 

A  metaphor  is  employed  to  illustrate  the  functions  of  the 
external  and  internal  instruments. 

The  internal  instruments  are  compared  to  warders,  door 
keepers,  or  to  persons  having  charge  of  a  door  or  gate  ;  not 
opening  and  closing  it  merely,  but  as  taking  note  of  all  that 
enter  :  the  external  senses  being  the  doors  or  gateways  by 
which  the  objects  of  perception  gain  admission. 


(     157     ) 
XXXVI. 

THESE  characteristically  differing  from  each  other, 
and  variously  affected  by  qualities,  present  to  the 
intellect  the  soul's  whole  purpose,  enlightening  it  as 
a  lamp. 


:  i 


f- 

f  r^nt 


BHASHYA, 

These,  which  are  called  instruments  :  they  variously  affected 
by  qualities.  How  affected?  Like  a  lamp]  exhibiting  objects 
like  a  lamp.  Characteristically  differing  ;  dissimilar,  having 
different  objects  ;  that  is  the  sense.  Objects  of  the  qualities 
is  intended.  Variously  affected  by  qualities;  produced  or 
proceeding  from  qualities.  Soul's  whole  purpose.  —  The  in 
struments  of  perception  and  action,  egotism  and  mind,  having 
illustrated  the  object  of  soul  (as  attainable)  through  each  res 
pectively,  present  it  to  the  intellect,  place  it  in  the  intellect  ; 
and  consequently  soul  obtains  pleasure  and  the  rest  ;  that  is, 
every  object  seated  in  intellect.  Further  — 

COMMENT- 

The  process  by  which  ideas  are  conveyed  to  soul  is  her* 
described, 


(     158     ) 

Intellect  (buddhi  or  mahat)  is  the  instrument  or  organ 
which  is  the  medium  between  the  other  instruments  or  organs 
and  soul  ;  that  is,  all  ideas  derived  from  sensation,  reflection, 
or  consciousness  must  be  deposited  in  the  chief  or  great  in 
strument,  intellect  or  understanding,  before  they  can  be  made 
known  to  soul,  for  whose  use  and  advantage  alone  they  have 
been  assembled.  They  are  variously  affected  by  tlie  quali 
ties.  They  convey  impressions  or  ideas,  with  the  properties 
or  effects  of  pleasure,  pain,  and  indifference,  accordingly  as 
they  are  influenced  by  the  qualities  of  goodness,  foulness, 
and  darkness.  In  fact  these  organs  are  identified  with 
the  qualities  by  all  the  commentators.  GAURAPADA  says. 
f  they  proceed  or  are  born  from  them*:'  and  in  the  S. 
Tatwa  Kaumudi  and  8.  Chandrikd  they  are  called  also 
'  products  or  modifications  and  varieties  of  the  qualities  ;'  thus 
the  former  has,  c  The  external  organs,  mind,  and  egotism  are 
affections  of  qualities  ;  they  are  changes  of  condition  of  the 
qualities  goodness,  foulness,  and  darknessf  :'  the  latter,  '  These 
affections  of  the  qualities  are  kinds  (or  varieties)  of  themj' 
It  might  have  been  preferable,  therefore,  to  have  rendered 
the  expression  yunavise'sha,  '  modifications  or  affections  of  the 
qualities.' 

The  progressive  communication  of  impression  to  soul  is  thus 
illustrated  by  VACHESPATI  :  '  As  the  head  men  of  a  village  collect 
the  taxes  from  the  villagers,  and  pay  them  to  the  governor  of  the 
district  ;  as  the  local  governor  pays  the  amount  to  the  minister  . 
and  the  minister  receives  it  for  the  use  of  the  king  ;  so  mind, 
having  received  ideas  from  the  external  organs,  transfers  them 
to  egotism  ;  and  egotism  delivers  them  to  intellect,  which  is 
the  general  superintendent,  and  takes  charge  of  them  for  the 
use  of  the  sovereign,  soul.  The  same  idea  is  more  concisely 
expressed  in  the  $.  Pravacliana  Bit.  '•  Sutra  :  In  the  com- 


:   T<J[Rt 


(     159     ) 

hion  employment  of  the  organs  the  chiefship  belongs  to  buddhi 
as  in  the  world.  Comment :  As  the  function  of  the  organs 
is  in  common,  through  subservience  to  the  purposes  of  soul^ 
so  the  most  important  is  that  of  intelligence ;  like  the  office 
of  the  prime  minister  amongst  the  chiefs  of  villages  and  the 
rest,  who  arc  all  alike  engaged  in  the  service  of  the  king*/ 
The  cooperation  of  opposites  for  a  common  purpose  has  been 
once  before  (p.  54)  compared  to  the  light  of  a  lamp,  derived 
from  the  combination  of  oil,  cotton,  and  flame, 


.* «\__* fv 

N3 

^    rv  ^. 


Sfo  II 


XXXVII. 

SINCE  it  is  intellect  which  accomplishes  soul's  frui* 
tion  of  all  which  is  to  be  enjoyed,  it  is  that,  again, 
which  discriminates  the  subtile  difference  between  tho 
chief  principle  fpradhanaj  and  soul, 


?rfTfcf 


srr^Nf 


(     160     ) 


5 


?RL 

BHASHYA, 

All:  whatever  comes  within  the  reach  of  the  organs,  and  in 
all  three  (past,  present,  and  future)  periods.  Fruition  ;  several 
or  respective  enjoyment,  through  the  instrumentality  of  the 
organs  of  perception  and  action,  whether  in  gods,  men,  or 
animals.  The  internal  instrument  intellect  accomplishes, 
completes  or  effects  :  consequently  it  is  that,  again,  which 
discriminates,  makes  a  distinction  between  the  objects  of  na 
ture  and  soul,  (or  establishes)  their  difference  or  severally* 
Subtle  ;  not  to  be  apprehended  by  those  who  have  not  practised 
religious  austerities,  (or  such  distinctions)  as,  this  is  nature, 
the  equipoised  condition  of  the  three  qualities,  goodness,  foul- 
nesSj  and  darkness  ;  this  is  intellect  ;  this  is  egotism  ;  these  are 
the  five  subtile  rudiments  ;  these  the  eleven  organs  ;  these  the 
five  gross  elements  ;  and  this,  which  is  different  from  them  all, 
is  soul.  He  whose  intellect  explains  all  this  obtains  liberation. 

It  was  said  above  (ver.  34)  that  "objects  are  specific  and 
Unspecific  :3>  which  these  are  respectively  is  next  described, 

COMMENT- 

The  function  of  discriminating  between.  soul  and  nature  is 
here  also  assigned  to  intellect. 

The  immediate  contiguity  and  communication  of  intellect 
With  soul,  as  that  of  a  prime  minister  and  a  sovereign,  enables 
it  to  appreciate  the  latter  ;  whilst  its  being  the  medium  of 
conveyance  to  external  objects  familiarizes  it  with  them  also  ; 
&nd  thus  it  is  enabled  to  distinguish  between  both  :  cr  as  ex 
plained  in  the  Ohandrikd,  this  discrimination  is  the  neces 
sary  consequence  of  its  relative  function  ;  for  as  it  conveys 
ideas  of  pleasure  or  pain  to  soul,  and  is  in  this  way  the  cause 


(     161     ) 

of  its  fruition,  it  is  subservient  to  another,  to  something 
different  nature  from  its  own ;  and  the  knowledge  of  this  is 
discrimination  between  nature  and  soul.  '  All,  sound  and  the 
rest,  with  which  the  preposition  pratl  (implying  several ty)  is 
to  be  connected.  The  fruition  is  that  of  soul.  As  intellect 
accomplishes  this,  consequently  although  it  be  as  it  were  a 
chief  principle,  yet  it  is  for  another's  use,  not  its  own  ;  and  as 
hence  arises  the  purpose  of  liberation,  this  sense  is  accordingly 
intended  to  be  expressed  in  the  phrase,  It  Is  that  ayain  ivhich 
discriminates,  &c.*' 


XXXVIII. 


THE  elementary  particles  are  unspecific  :  from  these 
five  proceed  the  five  elements,  which  are  termed  speci 
fic  ;  for  they  are  soothing,  terrific,  or  stupifying. 


* 


21 


(     1G2     ) 

^iTft 
rawn  *rcr 


^rr 


BHA'SHYA. 

The  five  subtile  elements,  which  are  produced  from  egotism, 
or  the  rudiments  sound,  touch  (substance),  form  flavour,  and 
odour,  are  said  to  be  unspecific  ;  they  are  the  objects  (of  per 
ception)  to  the  gods,  characterised  by  pleasure,  producing 
neither  pain  nor  stupefaction.  From  these  five  proceed  the  five 
elements,  called  earth,  water,  fire,  air,  and  ether.  These  are 
said  to  be  specific.  From  the  rudiment  smell,  earth  proceeds  ; 
from  the  rudiment  flavour,  water  ;  from  form  (colour),  fire  ; 
from  touch  (substance),  air;  and  from  the  rudiment  sound  ; 
proceeds  ether.  These  gross  elements  are  termed  specific. 
They  are  the  objects  of  the  senses  of  men,  and  are  soothing, 
causing  pleasure  ;  terrific,  causing  pain  ;  and  stupifying, 
causing  insensibility  ;  as  the  ethereal  element  may  give  delight 
to  one  person  coming  forth  at  once  from  within  a  house,  so  the 
same  may  be  the  source  of  pain  to  one  affected  by  cold,  or  heat, 
or  wind,  or  rain  ;  and  if  he  be  going  along  a  road  leading 
through  a  forest,  in  which  he  loses  his  way,  it  may  then,  from 
the  perplexity  of  space,  occasion  stupefaction  :  so  the  air  (or 
wind)  is  agreeable  to  a  person  oppressed  by  heat,  disagreeablo 
to  one  feeling  cold  ;  and  when  tempestuous  and  loaded  with 
clouds  of  sand  and  dust  it  is  stupifying.  The  same  may  be 
said  of  fire  and  the  rest,  There  are  other  specific  varieties. 


(     163     ) 

COMMENT. 

It  was  intimated  in  vcr.  34,  that  objects  were  both  specific 
and  imspecific  ;  and  it  is  here  explained,  that  by  the  former  is 
meant  the  various  property  which  the  same  element  possesses 
at  different  times,  and  under  different  circumstances,  in  regard 
to  mortals  ;  and  by  the  latter,  the  uniform  and  unvaried  opera 
tion  of  the  subtile  rudiments  in  respect  to  the  gods. 

The  precise  nature  of  the  rudimental  elements  is  not  very 
intelligible,  according  to  their  usual  identification  with  what 
we  are  accustomed  to  consider  as  qualities,  not  substances,  or 
sound,  tangibility,  form  or  colour,  flavour.,  and  odour ;  mbda, 
sparsa,  rupa,  rasa,  and  yandha.  It  seems,  however,  that  we 
should  regard  the  rudimental  elements  as  the  imperceptible 
subjects  of  these  qualities,  from  which  the  grosser  and  visible 
elements,  ether,  air,  light,  water,  and  earth,  originate.  So 
VUNANA  BHIKSHU  calls  them  '  subtile  substances,  the  elements 
which  are  the  holders  (sustainers  or  subjects)  of  the  species  of 
sound,  touch,  colour,  taste,  and  smell ;  but  in  Avhich,  as  a  genus, 
the  three  species  of  pleasurable,  painful,  and  indifferent  do  not 
occur  :  they  arc  not  varieties  of  the  gross  elements,  but  in  each 
respectively  the  elementary  property  exclusively  resides 
whence  they  are  said  to  be  rudiments.  In  those  elements 
that  elementary  property  resides  alone  (without  being  diversi 
fied,  as  agreeable,  &c,) ;  and  as  there  is  nc  distinction  between  a 
property  and  its  subject,  that  which  is  a  rudimental  substance  is 
called  a  rudiment,  tan  indtra ;  the  existence  of  which  as  a  cause 
is  inferred  from  that  of  the  gross  element  as  an  effect*.'  Tan 
mdtra  is  a  compound  of  tad,  '  that,'  and  rtidtra,  '  alone  ;'  im 
plying,  that  in  which  its  own  peculiar  property  resides,  without 


(    164    ) 

ciny  change  or  variety :  so  VACHESPATI  explains  the  text, 
c  Sound  and  the  rest ;  the  subtile  rudiments ;  for  the  proper* 
ties  of  agreeable,  &c.  do  not  belong  to  them,  they  have  no 
quality  which  is  fit  for  (mortal)  fruition.  This  is  the  meaning 
of  the  word  matra*.1 — c  These  rudiments,  though  not  appre 
ciable  by  human  sense,  are  said  to  be  sensible  to  sages  and 
to  gods,  producing  to  them  pleasure  only,  from  the  pre 
dominance  with  them  of  the  quality  of  goodness,  and  con 
sequently  of  happinessf.' 

The  notion  of  something  more  subtile  than  the  elements 
was  not  unknown  to  early  Grecian  philosophy,  and  Empedocles 
taught  that  they  were  compounded  of  some  more  minute 
matter,  or  of  elements  of  the  elements,  crroiyeia  o-roixeiovt 
Plutarch  and  Stobseus,  according  to  Cudworth,  understand  by 
these  rudiments  of  the  elements  primary  atoms  ;  but  it  may 
be  doubted  if  they  are  to  be  so  understood,  for,  according  to 
Aristotle,  Empedocles  held  that  there  were  four  elements,  out 
of  which  all  bodies  were  composed,  and  which  were  not 
mutually  transmutable.  In  fact  the  doctrine  of  Empedocles, 
which  was  that  of  the  school  of  Pythagoras,  offers  another 
analogy  to  the  Indian,  in  the  assertion,  not  of  four,  but  of  five 
elements,  according  to  Plutarch,  or  the  author  De  placitis  phi- 
losopliorum,  1.  II.  c.  6,  or  ether,  fire,  earth,  water,  and  air.  In 
tellect.  Syst.  I.  97.  That  Empedocles  was  not  of  the  atomic 
school  is  evident  from  Lucretius,  who  specifies  him  as  one  of 
those  who  greatly  misunderstood  the  principles  of  things  : 

Principles  tanien  in  rerum  fecere  minus 

Et  graviter  niagnci  magno  cecidere  ibi  casu.         I,  741--2. 

It  may  be  suspected  that  something  like   the  Hindu   notion 
that  the  senses,  or  their  faculties,  and  the  gross   elements,  par- 


? fit 


take  of  a  common  nature,  is  expressed  in  the  celebrated, 
though  otherwise  not  very  intelligible  verses  of  the  same 
philosopher : 

Fa/0  IJLGV  yap  yjuav  o7ru>7ra/UL€i>,  vSan 

A.i6epi  8'  aiOcpa  Slav,  arup  irvpl  irup  u 
By  the   earthy   element   we   perceive  earth ;  by  the  watery, 
water ;  the  air  of  heaven  by  the  aerial  element ;    and  devour- 
ing  fire  by  the  element  of  fire.' 

As  opposed  to  the  simple  unvaried  rudiments,  the  derivative 
gross  elements,  which  are  sensible  to  men  and  animals,  are 
susceptible  of  three  qualities  ;  they  may  have  specific  or  varied 
effects,  may  be  diversified  as  species ;  they  are  said,  accord 
ingly,  to  be  soothing  or  agreeable*,  terrific  or  disagreeablefi 
and  stupifying,  bewildering^ ;  that  is,  they  may  be  either  of 
these,  according  to  the  different  circumstances  in  which  the 
influence  of  one  or  other  of  the  three  qualities  predominates. 
When  goodness  prevails,  whether  it  be  in  themselves  or  in  the 
object  affected,  they  are  sdnta, '  tranquil  or  pleasant ;'  when 
foulness  they  are  yhora,  (  frightful,  disagreeable ;'  and  when 
darkness  prevails,  they  are  '  perplexing/  murha :  as  VACHES- 
PATI  ; '  In  the  gross  elements,  ether  and  the  rest,  some,  through 
the  predominance  of  goodness,  are  soothing,  pleasant,  agree 
able,  light ;  some,  through  the  prevalence  of  foulness,  are  terri 
fic,  painful,  restless ;  whilst  others,  through  the  influence  of 
darkness,  are  stupifying,  depressing,  heavy ||.' 


t  sfar.  i 


(      160     ) 
XXXIX. 

SUBTILE  (bodies),  and  such  as  spring  from  father  and 
mother,  together  with  the  great  elements,  are  three 
sorts  of  specific  objects.  Among  these,  the  subtile 
bodies  are  lasting  ;  such  as  issue  from  father  and 
mother  are  perishable. 


ftgft 

g*»r%  Trcrfajs 

!j«ffa 


% 


sr 


(     167     ) 
BHASHYA. 

Subtile :  the  rudimental  elements,  that,  when  aggregated, 
form  the  rudimental  or  subtile  body,  characterised  by  intellect 
(mahat)  and  the  rest,  and  which  always  exists,  and  undergoes 
successive  states  of  being  (transmigration) :  those  are  subtile 
(bodies).  SucJi  aft  spring  from  father  and  mother  are  the 
cementers  or  means  of  the  aggregation  of  gross  bodies,  or  by 
the  effect  of  the  mixture  of  blood  and  seminal  secretion  in 
sexual  cohabitation,  at  fit  seasons  they  form  the  envelopment 
of  the  subtile  body  in  the  womb ;  that  subtile  body  then  is 
nourished,  through  the  umbilical  cord,  by  the  nutriment  derived 
from  tea  food  and  drink  received  by  the  mother  ;  and  the  (en 
tire)  body,  thus  commenced  with  the  triple  ingredient  of  the 
subtile  rudiments,  the  cognate  investure,  and  the  gross  ele 
ments,  becomes  furnished  with  back,  belly,  legs,  neck,  head, 
and  the  rest ;  is  enveloped  in  its  sixfold  membranes  ;  is  provided 
with  blood,  flesh,  tendons,  semen,  marrow,  and  bones ;  and  is 
composed  of  the  five  gross  elements  ;  ether  being  supplied  for 
its  cavities  (or  extension),  air  for  its  growth,  fire  for  its  nutri 
ment,  water  for  its  aggregation,  and  earth  for  its  stability : 
and  thus  being  equipped  with  all  its  (component)  parts,  it 
comes  forth  from  the  maternal  womb.  In  this  way  there  are 
three  kinds  (of  bodies) :  which  of  these  is  constant,  and  which 
temporary,  is  next  described.  The  subtile  bodies,  are  lasting* — 
Subtile ;  rudimental  elements  :  these  are  lasting^  constant ;  by 
them  body  is  commenced,  and  migrates,  according  to  the  im 
perative  influence  of  acts,  through  the  forms  of  beasts,  deer, 
birds,  reptiles,  or  immovable  substances  ;  or,  in  consequence  of 
virtue,  proceeds  through  the  heaven  of  Indra,  and  other  celes 
tial  abodes.  So  the  subtile  body  migrates  until  knowledge  is 
attained  ;  when  that  is  attained,  the  sage,  abandoning  all  bodyt 
acquires  liberation ;  these  sorts  of  bodies,  or  subtile,  therefore, 
are  called  lasting.  Such  as  issue  from  father  and  mother 
are  pevwhafole. — Having  left  that  subtile  body,  the  frame  that 
proceeds  from  mother  and  father  ceases,  eveu  here,  at  the  time 


(     1G8     ) 

that  th«  breath  departs ;  the  body  born  of  parents  ceases  at  the 
time  of  death,  and  merges  into  earth  and  the  other  gross 
elemente, 

What  subtile  body  is,  and  how  it  migrates,  is  next  described. 

COMMENT. 

Objects  were  distinguished  in  the  preceding  verse  according 
as  they  were  with  or  without  specific  or  diversified  effects : 
they  are  here  classified  according  to  their  forms,  their  origin, 
and  duration. 

A  question  of  some  difficulty,  however,  arises  here,  as  to  the 
objects  of  the  classification.  Are  they  bodies  in  general  ?  or 
are  they  gross  bodies  only  ?  In  the  preceding  stanza  it  was 
stated,  that  the  subtile  elements,  the  tan  mat-ras,  were  un- 
specific;  whilst  their  effects,  the  gross  elements,  were  'specific/ 
vise'sha,  It  is  now  stated,  that  there  are  three  kinds  of  vise'vkas, 
'  sorts,  species,  specific  differences ;'  but  it  is  not  explicitly  de 
fined  of  what  these  are  varieties.  Mr.  Colebrook,  following  the 
principal  commentators,  renders  it  *  sorts  of  objects  ;' that  is, 
of  bodies  in  general.  Professor  Lassen,  carrying  on  the  sense 
of  vl-sesha, l  specific,'  from  the  preceding  stanza,  considers  the 
variety  here  spoken  of  to  concern  only  gross  or  perceptible 
elementary  bodies  :  "  Distincta,  elementa  quae  distincta  dicun- 
tur  (ver.  38).  Distinctorum  triplex  est  divisio  in  subtilia,  a 
parentibus  progenita,  crassa"  (ver.  39).  He  admits  that  the 
commentators  are  against  this  interpretation,  but  concludes 
rather  that  they  are  in  error,  than  that  ISWARA  KRISHNA 
should  have  employed  the  word  viseska  in  a  double  sense. 

The  interpretation  of  Prof.  Lassen  is  highly  creditable  to 
his  critical  acumen  and  judgment,  and  is  possibly  correct  al 
though  it  is  scarcely  compatible  with  the  notions  of  subtility 
and  durability  which  the  text  ascribes  to  this  branch  of  the 
triad.  His  view  is  not,  as  he  supposes,  wholly  unsupported 
by  the  commentators ;  for  VIJXANA  BHIKSHU  similarly  ex 
plains  the  stanza,  as  will  presently  bu  noticed,  The  passage 


is  one  of  some  importance,  as  it  regards  apparently  the  history 
of  the  Saakhya  doctrines  respecting  the  nature  of  that  subtile 
body  which  is  the  imm3diate  vehicle  of  soul,  as  we  shall  have 
occasion  to  notice  more  particularly,  when  we  come  to  verse  40. 
If  the  meaning  of  the  text  be  as  Prof.  Lasseri  renders  it,  it 
furnishes  reason  to  suppose  that  the  author  of  the  Karikoi  had 
introduced  an  innovation  upon  the  original  doctrine,  as  will  be 
subsequently  indicated. 

According  to  GAURAPA'DA  and  NA'KA'YANA,  the  sorts  or 
species  intimated  in  this  verse  are  different  from  those  des 
cribed  in  the  preceding  ;  the  former  calls  them,  as  above, 
'  other  varieties*  ;'  and  the  latter  has,  referring  to  ver.  38,  '  So 
many  are  the  specific  varieties  ;  but  these  are  not  all,  there 
are  othersf  .'  VA'CHESPATI'S  expression,  '  A  further  species  of 
speciesj,  might  be  thought  to  refer  to  the  gross  elements  ;  but, 
from  the  explanation  that  follows,  it  is  evident  he  does  not 
intend  to  limit  the  specific  differences  to  gross  elementary 
bodies.  Agreeably  to  the  explanation,  then,  in  which  these 
writers  concur,  bodies  in  general  are  threefold,  subtile,  gene 
rated,  and  elementary  ;  and  consistently  with  this  view  they 
consider  '  subtile,'  trilkshma,  as  equivalent  to  tan-mdtra,  6  rudi- 
mental  :'  thus  GAUKAPA'DA  has,  '  Subtile  is  the  aggregated 
rudimental  elements,  forming  a  rudimento-elemcntal  subtile 
bodyll  :'  so  also  VA'CHESPATI  ;  '  Subtile  means  subtile  bodies  ; 
subtile  body  is  one  specific  object§  :'  and  the  Ghandrikd  ; 
«  Subtile  are  what  are  called  rudimental  bodieslF.'  Consequently 
they  also  conceive  the  subtile  objects  spoken  of  in  this  verse  to 
be  something  entirely  different  from  the  gross  elementary 
r-ixc'xkas,  or  '  species/  of  the  preceding  verse  ;  not  merely  sub 
species  or  varieties  of  the  same  :  and  it  must  be  admitted  that 


t 

i  t-  r^mRra^r-crt  fatreurf  i 

rfa^  f  5*mii  i        §  g$nr:  tf^sr: 
fatto;  i  " 


(     170    ) 

there  is  some  inconsistency  in  the  Kdrikd's  speaking  of  subtile 
bodies  being  a  species  of  gross  bodies  ;  of  the  'imperceptible 
being  a  variety  of  the  perceptible.  According  to  VIJNA'NA 
BHIKSHU,  however,  the  text  merely  intends  by  '  subtile, 
stikshma,  a  modification  of  gross  elementary  body  ;  a  corporeal 
frame,  which  is  subtile  only  relatively,  or  which  is  more  refined 
than  the  second  kind  of  body  specified  in  the  text,  that  which 
is  begotten  :  '  The  nature  of  that  body  which  is  the  support  of 
rudimental  body  is  explained  in  the  Kdrikd,  "  subtile,  gene 
rated,"  &c.  :  here  is  meant,  body  aggregated  of  the  five  ele 
ments,  the  (product  or)  effect  of  the  rudimental  elements* 
which  is  subtile  relatively  to  generated  body*.'  The  same 
notion  is  again  intimated  by  expressions  which  will  be  subse 
quently  cited  ;  and  there  remains  no  doubt  that  this  commen 
tator  understands  by  the  sukskma  of  the  text,  '  a  subtile 
variety  of  gross  elementary  body,'  dist'mctorum  dist'mctio. 
The  other  commentators  understand  by  it,  '  rudimental  bodies/ 
element  a  indixtincta.  Either  interpretation  is  therefore  al 
lowable  :  the  latter  agrees  best  with  the  construction,  of  the 
original. 

In  the  second  variety  of  bodies  of  course  specific  or  sensible 
bodies  only  are  intended  ;  bodies  generated  or  begotten  are 
made  of  the  gross  elements,  agreeably  to  the  Sutra,  '  Body 
consists  of  the  five  elements  t  :'  they  are,  however,  in  some 
degree  distinguished  here  from  the  elements  ;  holding,  accord 
ing  to  GAURAPA'DA,  a  middle  place  between  them,  and  rudi 
mental  bodies  serving  to  combine  them  ;  u$xtckdyalca  causing 
ujxichaijd,  '  proximate  aggregation  ;'  the  parts  of  the  embryo 
being  derived  in  the  first  instance  from  the  parents,  and  their 
development  being  the  result  of  the  accession  of  the  elements, 
for  purposes  which  he  describes.  There  is  some  incongruity, 
however,  in  this  explanation,  as  it  makes  a  distinction  where 
there  is  no  essential  difference  ;  organized  matter  being,  in  fact, 


; 


i  ^ 
t  ifaftftwit  31  :  i 


(     171     ) 

the  same  with  elementary  matter.  The  other  commentators, 
therefore,  give  a  different  explanation  of  the  term  '  great  ele 
ments/  restricting  it  to  inorganic  matter.  Thus  VA'CHESPATI 
observes,  'Subtile  body  is  one  variety  of  objects  ;  generated 
bodies  are  a  second  ;  and  the  great  elements  a  third  :  water- 
jars  and  the  like  (inorganic  bodies)  are  comprised  in  the  class 
of  the  great  elements*.'  So  also  the  Ckandrikd,:  'Subtile 
bodies  are  those  called  rudimental  ;  generated,  are  gross  bodies  ; 
and  the  great  elements  are  mountains,  trees,  and  the  like^.3 

In  this  threefold  division  of  bodies,  as  explained  by  the 
Scholiasts  on  the  Kdrikd,  we  have,  in  fact,  but  two  distinc 
tions,  subtile  and  gross  ;  the  latter  being  subdivided  into 
organic  and  inorganic.  The  twofold  distinction  is  that  which 
is  especially  recognised  in  the  Sutras  :  thus  in  the  S.  Prava- 
chana  Bhdshya,  the  Sutra,  '  Thence  (the  origin)  of  bodyj,'  is 
explained,  '  from  the  twenty-three  tativas  (or  categories)  two 
kinds  of  bodies,  subtile  and  gross,  proceed!  |  :'  and  again,  '  Gross 
body  is  for  the  most  part  generated  (some  bodies  being  inor 
ganic),  the  other  (subtile  body)  is  not§,' 

The  chief  object  of  the  stanza  is,  however,  to  assert  the 
different  duration  of  these  three  kinds  of  bodies  ;  subtile  are 
permanent  :  and  here  we  have  an  argument  in  favour  of  the 
translation  adopted  ;  for  no  form  of  gross  body  could  be  con 
sidered  as  lasting  :  as  composed  of  the  elements,  in  however 
delicate  a  form,  it  must  resolve  into  them  at  the  time  of 
death  ;  whilst  the  subtile  bodies,  consisting  of  the  subtile  ele 
ments,  endure  either  till  liberation^,  or  until  the  great 
Pralaya.** 

Dissolvi  quo  qutuque  supremo  tempore  possint. 


r  fttrc 


(     172    ) 


XL. 

(SouTiLE  body),  primaeval,  unconfined,  material,  com 
posed  of  intellect,  with  other  subtile  principles,  mi 
grates,  else  unenjoying ;  invested  with  dispositions, 
mergent. 


«ffT«f 


BHASHYA. 

Primaeval ;  whilst  yet  the  universe  is  uncreated :  in  the  first 
creation  of  nature,  at  that  season  subtile  body  is  produced. 
Unconfined ;  uncombined  either  in  the  state  of  animals,  men, 
or  gods  ;  and  from  its  subtilty  wholly  unrestrained,  or  passing 
into  rocks  and  the  like  without  obstruction  ;  it  migrates ;  it 
goes.  Permanent:  until  knowledge  is  attained  it  migrates. 
Composed  of  intellect,  with  other  subtile  principles ;  having 
makat  and  the  rest :  that  is,  intellect  in  the  first  place,  with 
egotism  and  mind,  to  the  h' ve  subtile  rudiments,  to  the  subtile 
principles,  to  the  rudimental  elements.  It  migrates;  it  tra 
verses  the  three  worlds,  as  an  ant  the  body  of  Siva.  Unenjoy- 
ing  ;  without  enjoyment  :  that  subtile  body  becoming  capable 
of  enjoyment  only  in  consequence  of  acquiring  the  property  of 
action,  through  its  aggregation  by  external  generated  body. 
Invested  with  dispositions. — Dispositions,  as  virtue  and  the 
rest ;  which  we  shall  hereafter  explain  (see  ver.  43).  Invested 
with ;  coloured  or  affected  by.  Subtile  body  is  that  which,  at 
the  period  of  universal v  dissolution,  possessed  of  makat f  in 
telligence,  and  the  other  subtile  principles,  merges  into  the 
chief  one  (or  nature),  and,  exempted  from  further  revolution, 
remains  extant  there  until  creation  is  renewed,  being  bound 
111  the  bondage  of  the  stolidity  of  nature,  and  thereby  incom 
petent  to  the  acts  of  migrating  and  the  like.  At  the  season  of 
re-creation  it  again  revolves,  and  is  hence  called  linya,  '  charac 
teristic'  or  '  mergent,'  or  sukshma,  '  subtile/ 

From  what  cause  the  thirteen  instruments  (intellect,  egotism, 
and  the  eleven  organs)  revolve,  as  has  been  said,  is  next 
explained, 

COMMENT. 

The  condition  of  subtile  body,  in  regard  to  commencement, 
duration,  and  term,  is  here  described. 

The  commentators  are  agreed  that  the  subtile  body  here 
spoken  of  is  the  linya,  or  the  linya  sarira,  l  rudiment/  or 


'  rudimental  body  ;'  ordinarily,  though  perhaps  not  quite  accu 
rately,  confounded  :  the  liny  a  consisting,  as  intimated  in  the 
last  phrase  of  the  Bh&skya,  of  thirteen  component  parts,  in 
tellect,  egotism,  and  the  organs  of  sense  and  action ;  whilst 
the  llnga  sarira  adds  to  these  a  bodily  frame,  made  up  of  the 
five  rudimental  elements.  In  this  form,  however,  they  always 
coexist,  and  i,t  is  not  necessary  to  consider  them  as  distinct : 
thus  the  Sutra  of  KAPILA  states,  c  one  llnga  of  seventeen*  ;' 
that  is,  according  to  the  Scholiast,  c  in  the  beginning,  at  crea 
tion  :  there  is  but  one  rudimental  body  at  the  period  of  creation, 
consisting  of  an  aggregate  of  the  eleven  organs,  five  rudimental 
elements,  and  intellect^.'  This  was  at  first  embodied  in  the 
person  of  HIHANYAGARBHA,  or  BRAHMA',  and  afterwards  'multi 
plied  individually,  according  to  variety  of  actions^'  In  this 
enumeration  egotism  is  omitted,  being  included,  according  to 
the  commentator,  in  intellect.  '  Unconfined,'  asakta,  means 
unobstructed,  capable  of  passing  into  any  bodies.  The  next 
epithet,  nlyata,  translated  '  material/  is  explained  by  GrAUKA- 
PADA  as  above,  by  nltya,  '  permanent,  lasting  ;'  and  VACHES- 
PATI  attaches  to  it  the  same  signification.  '  It  endures  till  the 
period  of  universal  dissolution  |j;  and  the  8.  Pr.  Bhdvhya  ob 
serves,  also,  that  it  ceases,  or  is  destroyed,  only  at  the  same 
season§  :  a  property,  of  which  it  may  be  observed  by  the  way, 
that  it  furnishes  another  reason  for  identifying  the  silkshmat 
or  *  subtile  body,'  of  the  foregoing  stanza  with  the  linga,  or 
'  rudimental  body,'  of  this  verse.  The  Chandrika  explains 
niyata  differently,  '  distinct  in  different  persons^.'  The  com 
position  of  subtile  body  is  explicitly  described  by  YACHESPATI  : 
1  Subtile  body  is  an  assemblage  of  intellect,  egotism,  the  eleven 


fetf  i          t     irat  H'rr 


(     175     } 

senses,   and  the  five  elements*.'     He  ascribes,   however,  to  this 
a  specific   or   '  diversified   existence,  from  its  endowment  with 
senses,  which  arc  the  sources  of  pleasure,  pain,  or  indifference!.' 
The  commentators  agree  that  subtile   body  is  subject  to  enjoy 
ment  or  suffering   only  through   its  connection   with  generated 
body ;    understanding    apparently    thereby,    not    its  abstract 
capability   of  either,   but  the  actual  condition  in  which  it  par 
takes  of  them ;    for  it  is   repeatedly   declared  that  the  seat  of 
enjoyment  and  suffering  is  buddhi,  or  'intellect;'  through  the 
presence   of  which   as  an  ingredient   in  subtile   body,  it  is  im 
mediately   added,    the   latter    is  invested    with  '  dispositions,' 
bhdvas ;  that  is,  with  the  properties  of  intellect   enumerated  in 
ver.  23,   virtue,    vice,    knowledge,    ignorance,  &c.     The  term 
bhdva  was  rendered  by  Mr.  Colebrooke  in  that  place  by  '  senti 
ments/   but  in   another   (ver.  43)   he  expressed  the  same  '  dis 
positions,'   which,   as  far  as   relates   to  the  mental    bhdvas,  ap 
pears   to  be  a   preferable   equivalent.     Of  the   consequences  of 
these   dispositions,   reward   in  heaven,    or  punishment  in  hell, 
dead,   decomposed   animal  body  is  no  longer  susceptible  :  '  In  a 
dead   body   there  can  be  no  sense   of  pleasure  or  pain  ;  this  all 
admit:J:.'     In  order,   however,   to   be   placed   in    circumstances 
leading   to   such   enjoyment   or   suffering,   generated   body  is 
necessary ;    and   therefore   subtile   body   migrates,   sansarat-i, 
goes   from   one  body   to  another  continually  :    hence  the  world 
is  called   sansdra,   i  migration'   or  '  revolution.'     '  Through  the 
influence   of  intellect   the  whole   of  subtile   body  is  affected  by 
dispositions   or  conditions,   in  the   same  manner  as  a   garment 
is  perfumed   from  contact  with  a  fragrant  cliampa  flower||.'     S. 
Tdtu'a   Kaiirnudi.     Subtile   body  is  called  linga  from  its  con- 


(     176     ) 

sisting  of  those  principles  which  are  so  termed,  either  from  their 
indicating  or  characterising  that  nature  from  which  thy  proceed, 
or  from  their  being  ultimately  resolvable  into  it.  Thus  the 
Chandr'ikd,  has,  '  Linya,  from  designating,  apprising*:'  GAURA- 
PADA,  as  above,  '  It  merges  into  nature  at  the  season  of  dissolu 
tion  :'  and  VAOHESPATI,  '  Linya  is  so  termed  because  it  suffers 
resolution  (lay a),  or  from  its  characteristic  indication  of  the 
source  from  which  it  proceeds*)".'  See  also  remarks  on  ver, 
10  p.  43. 


c 


3%  f^ri  Wf  msm  f^i«r4  fejpr^  11  «  m 

XLI. 

As  a  painting  stands  not  without  a  ground,  nor  a 
shadow  without  a  stake,  &c.  so  neither  does  subtile 
person  subsist  supportless,  without  specific  (or  un- 
specific)  particles. 


^  Iff^r 


i1  fair  Mt  ^  fair 
'Tr^H  fair 

I  ^^ 

fan 


'  i  t 

;  t 


(     177     ), 


BHASHYA. 

As  a  picture  without  the  support  of  a  wall  or  the  like  does 
not  stand  ;  as  the  shadow  does  not  stand  without  the  stake 
(the  gnomon  of  a  dial)  ;  that  is,  without  them  does  not  exist. 
The  term  et  cetera  comprises  (other  illustrations)  ;  as,  wator 
cannot  be  without  coldness,  nor  coldness  without  water  ;  fire 
without  heat  ;  air  without  touch  ;  ether  without  extension  ; 
earth  without  smell  ;  so  by  this  illustration  it  is  intimated  that 
it,  the  rudiment  (linga),  does  not  subsist  without  unspecific  or 
rudiinental  particles.  Here  also  specific  elements  are  implied, 
or  body  composed  of  the  five  gross  elements  ;  for  without  a 
body,  having  specific  particles,  where  can  the  place  of  the  linya, 
be  ;  which,  when  it  abandons  one  corporeal  frame,  takes  refuge 
in  another.  Supportless  ;  devoid  of  support.  Subtile  (person)  ; 
Instrument  of  thirteen  kinds  :  this  is  the  meaning  of  the  text. 

For  what  purpose  (these  subtile  elements  are  embodied)  ii 
next  described. 

COMMENT. 

Iii  the  preceding  verse  it  was  stated  that  subtile  person 
migrated,  or  as  soon  as  deprived  of  one  body  it  took  refuge  in 
another.  It  is  now  explained  why  this  must  be  ;  and  that  it 
proceeds  from  the  necessity  of  something  to  give  to  subtile 
principles  asylum  and  support. 

The  text  accordingly  states,'  that  the  'rudiment'  the  linya, 
cannot  exist  without  such  support;  but  with  regard  to  the  sup 
port  itself  there  is  some  difference  of  opinion,  the  passage  being 
variously  read  and  interpreted. 

GAURAPADA.  reads  the  expression,  rnvV.x7,,<r<V  r]  lt(i,  '  without 
unspecific  particles  ;'  by  which  lie  states  that  lie  means  the 
'  rudimental  particles,'  the  tail  ncdtra*.  He  adds,  that  specific 
23 


(     178     ) 

particles,  gross  elementary  bodies,  are  also  necessary  ;  using  the 
terms  avwesha  and  vis&ka  as  th  ey  were  before  employed  (ver. 
38),  to  represent  severally  the  rudiinental  and  gross  elements. 
VACHESPATI  and  NABAYAXA  read  the  phrase  viseshair  vind, 
1  without  specific  particles  /  but  they  use  the  term  '  specific' 
apparently  in  its  general  acceptation  of  '  species,'  without  re 
ference  to  its  technical  employment  in  vcr.  38  ;  for  they  con 
fine  its  purpose  to  that  of  '  subtile  bodies.'  '  Without  specific 
particle*  ;  without  subtile  bodies  :  that  is  the  meaning*.'  S. 
Tatwa  Kanmudi.  '  Without  specific  particles ;  without  very 
subtile  bodies  :  the  rudiment  (linga),  being  unsupported,  does 
not  remain  ;  but  being  supported  by  subtile  bodies  it  existst/ 
S.  CJiandrikd.  So  far  therefore,  although  the  reading  be 
different,  the  interpretation  appears  to  be  the  same.  The 
linya,  or  '  rudiment' — for  it  is  to  be  observed,  that  it  is  this 
which  is  spoken  of  by  both  text  and  comment,  and  not  the 
linger,  sarira,  '  rudimental  body' — cannot  subsist  without  a 
bodily  frame.  Whence  that  frame  is  derived,  GAUBAPADA 
makes  sufficiently  clear.  The  linya,  or  '  rudiment,'  consists  of 
but  thirteen  principles — the  unclothed  faculties  and  senses  : 
the  rudimental  body,  by  which  they  are  aggregated  and  de 
fended,  is  a  tan  rndtrika  body,  composed  of  the  rudimental 
elements  (p.  123).  This  again,  for  worldly  existence,  is  enve 
loped  in  a  bodily  frame  of  gross  elementary  composition. 

It  may,  however,  be  suspected  that  the  authors  of  the  8. 
Tatwa  Kaainudi  and  the  Chandrika  have  not  attended  to 
the  distinction,  and  that  they  intend  by  their  '  specific  or 
subtile  bodies'  only  one  of  the  '  species,'  or  viseshas,  which 
may  be  intimated  in  ver.  38  ;  a  modification  of  the  gross  ele 
ments  enclosing,  not  the  naked  '  rudiment/  the  linga,  but  the 
*  rudimental  body/  the  linya  sarira.  Such,  at  any  rate,  is 
the  interpretation  of  VIJXAXA  BHIKSHU,  who  commenting  on 


fa^r 


(     179     ) 

this  stanza  of  the  Kdrikd,  explains  '  specific  particles,  those 
which  are  called  subtile  amongst  gross  ;  a  species  or  variety 
of  gross  elements  :'  and  he  says,  that  '  the  definition  of  subtile 
body  which  is  given  in  the  preceding  stanza,  "  composed  of 
intellect  with  other  subtile  elements"  (p.  128),  as  compared 
with  the  expression  of  the  present  verse,  proves  that  there  is  a 
distinction  made  between  subtile  body  and  the  specific  variety 
of  the  gross  elements,  which  is  also  called  subtile*.' 

The  question  then  is  not  one  merely  of  a  difference  of  inter 
pretation,  but  it  is  a  difference  of  doctrine.  According  to 
GAURAPADA'S  explanation,  which  appears  to  be  the  original 
theory,  living  bodies  consist  of  two  parts,  one  of  a  subtile,  and 
one  of  a  gross  nature ;  the  latter  perishes  or  decomposes  at 
death ;  the  former  may  live  on  through  the  existence  of  the 
world  :  the  latter  gives  cover  to  the  former,  which  is  the  imme 
diate  vehicle  of  soul,  and  accompanies  it  constantly,  through 
successive  perishable  bodies,  until  soul's  liberation,  or  until  a 
period  of  universal  dissolution  restore  its  component  parts  to 
their  primitive  and  common  parent.  To  this  body  the  term  of 
linga  sarira,  '  rudimental  body,'  is  properly  applied  ;  it  is  also 
called  dtivdhika,  that  which  is  swifter  than  the  wind  in  pass 
ing  from  body  to  body ;  and,  as  Mr.  Colebrooke  observes,  "  il 
seems  to  be  a  compromise  between  an  immaterial  soul  and  the 
difficulty  which  a  gross  understanding  finds  in  grasping  the 
comprehension  of  individual  existence,  unattached  to  matter." 
Tr.  R.  As.  Soc.  I.  32. 

But  some  of  the  expounders  of  the  Sankhya  doctrines  have 
not  thought  even  the  rudimental  body  sufficiently  material  for 
the  purpose  of  independent  existence,  when  separated  from 
gross  body ;  and  a  third  corporeal  frame  has  been  devised  for 
its  support,  to  which  the  present  verse  of  the  Kdrikd  and  the 


**j3*r?TRt 


(     180     ) 

other  passages  which  seem  to  allude  to  a  subtile  form  of  speci 
fic  or  gross  elementary  matter  relate,  according  to  VuxANi. 
BHIKSHU  :  '  Having  abandoned  gross  body,  a  support  is  neces 
sary  for  the  passage  of  rudimental  body  to  other  regions,  and 
another  species  of  body  is  established*.'  This  is  more  particu 
larly  explained  in  the  same  writer's  commentary  on  a  some 
what  obscure  Sutra  immediately  preceding :  "  In  the  body, 
which  is  the  receptacle  of  the  receptacle  of  that  (rudimental 
body) ;  for  the  denomination  of  body  is  applied  to  one  as  it  is 
to  the  other."  That  is,  the  receptacle  or  support  of  that  rudi 
ment,  which  will  be  described  as  composed  of  the  five  elements, 
is  supported  or  contained  in  body  constituted  of  the  six  organic 
ingredients  (bones,  blood,  &c.) ;  to  which  the  name  body  is 
applied,  from  the  same  being  applicable  to  the  sense  of  the 
word  adhis/i  hdna  (delta,  "  body,"  being  understood  apparently 
in  either  case  "  containing"  or  "  comprehending").  The  cor 
poreity  of  the  vehicle  or  receptacle  (adhlshthdna)  arises  from 
its  relation  to  the  (aggregate)  ling  a  ;  the  corporeity  of  gross 
body,  from  its  being  the  receptacle  of  vehicular  body.  This  is 
the  meaning  of  the  text.  We  have  therefore  three  (kinds  of) 
body  established*!*.'  Quoting  a  passage  which  appears  opposed  to 
this,  and  to  intimate,  as  GAURAPADA  has  done,  a  twofold  dis 
tinction  only  of  bodies,  the  same  writer  observes,  '  What  is  said 
in  writings,  upon  the  authority  of  the  Ve'das,  that  there  are 
but  two  (kinds  of)  bodies,  arises  from  their  identifying  the 
rudimental  and  vehicular  bodies  as  one,  as  they  are  mutually 


ft  I  t   c^faSRmq-  ^1  asrerTfgJf:  II  cTST 


(     181     ) 

permanent  and  subtile*.'  This  is  no  doubt  correct ;  but  it  is 
very  unlikely  that  the  elder  writers  admitted  any  form  of  the 
gross  elements  to  be  equally  permanent  and  subtile  as  the  ru 
diments  from  which  they  proceeded.  In  the  institutes  of  Hanu, 
for  instance,  although  the  doctrine  there  laid  down  is  of  a  dif 
ferent  tenor  from  that  of  tho  Sankhya  system,  we  have  but 
two  kinds  of  bodies,  a  subtle  and  substantial  one,  described; 
'After  deatli  another  body,  composed  of  the  five  rudimental 
elements,  is  immediately  produced,  for  wicked  men,  that  may 
suffer  the  tortures  of  the  infernal  regions-)-.'  Md-nii,  XII  16. 
We  have  here,  then,  a  body  composed  of  the  five  rudimental 
elements.  In  the  Bhagavad  Glta  it  is  intimated  that  soul 
retains  the  senses  and  mind  in  the  intervals  of  migration  :  '  At 
the  time  that  spirit  obtains  a  body,  and  when,  it  abandons  one, 
it  migrates,  taking  with  it  those  senses,  as  the  wind  wafts 
along  with  it  the  perfume  of  the  flowers^.' 

If  VACHESPATI  be  correct  in  his  interpretation  of  the  word 
punusha,  the  Vdda  makes  one  kind  of  subtile  body  of  the  size 
of  the  thumb  :  "  YAMA  drew  forth  violently  the  subtile  body, 
as  big  as  the  thumb." — The  specification  of  the  size  merely  de 
notes  minuteness ;  extraction  of  soul  would  be  absurd ;  and 
therefore  by  puruslca  must  be  meant  "  a  subtile  body,"  that 
which  reposes  in  gross  body||.'  This,  agreeably  to  the  older 
doctrine,  would  be  rudimental  body  ;  according  to  later  refine 
ment,  vehicular.  It  is  the  latter  which,  as  Mr.  Colebrooke 
mentions  (Tr.  R,  As.  Soc.  I.  33)  in  PATANJALI'S  Yoc/a  sastra, 


t 

i  ;'  srfrt  ^  witfii 


(     182     ) 

is  conceived  to  extend,  like  the  flame  of  a  lamp  over  its  \vick, 
to  a  small  distance  above  the  skull ;  and  which,  according  to 
M.  Cousin,  is  "  la  fameuse  pensee  intracranienne.  dont  on  a  cru 
faire  re'cemment  une  decouverte  merveilleuse."  Hist,  de  la 
Philosophic,  I.  195. 

The  notion  of  some  corporeal,  however  subtile  envelopment 
of  soul — the  ei'&oAoy,  umlmi,  manes,  simulacrum,  spirit,  or 
ghost — giving  to  invisible  and  intangible  soul  some  visible  and 
tangible  materiality,  "  such,"  as  Grood  (Translation  of  Lucreti 
us)  observes,  "  as  will  at  least  enable  the  soul  to  assume  some 
degree  of  material  configuration,  and  to  be  capable  of  corporeal 
feelings,  however  spiritualized  and  refined,  even  after  its  sepa 
ration  from  the  body" — has  prevailed  in  all  times  and  in  all 
ages.  Nor  was  the  doctrine  confined  to  the  people  or  the 
poets  :  such  of  the  philosophers  as  maintained  the  immateria 
lity  of  soul,  attaching  to  it,  until  its  final  purification,  some 
portion  of  corporeal  substance,  or  some  substantial,  though 
subtile  investure,  or  o'x>;/xa,  or  vehicle.  Thus  Cudworth  (vol. 
III.  517)  states,  that  'the  ancient  assertors  of  the  soul's  im 
mortality  did  not  suppose  human  souls,  after  death,  to  be  quite 
stripped  stark  naked  from  all  body,  but  that  the  generality  of 
souls  had  then  a  certain  spirituous,  vaporous,  or  airy  body 
accompanying  them  ;  as  also  they  conceived  this  spirituous 
body  to  hang  about  the  soul  alse  here  in  this  life,  before  death, 
as  its  interior  indument  or  vestment,  which  also  then  sticks  to 
it  when  that  other  gross  earthly  part  of  the  body  is  by  death 
put  off  as  an  outer  garment."  It  also  appears,  that  "  besides 
the  terrestrial  body,  and  this  spirituous  body,  the  ancients 
held  that  there  is  a  third  kind,  of  a  higher  rank,  peculiarly 
belonging  to  such  souls,  after  death,  as  are  purged  and 
cleansed  from  corporeal  affections,  called  by  them  crwjma 
avyoeiSe?,  or  a  luciform  body."  The  authorities  quoted  by  Cud- 
worth  for  these  opinions  are  new  Platonists,  or  Christian 
writers  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  centuries ;  and  it  seems  not 
unlikely  that  they  borrowed  some  of  their  notions  from 
the  doctrines  of  Christianity,  They  profess,  however,  to 


(     183     ) 

repeat  the  tenets  of  Pythagoras  and  Plato ;  and  Cudworth 
asserts,  that  the  distinction  of  two  interior  vehicles  or 
tu nicies  of  the  soul,  besides  that  outer  vestment  of  the 
terrestrial  body,  is  not  a  mere  figment  of  the  latter  Platonists, 
but  a  tradition  derived  down  from  antiquity.  Mosheim,  in  his 
translation  of  Cudworth,  has  entered,  in  a  note,  very  fully 
into  an  inquiry  as  to  the  origin  of  the  opinion  of  a  subtile 
body  investing  soul,  and  concludes,  "  Yetus  ha?c  opinio  aut  si 
mavis  superstitio,  ab  ipsis  fere  Gr.Tcorum  haroicis  temporibus 
ducta  :"  and  Brucker,  in  reference  to  his  observations  on  this 
subject,  remarks,  "  Hoc  vero  magna  doctrina  et  ingenio  de- 
monstravit  Mosheimius  hac  de  vehiculo  opinionem  non  demum 
in  juniorum  Platonicornm  cerebro  cnatam  essc  sed  fuisse 
dogma  cairn?  antiquitatis."  Hi*t.  Pldlos.  I.  714.  Although, 
therefore,  less  clearly  expressed  than  by  the  Hindu  writers, 
the  early  Greek  philosophers  entertained  similar  notions  of 
the  nature  of  the  subtile  body,  which  was  inseparable  from  soul 
until  the  period  of  its  final  exemption  from  transmigration. 


n 
n  s *  n 

XLII. 

FOR  the  sake  of  .soul's  wish,  that  subtile  person 
exhibits  (before  it),  like  a  dramatic  actor  ;  through 
relation  of  means  and  consequence,  with  the  aid  of 
nature's  influence. 


(     184     ) 


f^i 


BIIASHYA. 

The  purpose  of  soul  is  to  be  fulfilled,  therefore  nature 
proceeds  to  action.  This  (purpose)  is  twofold,  apprehension  of 
sound  and  the  other  objects  of  sense,  and  apprehension  of  the 
difference  between  qualities  and  soul.  Apprehension  of  sound 
and  the  other  objects  of  sense  is  enjoyment  of  sensual  grati 
fication,  as  fragrance  and  the  like  in  the  spheres  of  Brahma 
and  the  rest  :  apprehension  of  the  difference  between  the  qua 
lities  and  soul  is  liberation.  Therefore  it  is  said,  For  the  sake 
of  soul's  wish  subtile  person  is  active.  Th.ru  a-yU  relation  of 
iHeu'n*  nn<l  co'iiw<it!encex.  —  Mi'an*  (or  antecedents)  are  virtue 
and  the  like  :  conwqtH'nces  are  their  results,  such  as  their 
ascending  to  heaven  and  so  forth,  as  we  shall  hereafter  explain. 
By  then'  relation;  their  connection.  I}'////  //»:  <(id  of  ncbtW&v 
i  rttlt'CiiC''  ;.  of  the  influence  of  the  chief  one,  nature.  As  a  king 
in  his  own  kingdom  does  what  he  wishes  of  his  own  authority, 
so  by  the  application  of  the  supreme  authority  of  nature, 


through  the  relation  of  means  (or  causes)  and  consequences, 
subtile  body  exhibits  :  that  is,  nature  commands  subtile  body 
to  assume  different  conditions,  by  taking  different  (gross) 
bodies.  Subtile  body  is  that  which  is  aggregated  of  subtile 
atomic  rudimental  elements,  and  is  possessed  of  thirteen  in 
struments  (or  faculties  and  senses).  It  assumes  various  con 
ditions,  by  its  birth,  amongst  gods,  animals  and  men.  How 
does  (it  exhibit)  ?  Like  an  actor,  who  when  he  enters  upon 
the  scene  is  a  god,  and  when  he  makes  his  exit  is  again  a 
mortal  :  or  again,  a  buffoon.  So  the  subtile  body,  through  the 
relation  of  causes  and  consequences,  having  entered  the  womb, 
may  become  an  elephant,  a  woman,  or  a  man. 

It  was  said  (ver.  40),  "  Subtile  body  migrates,  invested  with 
dispositions."  What  those  dispositions  are  is  now  described. 

COMMENT- 

The  circumstances  on  which  transmigration  depends  are 
here  said  to  be  the  purpose  of  soul,  enforced  by  the  authority 
of  nature. 

Soul's  purpose  is  either  fruition  or  liberation  ;  and  to  accom 
plish  one  or  other  of  these,  subtile  body  passes  through  various 
conditions,  assuming  different  exterior  forms,  as  an  actor  puts 
on  different  dresses  to  personate  one  while  Rama,  another 
while  Yudhishthira,  or  again,  Vatsa*.  The  purpose  of  soul  is 
enforced  by  the  power,  authority,  or  influence  of  nature*. 
Vibhutwa,  as  illustrated  by  GAURAPADA,  means  '  kingly  or 
supreme  authority.'  VACHESPATI  understands  it  as  '  univer 
sality'  rather,  as  in  the  text  of  the  Pur  ana  :  '  This  wonderful 
vicissitude  is  from  the  universality  of  naturej  ;'  that  is,  from 
its  invariable  presence  and  consequent  influence.  But  besides 
these  motives,  the  purpose  of  soul  and  influence  of  nature, 
which  may  be  regarded  as  the  remote  and  proximate  causes  of 


ff  ^ 

J  t^cqr<r  q*rwj  qftwft^ro  Jtf 


(     186     ) 

transmigration  in  general,  it  is  still  necessary  to  have  what 
may  be  regarded  as  a  special,  or  exciting,  or  efficient  cause  J 
the  reason  of  the  particular  migration  ;  the  cause  wherefore,  in 
particular  instances,  subtile  body  should  ascend  from  the 
exterior  frame  of  a  man  to  that  of  a  god,  or  wherefore  it  should 
descend  from  the  exterior  frame  of  a  man  to  that  of  a  brute. 
This  depends,  then,  upon  the  relation  of  certain  occasional  or 
instrumental  means  or  causes,  wi/mMas*,  with  their  incidental 
consequences  or  effects,  the  naimitlikas't',  as  virtue  and  vice, 
which  lead  severally  to  reward  and  punishment  after  death ; 
that  is,  to  regeneration  in  an  exalted  or  degraded  condition. 
Thus  the  Chandrikd  explains  the  terms  :  '  Nimitta  is  virtue 
and  the  rest ;  naimittika  is  the  effect,  having  the  nimitta  for 
its  cause,  as  gross  bodies,  &c.  By  the  relation  or  connection 
of  these  two,  subtile  body,  assuming  the  form  of  gods  or 
other  beings,  performs  its  part}/  Professor  Lassen  has  been 
needlessly  perplexed  by  this  verse,  and  has  strangely  rendered 
it  as  follows :  "  Corpusculum  hocce  propter  genii  causam 
effectum,  ludionis  instar  se  habet  ad  has  modo  ad  illas  originari- 
as  et  derivatas  conditiones  pronum,  post  conjunctionem  pro- 
creatricis  cum  potestate  sua." 


XLIII. 

ESSENTIAL  dispositions  are   innate.     Incidental,   as 
virtue  and  the  rest,  are  considered  appurtenant  to  the 


J 


(     187     ) 

instrument.     The  uterine  germ  (flesh  and  blood)  and 
the  rest  belong  to  the  effect  (that  is,  to  the  body). 


Wffi' 


*nrr  ?TR    tNfa^Wfa  i 


f  ^rftft^f 
*  i 


rlr- 


f  fa? 


BHA'SHYA, 


Dispositions  (Ikdvas,  '  conditions')  of  being  are  considered 
to  be  threefold,  innate,  essential,  and  incidental.  The  first,  or 
innate,  are  those  four  which  in  the  first  creation  were  cognate 


(     188     ) 

with  the  divine  sage  KAPILA,  or  virtue,  knowledge,  dispassion, 
and  power.  The  essential  are  declared  ;  these  were  four  sons 
of  BRAHMA',  SANAKA,  SANANDANA,  SAN  A' TAN  A,  and  SANJLT- 
KUMA'EA  ;  and  these  four  dispositions  were  produced  with  them, 
who  were  invested  with  bodies  of  sixteen  years  of  age  (or 
perpetually  juvenile  bodies),  inconsequence  of  the  relation  of 
causes  and  effects  (or  in  consequence  of  merit  in  a  former 
existence) :  therefore  these  dispositions  are  called  essential. 
Incidental  are  those  derived  through  the  corporeal  form  of  a 
holy  teacher  ;  from  which  (in  the  first  instance)  knowledge  is 
incidentally  obtained  by  such  as  we  are ;  from  knowledge 
comes  dispassion;  from  dispassion,  virtue;  and  from  virtue, 
power.  The  form  of  a  teacher  is  an  incidental  product  (of 
nature),  and  therefore  these  dispositions  are  termed  incidental: 
"  Invested  by  which,  subtile  body  migrates"  (ver.  40).  These 
four  dispositions  are  of  the  quality  of  goodness ;  those  of  dark 
ness  are  their  contraries :  as  above,  "  Virtue,  &c.  are  its  faculties 
partaking  of  goodness  ;  those  partaking  of  darkness  are  the 
reverse"  (ver.  23).  Consequently  there  are  eight  dispositions, 
or  virtue,  knowledge,  dispassion,  power,  vice,  ignorance,  passion, 
weakness.  Where  do  they  abide  ?  They  are  considered  ap- 
purtenant  to  the  instrument.  Intellect  is  an  instrument,  and 
to  that  they  are  appurtenant ;  as  in  ver.  23,  "  Ascertainment  is 
intellect ;  virtue,  knowledge,"  &c.  Effect;  body.  The  uterine 
germ  and  the  rest  belong  to  it ;  those  which  are  born  of  the 
mother,  the  germ  and  the  rest,  or  the  bubble,  the  flesh,  the 
muscle,  and  the  rest,  which  are  (generated),  for  the  develop 
ment  of  the  infant,  in  the  union  of  the  blood  and  the  seminal 
fluid.  Thus  the  conditions  of  infancy,  youth,  and  old  age  are 
produced  ;  the  instrumental  causes  of  which  are  food  and  beve 
rage  ;  and  therefore  they  are  said  to  be  attributes  of  the  effect 
(or  of  the  body),  having,  as  the  instrumental  cause,  the  fruition 
of  the  sensual  pleasures  of  eating  and  the  like. 

It  was  said  (ver.  42).  "  Through  the  relation   of  means  and 
consequences  :"  this  is  next  explained, 


(     189     ) 

COMMENT- 

We  have  here  an  explanation  of  what  is  to  be  understood  by 
the  term  dispositions,  used  in  a  former  passage  (ver.  40). 

The  translation  of  bh&va*  adopted  by  Mr.  Colebrooke  in  this 
place  is  '  disposition  :'  in  the  passage  referred  to  he  had  em 
ployed,  as  above  remarked,  '  sentiment;'  but  it  was  there 
changed,  in  order  to  preserve  consistency.  Neither  word  per 
haps  exactly  expresses  the  purport  of  the  original,  nor  is  it 
easy  to  find  one  that  will  precisely  correspond.  In  some  res- 
pects  c  condition,'  mode,  or  state  of  being,  conditio,  as  rendered 
by  Professor  Lassen,  is  preferable,  as  better  comprehending  the 
different  circumstances  to  which  bhdva  is  applied  ;  although, 
as  he  has  occasion  subsequently  to  remark,  it  does  not  very 
well  express  all  the  senses  in  which  bkdva  occur.  These  cir 
cumstances  or  conditions,  according  to  the  obvious  meaning  of 
the  text,  are  of  two  kinds,  or  intellectual  and  corporeal.  The 
first  comprise  virtue,  knowledge,  dispassion,  power,  and  their 
contraries  ;  the  second,  the  different  periods  of  life,  or  embryo, 
infancy,  youth,  and  senility.  They  are  also  to  be  regarded  as 
respectively  cause  and  effect  ;  virtue,  &c.  being  the  efficient 
cause,  or  nimitta  ;  bodily  condition  the  naimittika,  or  conse 
quence  ;  as  VA'CHESPATI  explains  the  object  of  the  stanza, 
'  which,'  according  to  him,  '  distinguishes  incidental  cause  and 
consequence,  the  latter  being  the  incidental  conditions  of  bodyf  .' 

But  besides  the  division  of  conditions  or  dispositions  into 
the  two  classes  of  intellectual  and  corporeal,  they  are  also 
characterised  according  to  their  origin,  as  sdnsiddhika,  prd- 
krita,  and  vaikrita,  rendered  in  the  text  '  innate,  essential,  and 
incidental.'  Prof.  Lassen  translates  them  conditiones  absolute?, 
pendentes  ab  origins,  pertin&ntes  ad  evoluta  principia* 
Both  the  two  first  are  innate,  and  some  further  distinction  is 
necessary.  c  Superhuman'  or  '  transcendental'  would  perhaps 


t     T*m  f*rm^  ^  fw    i   ^tour  mr%^r:  \ 


(     190     ) 

best  explain  the  first,  as  they  are,  according  to  the  commenta 
tor,  peculiar,  to  saints  and  sages.  According  to  GAURAPADA, 
they  occur  only  in  one  instance  as  the  cognate  conditions  of 
the  divine  KAPILA,  the  author  of  the  Sankhya  system.  The 
second  class,  which  may  be  rendered  '  natural/  agreeably  to 
his  view,  which  is  a  little  mystical,  originated  with  the  four 
holy  and  chaste  sons  of  BRAHMA.  The  third  class,  those  which 
are  incidental  or  constructive,  vaikrita,  belong  to  mortals,  as 
they  are  produced  in  them  by  instruction.  VACHESPATI  re 
cognises  but  two  distinctions,  identifying,  as  in  the  translation, 
the  innate  (sdnsiddhika)  with  the  essential  (prdkrita)  dis 
positions,  they  being  both  sw&bhdvika,  inseparable,  inherent,' 
not  the  production  of  tuition,  and  opposing  to  it  the  construc 
tive  or  incidental  (vaikritika)*.  A  similar  account  of  their 
origin  as  in  the  Bhdshya  is  given,  but  under  these  two  heads 
only  :  *  Thus  in  the  beginning  of  creation  the  first  sage,  the 
venerable  and  great  Muni  KAPILA,  appeared,  spontaneously 
endowed  with  virtue,  knowledge,  dispassion,  and  power.  The 
incidental  and  unspontaneous  dispositions  were  produced  by 
the  cultivation  of  the  means  (of  producing  them),  as  (the  les 
sons  of)  -PKACHETASA  and  other  great  Rishis^J  These  dis 
positions  or  conditions  are  dependent  upon  the  instrument, 
that  is  upon  buddhi,  or  '  intellect,'  of  which  they  are  faculties, 
as  was  explained  in  verse  23.  The  states  or  conditions  of  life 
depend  upon  the  body,  and  are  the  immediate  effects  of  gene 
ration  and  nutriment,  the  more  remote  effects  of  virtue, 
vice,  &c. 


(     191     ) 


:  II  88  II 


XLIV. 


BY  virtue  is  ascent  to  a  region  above  ;  by  vice,  des 
cent  to  a  region  below  :  by  knowledge  is  deliverance  ; 
by  the  reverse,  bondage. 


BHA'SHYA, 

—  Having  made  virtue  the  efficient  cause, 
it  leads  upwards.  By  upwards  eight  degrees  are  intended, 
or  the  regions  of  Brahma",  Prajapati,  Soma,  Indra,  the  Gan- 
dharbas,  the  Yakshas,  the  Rakshasas,  and  Pisdchas  \  the  subtile 
body  goes  thither.  Or  if  vice  be  the  efficient  cause,  it  mi 
grates  into  an  animal,  a  deer,  a  bird,  a  reptile,  a  vegetable,  or 
a  mineral.  Again  ;  by  knowledge,  deliverance  :  knowledge  of 
the  twenty-five  principles  ;  by  that  efficient  cause,  deliverance, 
the  subtile  body  ceases,  and  (soul  is)  called  '  supreme  spirit1 


(     192     ) 

(pammdtmd).  By  the  reverse,  bondage:  ignorance  is  the 
efficient  cause,  and  that  (effect)  bondage  is  natural  (prdkrita), 
incidental  (vaikdrika),  or  personal  (ddkshina)^  as  will  be  ex 
plained  :  "  He  who  is  bound  by  natural,  incidental,  or  personal 
bondage  is  not  loosed  by  any  other  (means  than  knowledge)." 
Next,  other  efficient  causes  are  declared, 


II 

:  us  MI 

XLV. 


BY  dispassion  is  absorption  into  nature  ;  by  foul 
passion,  migration  :  by  power,  unimpediment  ;  by  the 
reverse,  the  contrary. 


T    ftf  ?^  I  ^7  Rfll*. 


(     193     ) 
BHASHYA. 

If  any  one  has  dispassion  without  knowledge  of  principles 
then  from  such  dispassion  unpreceded  by  knowledge  occurs 
absorption  into  nature,  or  when  the  individual  dies  he  is  re 
solved  into  the  eight  primary  elements,  or  nature,  intellect, 
egotism,  and  the  five  rudiments ;  but  there  is  no  liberation,  and 
therefore  he  migrates  anew.  So  also  by  fowl  passion ;  as  I 
sacrifice,  I  give  gifts,  in  order  to  obtain  in  this  world  divine  or 
human  enjoyment ;  from  such  foul  passion  proceeds  worldly 
migration.  By  power,  unimpediment. — Where  eightfold 
power,  as  minuteness,  &c.  is  the  efficient  cause,  the  non-ob 
struction  is  the  effect.  Such  power  is  unimpeded  in  the  sphere 
of  Brahma,  or  in  any  other.  By  the  reverse,  the  contrary. — 
The  contrary  of  unimpediment  is  obstruction,  which  proceeds 
from  want  of  power,  every  where  obstructed. 

Thus  sixteen  efficient  causes  and  effects  have  been  enume 
rated  :  what  they  comprehend  (or  amount  to)  is  next  described. 

COMMENT- 

In  these  two  verses  the  efficient  causes  of  the  various  con 
ditions  of  subtile  body  and  their  effects,  or  its  conditions, 
are  detailed. 

These  causes  and  effects  are  collectively  sixteen,  eight  of 
each  :  the  former  are  positive  and  negative,  as  diversified  by 
the  qualities  of  goodness  and  foulness  (ver.  23);  and  the  effects 
respectively  correspond.  They  are  accordingly. 

Cause.  Effect. 

1.  Virtue.  2.  Elevation  in  the  scale  of  being. 

3.  Vice.  4.  Degradation  in  the  scale  of  being. 

5.  Knowledge.  6.  Liberation  from  existence. 

7.  Ignorance.  8.  Bondage  or  transmigration. 

9.  Dispassion.  10.  Dissolution  of  the  subtile  bodily  form, 

11.  Passion.  12.  Migration. 

13.  Power.  14.  Unimpediment. 

15.  Feebleness.  16.  Obstruction. 

25 


(     194     ) 

By  '  virtue/  dherma,  both  religious  and  moral  merit  are  in 
tended.  Ascent,  going  upward,  is  elevation  to  a  more  exalted 
station  in  another  birth ;  the  term  stkdna  implying  both  place 
and  degree.  According  to  GAURAPADA,  this  ascent  is  eightfold, 
and  the  subtile  frame  may  after  death  assume  a  new  body 
amongst  the  various  classes  of  spirits,  Pisachas,  Kakshasas, 
Yakshas,  and  Gandherbas ;  or  may  attain  a  place  in  the  heaven, 
of  Indra ;  of  Soma,  or  the  moon  ;  of  the  Prajapatis,  or  progeni 
tors  of  mankind  ;  or  even  in  the  region  of  Brahmd.  It  is  a 
curious,  though  perhaps  an  accidental  coincidence,  that  the 
Syrians  and  Egyptians  enumerated  also,  according  to  Plato 
(Epinomis),  eight  orders  of  heavenly  beings  :  their  places,  how 
ever,  seem  to  be  the  planets  exclusively.  The  author  of  the  S. 
T.  Kaumudi  understands  by  ascent,  or  elevation,  ascent  to 
the  six  superterrestrial  regions.  Dyu,  or  Bhuvar  loJca,  the  at 
mosphere  ;  Siver  loka,  the  heaven  of  Indra;  Mahar  loka,  Jana- 
loka,  and  Tapololca,  worlds  of  sages  and  saints ;  and  Satya 
loka,  of  Brahma.  By  degradation  he  understands  descent  to 
the  subterrene  regions,  Pdtdla,  Rasdtahi,  &c.  These  notions 
are,  however,  not  incompatible,  as  rewards  and  punishments  in 
heaven  and  hell  are  put  temporary,  and  subtile  body  must  even 
afterwards  assume  terrestrial  form,  and  undergo  a  series  of 
migrations  before  escape  from  the  bondage  of  existence  can  be 
finally  accomplished. 

Bondage  is  said  by  the  commentators  to  be  of  three  kinds, 
intending  thereby  three  different  errors  or  misconceptions  of 
the  character  of  soul  and  nature  ;  the  prevalence  of  which  pre 
cludes  all  hope  of  final  emancipation.  '  These  errors  or  bonds 
are,  1.  Prdkritika ;  the  error  or  bondage  of  the  materialists, 
who  assert  soul  in  nature  (or  matter) :  2.  Vaikritika;  the 
error  of  another  class  of  materialists,  who  confound  soul  with 
any  of  the  products  of  nature,  as  the  elements,  the  senses, 
egotism  or  intellect :  and,  3.  Ddkshina ;  the  error  or  bondage 
of  those  who,  ignorant  of  the  real  character  of  soul,  and  blind 
ed  bythe  hop  e  of  advantage,  engage  in  moral  and  religioui 


(     195     ) 

observances  :'  as  VA'CHESPATI*.  These  errors  confine  the  soul 
to  its  subtile  material  frame  for  various  protracted  periods  ;  as, 
for  instance,  in  the  case  of  those  who  identify  soul  with  sense, 
for  ten  manwantaraa,  or  above  three  thousand  millions  of 
years  (3,084,480,000). 

By  dispasslon  occurs  'absorption  into  nature/  prakritl 
lay  erf  ;  or,  as  the  Kaumudi  and  Chandrikd  express  it, '  reso 
lution  into  the  chief  one  and  the  restj.'  GAURAPA'DA  makes 
the  meaning  of  the  phrase  sufficiently  clear :  according  to  him 
it  signifies  the  resolution  of  even  the  subtile  body  into  its 
constituent  elements  :  but  this  is  not  in  this  case  equivalent 
to  liberation  ;  it  is  only  the  term  of  one  series  of  migrations, 
soul  being  immediately  reinvested  with  another  person,  and 
commencing  a  new  career  of  migratory  existence  until  know 
ledge  is  attained. 


:  11 

^I^r 
XLVI. 


II  S 


THIS  is  an  intellectual  creation,  termed  obstruction, 
disability,  acquiescence,  and  perfectness.  By  disparity  of 
influence  of  qualities  the  sorts  of  it  are  fifty. 


r  *F^:  i  t^rfi;^ 
f  i% 


:  i 


(     196     ) 

-IT 


ir- 


gfgt  i  ^f   m^r^r  ^r^r  i  ^r- 
f    fe 


BHASHYA. 

This  aggregate  of  sixteen  causes  and  effects  is  called  an  in» 
telledual  creation.  Pratyaya  means  buddhi,  '  intellect  is  as 
certainment,"  &c.  (ver.  23).  This  intellectual  creation  is  of 
four  kinds,  obstruction,  disability,  acquiescence,  and  perfect- 
ness.  In  this  classification,  doubt  (obstruction)  is  ignorance  ; 
as  when  any  one  beholding  a  post  (at  a  distance)  is  in  doubt 
whether  it  is  a  post  or  a  man.  Disability  is  when,  even  though 
the  object  be  distinctly  seen,  the  doubt  cannot  be  dissipated. 
The  third  kind  is  called  acquiescence  ;  as  when  a  person  de 
clines  to  doubt  or  determine  whether  the  object  be  a  post  or 
not  ;  saying,  What  have  I  to  do  with  this.  The  fourth  kind 
is  perfectness  ;  as  when  the  delighted  observer  notices  a  creeper 
twining  round  the  object,  or  a  bird  perched  upon  it,  and  is 
certain  that  it  is  a  post.  By  disparity  of  influence  o 


(     197     ) 

ties. — By  the  unequal  (or  varied)  influence  of  the  qualities  of 
goodness,  foulness,  and  darkness,  acting  on  this  fourfold  intel 
lectual  creation,  there  are  fifty  modifications  of  it :  and  these 
kinds  in  which  severally  goodness,  foulness,  or  darkness  pre 
vails,  and  the  other  two  are  subordinate,  are  next  parti 
cularized. 

COMMENT- 

In  this  and  the  five  following  stanzas  the  modifications  of 
the  causes  and  consequences,  or  the  conditions  of  existence  pro 
duced  by  the  intellectual  faculties,  as  influenced  by  the  three 
qualities,  are  detailed  and  classified. 

By  '  intellectual  creation,'  pratyaya  serga*,  is  to  be  under 
stood  the  various  accidents  of  human  life  occasioned  by  the 
operations  of  the  intellect,  or  the  exercise  of  its  faculties,  virtue, 
knowledge,  dispassion,  power,  and  their  contraries.  Pratyaya 
properly  means  '  trust,'  but  is  here  considered  to  be  synonymous 
with  buddhi.  It  may  be  understood  as  implying  '  notion ;' 
and  pratyaya  serga  is  the  creation  or  existence  of  which  we 
have  a  notion  or  belief,  in  contradistinction  to  bodily  or  organic 
existence,  of  which  we  have  an  idea  or  sensible  perception  ; 
the  bhuta  sergcff,  or  '  elemental  creation.' 

Existence  then,  dependent  on  the  faculties  of  the  intellect 
and  their  consequences,  is  further  distinguished  as  of  four 
kinds :  1.  '  Obstruction/  viparyaya,  is  explained  by  VACHES- 
PATI  *  ignorance'  (ajndna),  by  GAURAPADA  '  doubt'  (sansaya)  : 
2.  '  Disability,'  asakti,  is  imperfection  of  the  instruments  or 
senses  :  3.  Tiisliti  is  '  acquiescence'  or  '  indifference  :'  and,  4. 
S-iddhi  is  *  complete  or  perfect  knowledge.'  'In  the  three 
first  are  comprised  the  seven  intellectual  faculties,  virtue  and 
the  rest  (see  p.  88),  all  except  knowledge,  which  is  comprehen 
ded  in  perfectnessj.'  S.  Tatwa  Kaumuctt.  This  is  the  col- 


I  J 

SHRT  vRf^rt  ursflRF^cwfa;  ftrafi1  ^ 


(     198     ) 

lective  or  generic  division.  Each  genus  is  again  divided  so  as 
to  form  fifty  species,  according  as  they  are  affected  by  the 
three  qualities,  or  the  predominance  of  one,  and  the  depression 
of  another*.  The  species  are  enumerated  in  the  succeeding  verse. 


XL  VII. 

THERE  are  five  distinctions  of  obstruction  ;  and, 
from  defect  of  instruments,  twenty-eight  of  disability  : 
acquiescence  is  ninefold  ;  perfectness  eightfold. 


*frfT 


STRFR  i 


BHA'SHYA. 


Five  distinctions  of  obstruction ;  namely,  obscurity,  illusion 
extreme  illusion,  gloom,  and  utter  darkness  :  these  will  pre 
sently  be  explained.  There  are  twenty-eight  kinds  of  disabi 
lity  from  defec  tof  instruments ;  which  also  we  shall  describe. 
Acquiescence  is  ninefold,  being  the  kinds  of  knowledge  par- 


(     199     ) 

taking  of  the  quality  of  foulness  in  an  ascetic.  Perfectncss  is 
eightfold,  which  in  holy  men  consists  also  of  the  kinds  of 
knowledge  partaking  of  the  quality  of  goodness.  These  wiU 
all  be  explained  in  order ;  and  first  of  obstruction. 

COMMENT. 

We  have  here  the  fifty  varieties  of  intellectual  creation,  or 
conditions  dependent  upon  the  faculties  of  intellect,  simply 
enumerated  under  each  head  respectively. 

The  text  in  each  case  is  limited  to  the  enumeration  of  the 
number  of  the  varieties,  leaving  their  designations  and  des 
criptions  to  be  supplied  by  the  scholia  :  accordingly  we  have  in 
the  JBhdshf/a  the  five  distinctions  of  obstructions  specified. 
They  are  referred  to  in  the  text,  in  the  succeeding  stanza,  for 
the  purpose  of  enumerating  their  subdivisions,  and  it  is  un 
necessary  therefore  to  enter  upon  the  detail  here. 


•v  fv 


?T*?T 

XL  VIII. 

THE  distinctions  of  obscurity  are  eightfold,  as  also 
those  of  illusion  ;  extreme  illusion  is  eighteenfold,  and 
so  is  utter  darkness. 


(     200     ) 


i  <T*IT  <jrf^g»FNpJ  sgr*  srffor 


f%3 


BHASHYA. 

Obscurity  is  eightfold;  final  dissolution  being  so  distin 
guished  through  ignorance  ;  as  when  a  person  thinks  that  soul 
merges  into  the  eight  forms  of  prakriti,  or  the  five  rudiments, 
egotism,  intellect,  and  nature,  and  thence  concludes,  I  am 
liberated  :  this  is  eightfold  obscurity.  The  same  is  the  num 
ber  of  kinds  of  illusion  ;  in  consequence  of  which,  Indra  and 
the  gods,  being  attached  to  the  possession  of  the  eight  kinds 
of  super-human  power,  such  as  minuteness  and  the  rest,  do 
not  obtain  liberation,  but  upon  the  loss  of  their  power  migrate 
again  :  this  is  called  eightfold  illusion.  Extreme  illusion  is  of 
ten  kinds,  accordingly  as  the  five  objects  of  sense,  sound,  touch, 
form,  taste,  and  smell,  are  sources  of  happiness  to  the  gods  or 
to  men.  In  these  ten  objects  (or  the  five  objects  of  sense 
twice  told)  consists  extreme  illusion,  Gloom  is  eighteen/old.  — 
The  faculties  of  superhuman  power  are  eight  sources,  and  the 
objects  of  sense,  human  or  divine,  are  ten,  making  eighteen  ; 
and  the  feeling  that  makes  men  rejoice  in  the  enjoyment  of 
$ese  eighteen,  and  given  for  the  want  of  them,  is  gloom 


(     201     ) 

Utter  darkness  has  in  like  manner  eighteen  varieties,  origin  a = 
ting  with  the  eightfold  superhuman  power  and  the  ten  objects 
of  perception ;  but  it  applies  to  the  profound  grief  felt  by  one 
who  dies  amidst  the  abundance  of  sensual  delights  in  the 
season  of  enjoyment,  or  who  falls  from  the  command  of  super 
human  faculties  ;  that  is  utter  darkness.  In  this  manner  the 
five  varieties  of  obstruction,  obscurity  and  the  rest,  are  sever* 
ally  subdivided,  making  sixty-two  varieties. 

COMMENT. 

The  five  kinds  of  obstruction,  ignorance>  or  uncertainty,  al 
luded  to  in  the  preceding  stanza,  are  here  specified,  and  their 
subdivisions  enumerated. 

*  Obstruction/  viparyaya*,  means,  properly,  whatever  ob 
structs  the  soul's  object  of  final  liberation  :  it  is  consequently 
any  cause  of  bondage,  of  confinement  to  worldly  existence,  or 
of  perpetual  migration,  and  is  therefore  one  of  the  four  ele 
ments  of  the  creation  of  the  world ;  as,  if  spirit  was  not  so 
confined,  created  forms  would  never  have  existed.  So  the 
Sutra  of  KAPILA  has, '  Bondage  is  from  obstruction;-)-'  but  libe 
ration  depends  on  knowledge :  bondage  therefore  arises  from 
ignorance,  and  ignorance  or  error  is  obstruction.  GAURAPADA 
accordingly  uses  sansaya^,  '  doubt'  or  '  error/  as  the  synonyme 
of  viparyaya ;  and  the  specification  of  its  sub-species  confirms 
this  sense  of  the  term,  as  they  are  all  hinderances  to  rural 
emancipation,  occasioned  by  ignorance  of  the  difference  be 
tween  soul  and  nature,  or  by  an  erroneous  estimate  of  the 
sources  of  happiness,  placing  it  in  sensual  pleasure  or  super 
human  might. 

The  five  varieties  of  obstruction  or  error  are,  '  obscurity/ 
tamas ;  illusion/  moha  ;  extreme  illusion/  mahdmoha ;  '  gloom/ 
tdmisra ;  '  utter  darkness/  andhatdmisra.  The  distinctions 


t  ^ 
26 


<     202     ) 

•are  more  subtle   than  precise,  but  their  general  purport  is 
sufficiently   obvious ;    they   all   imply   ignorance   of  self,   and 
thirst   of  pleasure   and   power.     Another   enumeration,  that  of 
the    Yoga,    or  Pdtanjala    school,    as  repeated    by    VIJNANA 
BHIKSHU,  calls  the  five  species,  '  ignorance'  (avidyd),  '  egoism" 
(asmitd),   '  love'    (r&ga),   '  hate'    (dwesha),    and   '  idle   terror, 
(abhinive'sa),  as  fear  of  death  and  the  like*.     They  are   called 
also  in  the  same  system,   '  the   five   afflictions^.'      These   are 
identified  with  the  species  named  in  the  text.     Obscurity  is 
that   ignorance   which   believes   soul   to  be   sealed  in  primary 
nature,  or  one   of  its   first   seven  products ;    and  is  therefore 
eightfold.     Illusion  is  that  egoism  that  exults  in  the  appro 
priation  of  the   eight    superhuman    faculties ;     and    is   con 
sequently  eightfold  also.    Extreme  illusion,  or  love,  is  ad 
diction   to  sensual   objects,   as  they   are   grateful  respectively 
to   gods   and  men:     therefore    this    class   of  impediments   to 
liberation   is   tenfold.     Gloom,   or   hate,   is  of  eighteen  kinds ; 
ten   as  affecting   the  ten   objects   of  sense,   or  the   five   divine 
and   five    human,   as   before    distinguished,    and    termed  by 
GAUKAPADA  drishta,]. l  seen,'  perceived  by  men  ;  and  anusra- 
vikd\\,  '  heard   traditionally,'  by  men,   of  the   gods  :  and   eight 
connected   with  the  possession   of  the  eight  superhuman  facul 
ties.     The  mental  conditions  here  intended  are  those  of  fierce* 
ness  and  impatience,   with  which   sensual  enjoyments  are  pur 
sued,  or  superhuman  powers  are  exercised.     Utter  darkness,  or 
terror,   is  the  fear  of  death  in  men ;  and  in  gods,   the  dread  of 
expulsion  from  heaven  by  the  Asuras  :  in  either  case  the  loss  of 
pleasure  and  power  is  the  thing  lamented  ;  and  as  their  sources 
are  eighteen,   so  many  are   the  subdivisions  of  this  condition. 
These  distinctions   are  said  to  be  the  work  of  former  teachers ; 
as  in  the  S.  Pravachana  Bhdshya :  '  The  subdivisions  are  as 


(     203     ) 

formerly  described :  that  is,  the  subdivisions  of  obstruction, 
which  is  said  to  be  of  five  species,  are  such  as  were  fully  de 
tailed  by  former  teachers,  but  are  in  the  Sutra  but  briefly 
alluded  to,  for  fear  of  prolixity*/ 


r*_  P   .       _»v  ^      « 

I  %\  II 


XLIX. 

DEPRAVITY  of  the  eleven  organs,  together  with  in 
juries  of  the  intellect,  are  pronounced  to  be  disability, 
The  injuries  of  intellect  are  seventeen,  by  inversion 
of  acquiescence  and  perfectness. 


(     204     ) 

BHASHYA. 

From  defect  of  instruments  there  are  twenty-eight  kinds  of 
disability ;  this  has  been  declared  (ver.  47)  :  these  are,  depra 
vity  of  the  eleven  organs,  or  deafness,  blindness,  paralysis,  loss 
of  taste,  loss  of  smell,  dumbness,  mutilation,  lameness,  con 
stipation,  impotence,  and  insanity.  Together  with  injuries  of 
the  intellect :  as,  together  with  these,  there  are  twenty-eight 
kinds  of  disability,  there  are  seventeen  kinds  of  injuries  of  the 
intellect.  By  inversion  of  acquiescence  and  perfectness :  that 
is,  there  are  nine  kinds  of  acquiesence,  and  eight  of  perfect- 
ness  ;  and  with  the  circumstances  that  are  the  reverse  of  these 
(seventeen),  the  eleven  above  specified,  compose  the  twenty- 
eight  varieties  of  disability.  The  kinds  of  injury  of  the  in 
tellect  which  are  the  reverse  of  (the  sorts  of)  acquiescence  and 
perfectness  will  be  understood  from  the  detail  of  their  varieties. 

The  nine  kinds  of  acquiescence  are  next  explained. 

COMMENT- 

The  various  kinds  of  the  second  class  of  conditions  or  dis 
ability  are  here  enumerated. 

'  Disability,'  asakti,  or  incapability  of  the  intellect  to  dis 
charge  its  peculiar  functions*,  is  the  necessary  result  of  imper 
fection  of  the  senses,  or  of  any  of  the  organs  of  perception  and 
of  action.  But  besides  these,  which  are  sufficiently  obvious, 
such  as  blindness,  deafness,  and  any  other  organic  defect,  there 
are  seventeen  affections  of  the  intellect  itself  equally  injurious 
to  its  efficiency.  These  are  described  as  the  contraries  of  the 
conditions  which  constitute  the  classes  acquiescence  and  per 
fectness.  Under  the  former  head  are  enumerated,  dissatisfac 
tion  as  to  notions  of  nature,  means,  time,  and  luck,  and  addic 
tion  to  enjoyment  of  the  five  objects  of  sense,  or  the  pleasures 
of  sight,  hearing,  touching,  &c.  The  contraries  of  perfectness 


(     205     ) 

are,  want  of  knowledge,  whether  derivable  from  reflection, 
from  tuition,  or  from  study,  endurance  of  the  three  kinds  of 
pain,  privation  of  friendly  intercourse,  and  absence  of  purity  or 
of  liberality. 


m:  n  ^  *  n 

L. 

NINE  sorts  of  acquiescence  are  propounded ;  four 
internal,  relating  to  nature,  to  means,  to  time,  and  to 
luck ;  five  external,  relative,  to  abstinence  from  (en 
joyment  of)  objects. 


(     20G     ) 


i  <T*TT 

?ra  ^frfrr: 
fa*  i 


BHASHYA. 

Five  internal  sorts  of  acquiescence.  —  Those  which  are  in  the 
individual  are  internal.  They  are  said  to  relate  to  nature,  to' 
means,  to  time,  and  to  luck.  The  first  is,  when  a  person  under 
stands  what  nature  is,  its  being  with  or  without  qualities,  and 
thence  knows  a  principle  (of  existence)  to  be  a  product  of 
nature  ;  but  knows  this  only,  and  is  satisfied  :  he  does  not 
obtain  liberation  :  this  is  acquiescence  in  regard  to  nature. 
The  second  is,  when  a  person,  ignorant  of  the  principles  (of 
existence),  depends  upon  external  means,  such  as  the  triple 
staff,  the  water-pot,  and  other  implements  (used  by  ascetics)  : 
liberation  is  not  for  him  :  this  is  acquiescence  in  regard  to  means. 
Acquiescence  in  regard  to  time  is  when  a  person  satisfies  him 
self  that  liberation  must  occur  in  time,  and  that  it  is  unne 
cessary  to  study  first  principles  :  such  a  one  does  not  obtain 
liberation.  And  in  the  same  way  acquiescence  as  relates  to 
luck  is  when  a  person  is  content  to  think  that  by  good  luck 
liberation  will  be  attained.  These  are  four  kinds  of  acquie 
scence.  Five  external,  relative  to  abstinence  from  (enjoyment 
of  objects).  —  The  external  sorts  of  acquiescence  are  five  ;  from 


'(     207     ) 

•abstinence  from  enjoyment  of  (five)  objects  of  sense ;  that  I» 
when  a  person  abstains  from  gratification  through  sound, 
touch,  form,  flavour,  and  smell ;  such  abstinence  proceeding 
from  observation  of  (the  evils  of)  acquiring,  preserving,  waste, 
attachment  (to  sensual  pleasures),  and  injuriousness.  Acquir 
ing  is  pain  (or  trouble),  for  the  sake  of  increase,  by  the  pastur 
age  of  cattle,  trade,  acceptance  of  gifts,  and  servitude.  There 
is  pain  in  the  preservation  of  what  has  been  acquired ;  and  if 
they  be  enjoyed,  they  are  wasted  ;  and  waste,  again,  is  vexa 
tion.  When  attachment  to  sensual  pleasures  prevails,  the 
organs  have  no  repose  :  that  is  the  fault  of  such  attachment 
Without  detriment  to  created  things  there  is  no  enjoyment 
(of  sensible  objects) ;  and  this  is  the  defect  of  injuriousness. 
From  observing  then  the  evil  consequences  of  acquiring  and 
the  rest,  abstinence  from  enjoyment  of  the  five  objects  of 
sense  is  practised ;  and  these  are  the  five  sorts  of  external 
acquiescence.  From  the  variety  of  these  internal  and  external 
kinds  proceed  the  nine  sorts  of  acquiescence.  Their  names 
are  differently  enumerated  in  other  works,  or  ambhaSj  salilam, 
ogha,  vrishti,  sutamas,  pdram,  sunetram,  ndrikam,  and 
anuttamdmbhasikam :  and  from  the  reverse  of  these  kinds  of 
acquiescence,  constituting  the  varieties  of  disability,  injuries 
of  the  intellect  arise,  named  (according  to  the  last  mentioned 
nomenclature)  anambhas,  asalilam,  and  so  on.  From  the 
contrariety  of  these,  therefore,  are  inferred  the  injuries  of 
the  intellect. 

Perfectness  is  next  described. 


COMMENT. 

The  different  kinds  of  acquiescence,  apathy,  or  indifference, 
are  specified  in  this  verse. 

The  kinds  of  acquiescence,  content,  or  complacency,  tushti, 
are  of  two  descriptions  ;  internal  or  spiritual,  ddhydtmiJca,  and 
external  or  sensible,  bahya.  GAUKAPADA  explains  the  former, 


(     208     ) 

*  being  in  self  or  spirit*/  VACHESPATI  defines  them,  '  Those 
kinds  of  acquiescence  are  called  internal  which  proceed  from 
discrimination  of  self,  as  different  from  naturef.'  According 
to  VIJNANA  BHIKSHU>  they  are  those  principles  or  sentiments 
which  preside  over  collected  or  composed  soulj.  Of  the  dif 
ferent  species,  the  first,  or  that  which  relates  to  nature,  ac 
knowledges  it  as  the  radical  principle  of  all  things,  but  expects 
that  as  every  thing  is  but  a  modification  of  nature  so  nature 
will  effect  all  that  is  necessary,  even  liberation,  for  example, 
and  the  individual  /  remains  passive  and  completed.  Another 
person,  as  the  means  of  liberation,  adopts  a  religious  or 
mendicant  order,  or  at  least  bears  the  emblems,  as  the  staff, 
the  water-pot,  and  the  like :  the  term  vividikd  used  in  the 
Bhdshya  is  of  doubtful  import,  and  is  perhaps  an  error. 
Others  suppose  that  liberation  must  come  in  time,  or  at 
least  by  a  long  continued  course  of  meditation.  Others 
imagine  it  may  come  by  good  luck  ;  and  contenting  themselves 
with  these  notions  or  practices,  omit  the  only  means  of  being 
freed  from  existence,  discriminative  meditation.  The  five 
external  kinds  of  acquiescence  are  self-denial,  or  abstinence 
from  the  five  objects  of  sensual  gratification ;  not  from  any 
philosophic  appreciation  of  them,  but  from  dread  of  the  trouble 
and  anxiety  which  attends  the  means  of  procuring  and  enjoy 
ing  worldly  pleasures  ;  such  as  acquiring  wealth,  preserving  it, 
spending  it,  incessant  excitement  and  injury  or  cruelty  to 
others.  Besides  the  terms  ordinarily  significant  of  those  divi 
sions  of  acquiescence,  the  Scholiasts  specify  other  words,  the 
usual  sense  of  which  is  quite  different,  and  which  may  there 
fore  be  regarded  as  the  slang  or  mystical  nomenclature  of  the 


i     t 
:  i    J 


y 


(     209     ) 

followers  of  the  Yoga,.  There  is  some  difference  in  the  precise 
expressions,  but  they  are  of  a  similar  purport  in  general.  The 
first  four,  the  synonymes  of  the  internal  modes  of  acquiescence  . 
are  alike  in  all  the  authorities  ;  or  ambhas*, '  water  ;'  salila^, 
also  '  water  ;'  ogha+,  '  quantity  ;'  and  vrishtill,' '  rain.'  GAURA- 
PADA  then  has  for  the  five  exterior  modes,  sutamas§,  '  great 
darkness ;'  pdra^,  '  shore  ;'  sune'tra**,  (  a  beautiful  eye  ;'  nd- 
rika-ff,  ( feminine  ;'  and  anuttamdmbhisika+l,  '  unsurpassed 
water/  VAGHESPATI  makes  them,  p&ram,  supdram\\\\,  '  good 
shore  ;'  apdram§§,  '  shoreless  ;'  amuttamambhas^ ,  '  unsur 
passed  water ;'  and  uttamdmbhas*** ,  *  excellent  water.'  The 
Chandrikdj  has  the  same,  except  in  the  third  place,  where  the 
term  is  pdrdpdrflftt,  '  both  shores  ;'  with  which  the  8.  Prav. 
Bh.  agrees.  No  explanation  of  the  words  is  any  where  given, 
nor  is  any  reason  assigned  for  their  adoption. 


:  \\  H  i  n 

LI. 


REASONING,  hearing,  study,  prevention  of  pain  of 
three  sorts,  intercourse  of  friends,  and  purity  (or  gift) 
are  perfections  (or  means  thereof).  The  fore-mention 
ed  three  are  curbs  of  perfectness. 


i  a*r.  i 

**  t 


ttf 

27' 


(     210     ) 


t  f% 


2- 


wr 


faf^t  i 


qri% 


- 


rr 


mqqr 


it: 


f%  ^rp 


' 


(     211      ) 


BHA'SHYA, 

Reasoning  ;  as  when  a  person  always  reasons.  What  here  is 
truth  ?  What  is  the  future  ?  What  is  final  felicity  ?  How  may 
I  attain  the  object  (of  my  existence)  ?  and  from  reflecting  in 
this  manner,  the  knowledge  is  acquired  that  soul  is  different 
from  nature  ;  that  intellect,  egotism,  the  rudiments,  the  senses, 
the  elements,  are  several  and  distinct.  In  this  manner  know 
ledge  of  the  (twenty-five)  principles  is  attained,  by  which 
liberation  is  accomplished.  This  is  the  first  kind  of  perfect- 
ness,  called  reasoning.  Next,  from  knowledge  acquired  by 
hearing  proceeds  knowledge  of  nature,  intellect,  egotism,  the 
rudiments,  the  senses,  and  the  elements  ;  whence  liberation 
ensues  :  this  is  pcrfectness  by  hearing.  When  from  study,  or 
the  perusal  of  the  Yedas  and  other  (sacred)  writings,  know 
ledge  of  the  twenty-five  principles  is  acquired  ;  that  is  the 
third  kind  of  pcrfectness.  Prevention  of  the  three  kinds  of 
pain.  —  When,  for  the  purpose  of  preventing  the  three  kinds 
of  pain,  internal,  external,  and  saperhuman,  a  holy  teacher  has 
been  attended,  and  liberation  is  derived  from  his  counsel  ;  then 
this  constitutes  the  fourth  kind  of  perfectness.  This  is  three- 
fold,  with  reference  to  the  three  different  sorts  of  pain,  and 
makes,  with  the  three  preceding,  six  varieties  of  perfectness. 
Next,  'intercourse  of  friend*>\u&  when  a  friend,  having  acquired 
knowledge,  obtains  liberation  :  this  the  seventh  kind  of  perfect- 
ness,  Gift  ;  as  when  a  person  assists  holy  men,  by  donations 


(     212     ) 

of  a  dwelling,  of  herbs,  of  a  staff,  a  wallet,  food,  or  clothing ; 
and  (in  requital)  receives  from  them  knowledge,  and  thus  ob 
tains  liberation  :  this  is  the  eighth  sort  of  perfectness.  In 
other  books  these  eight  kinds  of  perfectness  are  termed  /dram, 
sutdram,  tdrat&ram,  pramodam,  pramoditam,  pramodamd- 

nam,  ramyakam,  and  sadfrpramuditam. From  contrariety 

to  these,  the  injuries  of  intellect  which  occur,  or  causes  of  dis 
ability,  are  termed  atdram,  astitardm,  &c. ;  thus  completing 
the  twenty-eight  kinds  of  disability,  as  in  the  text  (ver.  49), 
"  Depravity  of  the  eleven  organs,  together  with  injuries  of  the 
intellect,"  &c.  Thus  the  contraries  of  the  sorts  of  acquiescence 
being  nine,  and  the  contraries  of  the  kinds  of  perfectness  being 
eight,  they  form  seventeen  injuries  of  intellect ;  and  these,  with 
the  eleven  defects  of  the  organs,  constitute  twenty-eight  kinds 
of  disability,  as  previously  stated. 

In  this  way  the  various  kinds  of  obstruction,  disability, 
acquiescence,  and  perfectness,  have  been  affirmatively  and 
negatively  described.  Again,  the  forementioned  three  are 
curbs  of  perfectness. — Forementioned;  that  is,  obstruction, 
disability,  and  acquiescence;  they  are  curbs  of  perfectness 
threefold  curbs  from  their  severalty.  As  an  elephant  is  kept 
in  check  when  restrained  by  a  goad  (or  curb),  so,  impeded  by 
obstruction,  disability,  and  acquiescence,  the  world  suffers 
ignorance  :  therefore  abandoning  them,  perfectness  alone  is  to 
be  pursued  ;  for  by  a  person  having  perfectness  knowledge  is 
attained,  and  thence  liberation. 

It  was  stated  (ver.  40)  that  "  subtile  body  migrates,  invested 
with  dispositions :"  those  dispositions  were  previously  said  to 
be  virtue  and  the  rest,  eight  in  number,  modifications  (or 
faculties)  of  intellect ;  which  again  have  been  described  as 
modified  by  obstruction,  disability,  acquiescence,  and  perfect- 
ness.  These  (together)  constitute  intellectual  creation,  also 
called  dispositional  (or  conditional)  :  but  subtile  body  is  called 
a  rudimental  (or  personal)  creation,  extending  throughout  the 
fourteen  sorts  of  created  things.  (See  v.  53.)  It  then  becomes 
a  question,  whether  soul's  purpose  is  accomplished  by  one  kind 
of  creation,  or  by  both  ?  This  is  next  explained. 


(     213     ) 

COMMENT. 

Tho  different  kinds  of  perfectness  are  here  specified. 

By  '  perfectness,'  siddhi*,  is  here  to  be  understood  the  means 
of  perfecting  or  fulfilling  the  purpose  of  soul,  or  the  conditions 
essential  to  its  attainment ;  the  circumstances  productive  of 
knowledge ;  the  necessary  consequence  of  which  is  exemption 
from  future  transmigration.  '  f  Reasoning,  hearing,  study, 
intercourse  of  friends,  and  gift,  are  secondary  kinds  of  perfect- 
ness,  as  subsidiary  to  the  prevention  of  the  three  kinds  of  pain, 
which  constitutes  a  triple  principal  class  :  they  are  respectively 
distinguished  as  objects,  and  the  means  of  effecting  those 
objects/  S.  Taiva  Kaumudi.  Reasoning,  according  to 
VACHESPATI,  is  '  investigation  of  scriptural  authority  by  dia 
lectics  which  are  not  contrary  to  the  scriptures  :'  and  investi 
gation  is  defined,  :  refutation  of  dubious  doctrine,  and  esta 
blishment  of  positive  conclusions^.'  '  Hearing  is  oral  instruc 
tion,  or  rather  the  knowledge  thence  derived,  or  knowledge 
derived  either  from  hearing  another  person  read,  or  from  ex 
pounding  a  work||.'  8.  Pr.  Bh.  Intercourse  of  friends^  is 
explained  in  the  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi  to  signify  ' dissatisfac 
tion  with  solitary  inquiry,  and  discussion  with  a  teacher,  a 
pupil,  or  a  fellow-studentHV  VIJNANA  BHIKSHU  defines  it 
'  acquirement  of  knowledge  from  a  benevolent  visitor,  who, 
comes  to  give  instruction**.'  VACHESPATI  and  NARAYANA 
agree  in  rendering  ddna-ff — which  GAURAPADA  explains  by 


a  J  aTr^mWi^^mryTirmfr^^  i 


i    §  gf^rfir.  i     ^  g 
!  *•- 

:  i        tf-  ^R  i 


(     214     ) 

1  gift,  liberality/  particularly  to  religious  characters-by  \suddhi*, 
'  purity  ;'  meaning  the  purity  of  discriminative  knowledge  ; 
deriving  it  from  the  root  <iaipt,  '  to  purify ;'  and  not  from 
rfdj,  '  to  give/  The  former  cites  the  authority  of  PATANJALI 
for  this  sense  of  one  kind  of  perfectness  :  '  Undisturbedness  of 
discriminative  knowledge,  that  is,  purity  ;  which  is  not  attain 
ed  except  through  long  repeated  and  uninterrupted  practice  of 
veneration,  That  is  also  comprehended  in  discrimination  by 
the  term  ddna\\.  He  also  observes  that  others  interpret 
it 'gift,  by  which  a  sage,  being  propitiated,  imparts  know 
ledge^'  The  S.  Prav.  Bh.  gives  this  interpretation  only!!". 
The  term  for  '  curb,'  ankusa**,  is  the  goad  or  iron  hook  used  to 
guide  an  elephant :  it  is  here  explained  by  nivdrana,  6  hinder 
ing  ;'  and  '  as  obstruction,  disability,  and  acquiescence  hinder 
perfectness,  they  are  to  be  shunnedff / 


L1I. 

WITHOUT  dispositions  there  would  be  no  subtile  per 
son  :  without  person  there  would  be  no  pause  of  dispo 
sitions  :  wherefore  a  twofold  creation  is  presented,  one 
termed  personal,  the  other  intellectual. 


J 


(     '215     ) 


BHASHYA. 

Without  dispositions,  without  intellectual  creations,  there 
ivoiM  be  no  subtile  person,  no  rudimental  creation  ;  from  the 
non-assumption  of  repeated  successive  bodily  forms,  without 
the  necessary  influence  of  anterior  conditions  (or  dispositions). 
Withowitt  person,  without  rudimental  creation,  there  would  be 
no  pause  of  dispositions  ;  from  the  indispensability  of  virtue 
or  vice  for  the  attainment  of  either  subtile  or  gross  body,  and 
from  the  non-priority  of  either  creation,  they  being  mutually 
initiative,  like  the  seed  and  the  germ.  There  is  no  fault  in 
this,  for  (the  relation)  is  that  of  species,  it  does  not  imply  the 
mutual  relation  of  individuals.  Thence  proceeds  a  twofold 
creation,  one  termed  conditional  (or  intellectual),  the  other 
rudimental  (or  personal),  Further  — 

COMMENT. 

It  is  here  explained  that  a  double  condition  of  existence,  a 
twofold  creation,  necessarily  prevails  ;  one  proceeding  from  the 
intellectual  faculties,  the  other  from  the  rudimental  elements  ; 
each  being  indispensable  to  the  other. 

It  was  stated  (ver.  40)  that  subtile  body  migrates,  invested 
with  dispositions  :  and  it  was  then  explained  (ver  43,  et  seq.) 
what  those  dispositions  or  conditions  were,  viz.  the  conditions 
of  the  intellect  (described  in  ver.  23),  or  virtue,  vice,  know 
ledge,  ignorance,  passion,  dispassion,  power,  and  debility. 
These  were  said  ^(v.  46)  to  constitute  an  intellectual  creation; 


(     -216     ) 

or  a  series  of  conditions  originating  in  affections  of  buddhi,  or 
the  intellectual  principle.  But  the  effects  of  these  dispositions, 
the  consequences  of  virtue  or  vice  and  the  rest,  can  only  be 
manifested  in  a  bodily  state,  and  therefore  require  necessarily 
a  creation  of  a  different  character,  personal  or  rudimental 
creation,  such  as  subtile  body,  investing  the  imperceptible 
products  of  nature ;  intellect  and  its  faculties  included.  Nor 
is  such  a  creation  indispensable  for  the  existence  or  exercise  of 
the  intellectual  conditions  or  sentiments  alone,  but  it  is  equally 
necessary  for  their  occasional  cessation  :  thus  virtue,  vice,  and 
the  rest  necessarily  imply  and  occasion  bodily  condition : 
bodily  condition  is  productive  of  acts  of  vice  and  virtue  ;  vice 
and  virtue,  again,  occasion  bodily  condition  ;  and  so  on  :  like 
the  seed  and  the  tree,  each  mutually  generative  of  the  other  : 
the  tree  bears  the  seed ;  from  the  seed  springs  the  tree,  again 
to  put  forth  seed  ;  and  so  on  for  ever  ;  neither  being  initiative, 
neither  being  final.  But  one  result  of  bodily  condition  is 
knowledge  ;  knowledge  is  liberation,  when  soul  is  disengaged  ; 
subtile  body  then  resolves  into  its  rudiments,  and  the  dis 
positions  or  conditions  of  the  intellect  terminate.  In  this  way 
there  are  two  creations,  the  bhdvdkhya*,  that  termed  '  con 
ditional  '  or  '  intellectual ;'  and  the  lingdkhya'f,  that  called 
'  rudimental'  or  '  personal.'  Both  these  seem  to  be  considered 
by  the  text,  as  well  as  by  GAUHAPA'DA  and  VA'CHESPATI,  as 
varieties  of  one  species  of  the  Pratyaya  sarga,  or  '  intellectual 
creation/  The  commentator  on  the  $.  Pravachana  so  far 
agrees  with  them,  but  he  seems  to  restrict  the  two  kinds 
more  closely  to  a  creation  of  intellect,  regarding  the  linga 
as  buddhi  itself,  and  the  blidva  as  its  conditions  or  dis 
positions.  Thus,  commenting  on  this  verse  of  the  Kdrikdt 
he  observes,  '  J3hAva  signifies  the  modes  of  the  apprehen 
sion  (or  the  faculties)  of  intelligence,  as  the  properties 
knowledge,  virtue,  and  the  rest.  Linya  is  the  great 


(     217     ) 

principle,  or  intelligence*.'  He  calls  them  both  samashti 
sarga,  '  a  collective  or  generic  creation.'  By  the  other  com 
mentators,  however,  the  lingct  is  also  called  the  tanmdtra,  or 
'  rudimental  creationf:'  and  it  further  seems  to  imply  '  gross 
body ;'  for  fruition,  which  is  one  of  soul's  objects,  cannot  be 
accomplished  without  both  bodies  ;  without  the  receptacle  that 
enjoys,  and  the  objects  to  be  enjoyed^.'  The  author  of  the 
Chandrikd  has  accordingly  adopted  a  totally  different  version 
of  this  passage,  understanding  by  bhdvdkhya,  not  any  reference 
to  intellectual  creation,  but  the  creation  of  sensible  objects, 
the  object  to  be  enjoyed ;  lingdkhya,  or  *  personal  creation/ 
being  the  enjoy er  :  '  Without  the  bh&vas,  or  present  objects  of 
sense,  the  lingo,,  or  aggregate  of  imperceptible  principles, 
intelligence  and  the  rest,  could  not  be  means  of  fruition ; 
whilst  without  intelligence  and  the  rest  there  could  be  no 
pause,  no  cessation,  of  the  means  of  enjoying  sensible  objects. 
This  is  the  purport  of  text||.'  And  he  defines  linga  to  be  *  that 
which  is  only  indicated,  which  is  actually  not  visible,  as  intel 
lect  and  the  rest ;'  and  bhdva,  *  that  object  which  is  perceived 
or  apprehended  by  the  senses,  the  class  of  sensible  objects§.' 

The  succession  of  the  two  kinds  of  creation,  as  mutually 
cause  and  effect,  is  said  by  VACHESPATI  to  be  eternal,  and  with 
out  a  beginning,  as  even  in  the  commencement  of  a  kalpa  bo 
dily  existence  results  from  the  conditions  of  similar  existence 
in  a  former 


foif  RI^ST   f^ftfir  i        f  fe- 


i         J 


t  ||  *rrt:  sR 

fe^r 


f&r  n^r^imT^^:  i 


28 


(     218     > 

3T5  fNjsq  1^  I^FT  4^*1  ¥RI%  II 


LIII. 

THE  divine  kinds  of  eight  sorts  ;  the  grovelling  is 
fivefold  ;  mankind  is  single  in  its  class.  This,  briefly, 
is  the  world  of  living  beings. 


era1 

BHASHYA. 

Divine,  of  eight  sorts  ;  Brahma,  Prajapatya,  Saumya,  Aindra, 
Gandherba,  Yaksha,  Rakshasha,  and  Paisacha.  Animals,  deer, 
birds,  reptiles,  and  immovable  substances  are  the  five  grovel- 
ling  kinds.  MwnJcind  is  single.  In  this  way  there  are  four 
teen  sorts  of  creatures,  there  being  three  classes  in  the  three 
worlds.  Which  is  supreme  in  each  is  next  explained. 

COMMENT.  1 

The  intellectual  or  rudimental  creation  hitherto  described 
has  been  that  of  creation  generally  ;  we  now  have  an  account 
of  specific  or  individual  creation,  composed  of  fourteen  classes 
of  beings. 

The  fourteen  classes  of  beings  are,  first,  eight  superhuman, 
or  Brahma,  that  of  BHAHMA  and  other  supreme  gods  ;  2.  PrA* 
japatya,  that  of  progenitors,  the  Menus,  the  Rishis,  or  divine 
sages;  3.  tiawnya,  lunar  or  planetary;  4.  Aindra,  that  of 
INDRA  and  divinities  of  the  second  order  ;  5.  Gdndhcrba,  that 
of  the  demigods  attendant  on  IXDRA,  and  of  similar  beings  ; 


(     219     ) 

6.  ltdkskasa,  that  of  demons,  foes  of  the  gods  ;  7.  Ydkxhay  that 
of  the  attendants  of  KUVERA  ;  8.  Paisacha,  that  of  mischiev 
ous  and  cruel  fiends.  These  are  divine  or  superhuman  beings. 
The  ninth  class  is  that  of  man,  which  contains  but  one  species. 
We  have  then  five  classes  of  inferior  beings  ;  or,  counting  from 
the  preceding,  10.  Animals,  or  domestic  animals,  pdsu;  11, 
Wild  animals,  as  deer  and  the  like,  tnriga ;  12.  Birds;  12. 
Keptiles,  or  creeping  things,  including  fish  sarisripa ;  and  14. 
Sthdvara,  fixed  things,  such  as  vegetables  and  minerals. 
These  constitute  the  vyashti  serya*,  specific  or  individual 
creation ;  or,  as  denominated  in  the  text,  the  bhautika  sarga, 
the  creation  of  bliutas,  '  beings  ;'  or  elemental  creation  ;  the 
forms  of  things  requiring  the  combination  of  the  gross  elements. 


II  18  II 

LIV, 

ABOVE,  there  is  prevalence  of  goodness  :  below,  the 
ereation  is  full  of  darkness  :  in  the  midst,  is  the  pre 
dominance  of  foulness,  from  BRAHMA  to  a  stock. 


i 


(     220     ) 


BHASHYA. 

Above:  in  the  eight  divine  regions.  Prevalence  of  goodness: 
the  extensiveness  or  predominance  of  the  quality  of  goodness. 
Above  is  goodness  predominant,  but  there  are  foulness  and 
darkness  also.  Below,  the  creation  is  full  of  darkness.  —  In 
animals  and  insensible  things  the  whole  creation  is  pervaded 
by  darkness  in  excess,  but  there  are  goodness  and  foulness. 
In  the  midst,  in  man,  foulness  predominates,  although  good 
ness  and  darkness  exist  ;  and  hence  men  for  the  most  part 
suffer  pain.  Such  is  the  world,  from  BRAHMA  to  a  stock  ;  from 
BRAHMA  to  immovable  ^  things.  Thus  non-elemental  creation, 
rudimental  creation,  conditional  and  elemental  creation,  in 
beings  of  divine,  mortal,  brutal,  and  (immoveable)  origin,  are 
the  sixteen  sorts  of  creation  effected  by  nature. 

COMMENT 

The  various  qualities  dominating  in  the  different  orders  of 
beings  are  specified  in  this  stanza. 

The  coexistence  of  the  several  qualities,  with  the  predomi 
nance  of  one  or  other  of  them,  in  different  beings,  has  been 
previously  explained  (p.  54),  as  well  as  the  different  orders  or 
states  of  existent  beings  ;  constituting,  according  to  GAURA- 
PADA,  sixteen  forms  or  kinds  of  creation  :  that  is,  apparently, 
each  of  the  four  classes  of  beings  proceeds  from  four  modifica 
tions  of  nature  ;  or,  from  the  invisible  principles,  from  the 
subtile  rudiments,  from  the  conditions  or  dispositions  of  in 
tellect,  and  from  the  gross  elements. 


IIXHII 


(     221     ) 
LV. 


THERE  does  sentient  soul  experience  pain,  arising 
from  decay  and  death,  until  it  be  released  from  its 
person  :  wherefore  pain  is  of  the  essence  (of  bodily 
existence). 


BHASHYA. 

:  in  the  bodies  of  gods,  men,  and  animals.  Pain  pro 
duced  lay  decay,  and  produced  by  death.  Sentient  soul:  soul 
having  sensibility.  Experiences  :  soul  experiences  ;  not  nature, 
nor  intellect,  nor  egotism,  nor  the  rudiments,  senses,  nor  gross 
elements.  How  long  does  it  suffer  pain  ?  this  (tke  text)  dis 
cusses.  Until  it  be  released  from  its  person.  As  long  as  it 
is  in  subtile  body,  composed  of  intellect  and  the  rest,  it  is 
discrete  (or  individualized);  and  as  long  as  migratory  body  does 


(     222     ) 

not  rest,  so  long,  in  brief,  soul  suffers  pain,  arising  from  decay 
and  death,  in  the  three  worlds.  Until  it  be  released  from  its 
person :  until  the  discontinuance  of  subtile  person.  In  the 
cessation  of  subtile  body  consists  liberation  ;  and  when  libera 
tion  is  obtained,  there  is  no  more  pain.  By  what  means,  then, 
can  liberation  be  effected  ?  Whenever  knowledge  of  the  twenty- 
five  principles,  the  characteristic  of  which  is  knowledge  of  the 
distinctness  of  soul  and  body,  is  attained ;  or  whenever  a 
person  knows  that  this  is  nature,  this  intellect,  this  egotism 
these  are  the  five  rudiments,  these  the  eleven  senses,  these 
the  five  elements,  and  this  is  soul,  separate  and  dissimilar 
from  them  all ;  then  from  such  knowledge  proceeds  cessation 
of  subtile  person,  and  thence  liberation. 

The  object  of  the  activity  (or  development  of  nature)  is 
next  explained. 

COMMENT- 

The  presence  of  soul  in  these  creations,  and  for  what  period, 
is  here  specified. 

Having  defined  the  different  objects  which  form  the  twenty- 
five  categories  or  tatwas  of  the  Sankhya  philosophy,  the  text 
now  comes  to  the  main  object  of  that  and  of  all  Hindu  systems, 
the  final  dissolution  of  the  connection  between  soul  and  body. 
The  rest  of  the  Kdrika  is  devoted  to  the  illustration  of  this 
topic.  In  this  verse  it  is  said  that  soul  experiences  pain  in 
the  different  stages  of  existence,  until  its  corporeal  frame  is 
discontinued  ;  for  soul  itself  is  not  susceptible  of  pain,  or  of 
decay,  or  death  :  the  site  of  these  things  is  nature,  but  nature 
is  unconscious,*  insensible  ;  and  the  consciousness  that  pain 
exists  is  restricted  to  soul,  though  soul  is  not  the  actual  seat  of 
pain  ;  its  experience  of  pain  depends  upon  its  connexion  with 
rudimental  person,  of  the  material  constituents  of  which,  decay, 
death,  and  pain  are  concomitants.  c  Pain  and  the  rest  are 
from  nature,  they  are  properties  of  intelligence.  How  do  they 
become  connected  with  sense  ?  Soul  (purusha)  is  that  which 
reposes  (s'cte)  in  body  (puri)  :  subtile  body  is  immediately  con- 


(     223     ) 

nected  with  it,  and  becomes  thereby  connected  with  sense*.4 
S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi.  When  soul  is  released  from  body,  its 
susceptibility  of  pain  ceases  :  pain  is  therefore  of  the  essencet 
of  its  own  nature  ;  that  is,  it  is  the  inseparable  concomitant  of 
bodily  creation,  according  to  PATANJALI,  as  quoted  in  the 
S.  Chandrikd  : '  All  is  pain  to  the  wise,  through  the  conflict 
of  opposite  qualities,  and  by  the  sufferings  arising  from 
afflicting  vicissitudes^;'  that  is,  from  dread  of  death  and  the 
reiteration  of  birth  ;  to  which  even  the  conditions  of  spirits, 
sages,  and  gods  are  subject.  Thus  the  Sutra  of  KAriLA  :  t  The 
pain  of  death,  decay,  and  the  rest^is  universal!! ;'  as  explained  in 
the  S.  Prav.  Bhdshya :  '  The  pain  of  death,  decay,  and  the  rest 
is  the  common  portion  of  all  beings,  whether  above  or  below, 
from  BRAHMA  to  immovable  things§.'  So  also  another  Sutra  : 
1  It  is  to  be  shunned,  from  the  connection  of  successive  birth 
by  the  thread  of  regeneration^:'  that  is,  according  to  the  com 
mentator,  '  since  regeneration  is  unavoidable,  even  after  ascent 
to  the  regions  above ;  and  in  consequence  of  the  succession  of 
births,  that  regeneration  must  be  in  an  inferior  condition ;  even 
the  world  above  is  to  be  shunned**.7  GAURAPA'DA  and  VA'CHES- 
PATI  take  no  notice  of  the  expression,  '  Pain  is  of  the  essence.' 
The  S.  Chandrikd  explains  it,  '  Creation  is  essentially  of  'the 
nature  of  painff.'  RAMA  KRISHNA  calls  it,  '  Former  acts  ;'|  the 
acts  of  a  former  life.JJ 


tfer  JJK  fen  Sia  3^;  i  fetf  ^  cRawFsfnTr  %5RtePr  c 
:  i       t  wff^r  i 

u 


** 


tt  ^?T^q  ^  Ti^^q:  I 


(     224     ) 


:  mil 

LVI. 

THIS  evolution,  of  nature,  from  intellect  to  the  spe 
cial  elements,  is  performed  for  the  deliverance  of  each 
soul  respectively  ;  done  for  another's  sake  as  for  itself. 


BHASHYA. 

This  (or  c  thus,  this/  ifyesha}  implies  conclusivcncss  and 
limitation  (that  is  in  this  way  all  that  has  been  hitherto  des 
cribed).  Evolution  of  nature  :  in  the  instrumentality  or  act  of 


(     225     ) 

nature.  Whatever  evolution  of  nature,  from  intellect  to  the 
special  elements :  that  is,  (the  evolution)  of  intellect  from  na 
ture  ;  of  egotism  from  intellect ;  of  the  rudiments  and  senses 
from  egotism ;  and  of  the  gross  elements  from  the  subtile. 
Is  performed  for  the  deliverance  of  each  soul  respectively. — 
This  evolution  is  effected  for  the  liberation  of  each  individual 
soul  which  has  assumed  body,  whether  brute,  human,  or  divine. 
How  (is  it  effected)  ?  It  is  done  for  another's  sake  as  for  self: 
as,  for  instance,  a  person  neglecting  his  own  objects  transacts 
those  of  a  friend,  so  does  nature ;  soul  makes  no  return  to 
nature.  As  for  self;  not  for  self:  for  the  sake,  in  fact,  of 
another  is  the  apprehension  of  sound  and  the  other  objects  of 
sense,  or  knowledge  of  the  difference  between  soul  and  quali 
ties  ;  for  souls  are  to  be  provided  (by  nature),  in  the  three 
worlds,  with  objects  of  sense,  and  at  last  with  liberation  :  such 
is  the  agency  of  nature ;  as  it  is  said,  "  Nature  is  like  a  utensil, 
having  fulfilled  soul's  object  it  ceases." 

It  is  here  objected,  Nature  is  irrational,  Soul  is  rational ; 
then  how  can  nature,  like  a  rational  thing,  understand  that  by^ 
me,  soul  is  to  be  provided  in  the  three  worlds  with  the  objects 
of  sense,  and  at  last  with  liberation  ?  This  is  true  ;  but  action" 
and  cessation  of  action  are  both  observedfin  irrational  things ; 
whence  it  is  said — 

COMMENT. 

The  object  of  nature's  activity  is  here  said  to  be  the  final 
liberation  of  individual  soul. 

Nature  is  properly  inert,  and  its  activity,  its ._"  motion"  or 
evolution,  takes  place  only  for  the  purpose  of  soul,  not  for  any 
object  of  its  own.  The  term  is  drambha  '  commencement,', 
successive  origin  or  beginning,'  as  detailed  in  former  passages : 
that  is,  of  intellect  from  crude  nature;  of  egotism  from  in 
tellect  ;  and  so  on.  This  is  the  spontaneous  act  of  nature  :  '* 
it  is  not  influenced  by  any  external  intelligent  principle,  such 
as  the  Supreme  Being  or  a  subordinate  agent ;  as  BKAHMA,  ife 
29 


(     226     ) 

is  without  (external)  cause*.'  '  But  it  is  objected,  Nature  being 
eternal,  her  works  should  be  so  too  ;    and  forms  once  evolved 
should  therefore   endure  for  ever.    To  this  it  is  replied,  The 
work  is  done  for  a  special  purpose,  the  liberation  of  individual 
aoul  ;    and  that  when  this  is  accomplished,  nature  ceases  with 
regard  to  that  individual,  as  a  man  boiling  rice  for  a  meal 
desists  when  it  is  dressedf/    8.  Tatwa  Kaumudi.    According 
to  GAURAPADA,  and  to  the  text  of  the  following  stanza,  nature 
so  acts  spontaneously  ;    but  the  incompetency  of  nature,  an 
irrational  principle,  to  institute  a  course  of  action  for  a  definite 
purpose,  and  the  unfitness  of  rational  soul  to  regulate  the 
acts  of  an  agent  whose   character  it  imperfectly    apprehends, 
constitute  a  principal  argument  with  the  theistical  Sankhyas 
for  the  necessity  of  a  Providence,  to  whom  the  ends  of  exist 
ence  are  known,   and  by  whom  nature  is  guided,  as  stated  by 
VACHESPATI  :    '  But  whether  this   (evolution)  be  for  its  own 
purpose  or  that  of  another,  it  is  a  rational  principle  that  acts. 
Nature  cannot  act  without  rationality,  and  therefore  there 
must  be  a  reason  which  directs  nature.  Embodied  souls,  though 
rational,  cannot  direct  nature,  as  they  are  ignorant  of  its 
character  ;  therefore  there  is  an  omniscient  Being,  the  director 
of  nature,  tfhich  is  Iswara,  or  God?.'    This  is  not  inconsistent 
with  the  previous  doctrine,  that  creation  is  the  evolution  of 
nature:    it  is  so,  but  under  the  guidance  of  a    ruling  Power. 
The  atheistical  Sankhyas,  on  the  other  hand,  contend  that 
there  is  no  occasion  for  a  guiding  Providence,  but  that  the 
activity  of  nature,  for  the  purpose  of  accomplishing  soul's 
object,  is  an  intuitive  necessity,  as  illustrated  in  the  ensuing 
passage. 


qf%  SUfrRfa'Tfi:^  ft^ffcT  ^  SKW    Wtffafa    SffTTF  R- 

J  ^f 
OT^ftcT 

f^i  IW 


(     227     ) 

n 


LVL 

As  it  is  a  function  of  milk,  an  unintelligent  (sub 
stance),  to  nourish  the  calf,  so  it  is  the  office  of  the 
chief  (principle)  to  liberate  the  soul. 


BH^SHYA. 

AS  grass  and  water  taken  by  the  cow  become  eliminated  into 
)  and  nourish  the  calf  ;  and  as  (the  secretion  ceases)  when 
the  calf  is  grown  ;  so  nature  (acts  spontaneously)  for  the  libera 
tion  of  soul,  This  is  the  agency  of  an  unintelligent  thing. 

COMMENT. 

The  intuitive  or  spontaneous  evolution  of  nature,  for  soul's 
purpose,  is  here  illustrated. 

As  the  breast  secretes  milk  for  a  purpose  of  which  it  is  un- 
coEscious,  and  unconsciously  stops  when  that  purpose,  the 
nutriment  of  the  young  animal,  is  effected  ;  so  nature,  though 
irrational,  constructs  bodily  forms  for  the  fruition  and  libera 
tion  of  soul  ;  and  when  the  latter  is  accomplished  ceases  to 
evolve.  The  illustration  is  from  KAPILA,  as  in  the  Sutra, 
«  From  irrationality  the  activity  of  nature  is  like  (the  secretion 
of)  milk*.' 


(     228     ) 


LVIII. 

As  people  engage  in  acts  to  relieve  desires,  so  does 
the  undiscrete  (principle)  to  liberate  the  soul. 


BHA'SHYA, 

As  mankind,  being  influenced  bj  desire,  engage  in  acts  of 
various  kinds  for  its  gratification  or  fulfilment,  and  desist  when 
the  object  is  accomplished,  so  the  Chief  one,  active  for  the 
purpose  of  liberating  soul,  desists,  after  having  effected  the 
twofold  purpose  of  soul  ;  one,  cognizance  of  enjoyment  of  the 
objects  of  sense  ;  the  other,  cognizance  of  the  difference  be 
tween  soul  and  qualities. 

COMMENT- 

'  Another  illustration  is  here  give  of  the  activity  of  nature. 

According  to  VACHESPATI,  this  verse  is  an  explanation  of 
the  phrase  (in  ver.  56),  '  For  another's  sake  as  for  self*;'  assign 
ing,  in  fact,  an  object  to  nature,  the  accomplishment  of  its  own 
wish  ;  ftutaukya  being  rendered  by  ichchhd,  '  wish  :'  and  this 
wish,  which  is,  '  the  liberation  of  soul,  being  gratified,  nature 
desistsf.' 


(     229     ) 


:  11  H  *  H 

LIX. 

As  a  dancer,  having  exhibited  herself  to  the  specta 
tor  desists  from  the  dance,  so  does  nature  desist- 
having  manifested  herself  to  soul. 


BHASHYA. 


As  a  dancer  (or  actress),  having  exhibited  her  performances 
on  the  stage  in  dramatic  representations,  rendered  interesting 
by  the  display  of  love  and  other  passions,  in  situations  drawn 
from  history  or  tradition,  and  accompanied  by  music  and  sing 
ing,  desists  from  acting  when  her  part  is  finished,  so  nature, 
having  exhibited  itself  to  soul,  in  the  various  characters  of 
intellect,  egotism,  the  rudiments,  senses,  and  elements  desists. 

What  the  cause  of  such  cessation  is,  is  next  described. 

COMMENT- 

An  illustration  is  here  given  of  the  discontinuance  of  nature's 
activity.  Manga,  properly  a  stage  or  theatre,  is  said  in  the 
S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi  to  imply  also  the  audience*.  A  dancer  is 
equally  an  actress,  narttalci,  at  least  was  so  in  ancient  times, 
The  dancing  girls  of  Hindustan  are  rather  singers,  than  either 
actresses  or  dancers. 


*  np&ftr 


(     230     ) 


I!  ^  •  II 


LX. 


GENEROUS  nature,  endued  with  qualities,  does  by 
manifold  means  accomplish  without  benefit  (to  her. 
self)  the  wish  of  ungrateful  soul,  devoid  as  he  is  of 
qualities. 


?T<f 


f^Tf  TfT  ^  f% 

BHA'SHYA. 

By  manifold  means.  —  Nature  is  the  benefactress  of  soul,  of 
unrequiting  soul.  How  ?  By  the  characters  of  men,  gods,  and 
animals  ;  by  circumstances  involving  pain,  pleasure,  and  in 
sensibility  ;  by  the  properties  of  the  objects  of  sense  :  in  this 
way  having  by  various  means  exhibited  herself  to  soul,  and 
shewn  that  '  I  am  one  ;  thou  art  another  ;'  having  done  this, 
nature  desists.  Thus  she  accomplishes  the  wish  of  that  (soul) 
which  is  eternal,  without  benefit  (to  herself)  :  as  a  benevolent 
man  gives  assistance  to  all,  and  seeks  no  return  for  himself 
so  nature  pursues  or  effects  the  purpose  of  soul,  without  deri 
ving  from  it  any  advantage. 

It  was  said  above  (ver.  59),  "  Having  manifested  herself, 
nature  desists."  It  is  next  shewn  what  he  does,  having  desisted. 


(     231     ) 

COMMENT- 

This  verse  may  be  considered  as  a  further  explanation  of 
the  expression  in  ver.  56,  "  Nature  labours  for  the  benefit  of 
soul  as  if  for  self,  but  not  for  any  advantage." 

*  Generous,  benevolent*:' '  Not  expecting  a  return ;  for  it  is 
not  true  generosity  to  do  good  to  another  with  the  expectation 
of  requitalf.'  S.  Chandrikd.  '  Soul  being  devoid  of  qualities 
(ver.  19),  is  consequently  devoid  of  action,  and  can  therefore 
do  nothing  by  way  of  return^.'  Nature  '  accomplishes,  goes  to', 
charati  or  dcharati,  or  '  effect,'  kurute.  The  last  word  of  the 
verse  is  differently  read. 


II 

iu  i  n 

LXI. 

NOTHING,  in  my  opinion,  is  more  gentle  than  nature; 
once  aware  of  having  been  seen,  she  does  not  again 
expose  herself  to  the  gaze  of  soul. 


t  i 


(     232     ) 


?? 


:  farrftfr 

BHA'SHYA, 

There  is  nothing  in  the  world  more  soft  (gentle,  timid)  than 
nature,  in  my  opinion  :  for  which  reason  (nature's)  opinion 
consults  another's  advantage.  Wherefore  nature  says  to  her 
self,  "  I  have  been  beheld  by  that  soul,"  and  does  not  again 
present  herself  to  the  view  of  that  soul  ;  that  is,  she  disappears 
from  the  presence  of  soul.  That  indicates  what  the  text  means 
by  gentle. 

It  (the  next  ?)  declares  Iswara  (God)  to  be  the  cause  of  the 
world  :  thus  ;  "  Let  this  ignorant,  brute,  godless  (soul),  for  its 
own  pleasure  or  pain,  go  to  heaven  or  hell,  sent  (thither)  by 
Iswara"  Others  say,  spontaneity  is  cause:  4'By  what  (or 


(     233     ) 

whom)  the  swan  is  created  white,  the  peacock  of  many 
colours ;"  that  is,  they  arc  so  naturally  (or  spontaneously). 
Here,  therefore,  the  Sankhya  teachers  have  said,  how  can  be 
ings  endowed  with  qualities  proceed  from  Iswava,  who  is  de 
void  of  qualities  ?  or  how  from  soul,  equally  devoid  of  qualities  ? 
Therereforc  (the  causality)  of  nature  is  rendered  probable. 
Thus ;  from,  white  threads  white  cloth  is  fabricated ;  from  black 
threads  black  cloth :  and  in  the  same  manner,  from  nature, 
endowed  with  the  three  qualities,  the  three  worlds,  endowed 
with  the  three  qualities  also,  arc  produced.  This  is  determined, 
Iswara  is  without  qualities  :  the  origin  of  the  three  worlds  en 
dowed  with  qualities,  from  him,  would  therefore  be  an  incon 
sistency.  By  this  (same  reason)  soul  also  cannot  be  cause. 
According  to  some,  time  is  cause  :  a  Time  is  the  five  elements  ; 
time  destroys  the  world  ;  time  watches,  when  all  things  sleep  ; 
time  is  not  to  be  surpassed."  There  are  but  three  categories, 
the  discrete  principle,  the  undiscrete  principle,  and  soul ;  arid 
by  one  of  them  time  must  be  comprehended.  Time,  then,  is  a 
discrete  principle;  for  nature,  from  its  universal  creative 
power,  is  the  cause  of  them;  spontaneity  merges  into  it 
(nature) :  and  time,  therefore,  is  not  cause  ;  neither  is  spon 
taneity.  Nature  alone,  therefore,  is  cause ;  and  there  is  no 
cause  of  nature.  She  does  not  again  expose  herself  to  the 
(jaze  of  so  td.  Therefore  it  is  my  opinion  that  there  is  no 
cause  more  gentle,  more  enjoyable,  than  nature,  such  as  Isiva-iu 
and  the  rest. 

It  is  said   familiarly   in  the   stanzas   of  the    text,   "  Soul  is 
liberated  ;  soul  migrates :"  on  this  it  is  observed — 

COMMENT- 

Nature  being  once  properly  understood  by  soul  ceases  to  act, 

Nature  being  once  fully  seen — that  is,  known  or  understood 

—by  soul :    disappears,   goes  no    more  into  its  sight ;    it  ceases 

to  be,    with    respect   to   that  individual  soul.     Why  is  this  ? 

Because   it  is  the  most   soft,    the  most   gentle  or  timid   S-uku- 

mdratara,  of  all  things.    The  term   ktwidra,  properly  imply- 

30 


ing  '  soft'  or  '  young,*  is  explained  by  the  Scholiasts  to  signify 
c  bashful,  modest,  unable  to  bear  the  gaze  of  soul*.'  VACHES- 
PATI,  Sukumdratam  saki-jja^,  NAKAYANA  and  RAMA 
KRISHNA.  In  the  S.  Bhdshya  it  is  rendered  by  subhogycdara^, 
<  more  fit  to  be  enjoyed  ;'  but  this  refers  less  to  the  meta 
phorical  illustration,  than  to  the  doctrine,  of  the  text,  and 
might  be  rendered,  '  more  plastic  ;'  there  being  nothing  so 
suitable  as  nature  (matter)  for  the  cause  or  origin  of  sensible 
objects.  The  S.  Tatwa  Kaumudi  amplifies  and  explains  the 
illustration  :  '  Nature  is  like  a  woman  of  virtue  and  family  : 
such  a  one,  of  retired  habits  and  modest  looks,  may  be,  by 
some  inadvertence,  surprised  in  disabille  by  a  strange  man,  but 
she  takes  good  care  that  another  shall  not  behold  her  off  her 
guard.  Nature  being  once  fully  seen  by  discrimination,  has 
too  much  matronly  decorum  to  allow  herself  to  be  looked  at  a 
second  time||.'  The  S.  Chandrikd  has  a  similar  exposition§, 
The  S.  PravadiUMU  Bh.  cites  this  verse  in  explanation  of  the 
Sutra.  •'  Upon  the  detection  of  her  faults,  there  is  no  further 
approach  of  nature  (to  soul)  ;  like  a  woman  of  family'IY  that  is, 
'  When  nature  finds  that  soul  has  discovered  it  is  to  her  that 
the  distress,  &c.  of  migration  are  owing,  she  is  put  to  shame 
by  the  detection,  and  ventures  no  more  near  soul  ;  as  a  woman 
of  family  keeps  aloof  from  a  husband  by  whom  she  knows  her 
faults  to  have  been  found  out.  And  this  is  considered  as  an 
additional  reason  for  the  discontinuance  of  the  activity  of 
nature**.'  This  is  my  opinion^  refers  to  what  has  preceded, 


t 
ft 


wmr 


If 


I          ft  ?fift 


(     235     ) 

there  is  nothing  more  yentle,  as  is  shown  by  the  termfti; 
also  by  the  Bhdahya  of  GAURAPADA.  It  is  clear,  therefore, 
that  the  expression  refers  to  the  author ;  such  is  his  opinion  5 
that  is,  he  does  not  here  dogmatise,  and  say  that  nature  is 
actually  more  timid  or  soft  than  any  thing  else — for  the  phrase 
is  merely  a  figure  of  speech,  a  metaphorical  illustration — but 
that  it  seems  so  to  him  ;  the  words  having  the  force  of  '  me- 
thinks,  it  seems  :'  c  Nature,  it  seems  to  me,  or  methinks,  is 
the  most  soft,  timid,  retiring,  of  all  things,  and  cannot 
bear  to  be  started  at  rudely :  once  seen,  therefore,  as  she 
Is,  she  takes  care,  like  a  truly  modest  matron,  to  be  seen 
no  more.'  Such  is  the  obvious  purport  of  the  text,  which 
is  merely  a  further  illustration  of  the  idea  conveyed  in 
ver.  59.  GAURAPADA  has  gone  out  of  his  way  rather  to 
discuss  the  character  of  a  first  cause;  giving  to  sukumd- 
ratara  a  peculiar  import,  that  of  '  enjoyable,  preceptible ;' 
which  nature  eminently  is,  and  is  therefore,  according  to  him, 
the  most  appropriate  source  of  all  perceptible  objects,  or,  in 
other  words,  of  creation. 


II  ^  II 
LXII. 

VERILY  not  any  soul  is  bound,  nor  is.  released,  nor 
migrates ;  but  nature  alone,  in  relation  to  various 
beings,  is  bound,  is  released,  and  migrates. 


(     236     ) 


BHASHYA. 

Therefore,  from  that  cause,  soul  is  not  bound,  nor  indeed  is 
loosed,  nor  migrates  ;  for,  because,  nature,  in  relation  to  vari 
ous  beings  —  in  relation  (or  connection)  with  celestial,  human, 
or  brute  forms,  in  the  character  of  intellect,  egotism,  the  rudi 
ments,  senses,  and  gross  elements  —  is  bound,  is  liberated,  or 
migrates.  For  soul  is  of  its  own  nature  loosed,  and  goes  every 
where,  and  how  therefore  should  it  migrate  ?  migration  being 
for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  something  not  previously  ob 
tained.  The  phrases,  therefore,  Soul  is  bound,  Soul  is  loose 
or  migrates,  originate  in  ignorance  of  the  nature  of  migration. 
From  knowledge,  the  end  of  soul  and  existence,  the  real  nature 
of  soul  is  attained.  The  being  manifest,  soul  is  single,  pure, 
free,  fixed  in  its  own  nature.  Consequently  if  there  is  no 
bondage  there  can  be  no  liberation  of  soul.  It  is  therefore 
said  (see  next  verse),  "Nature  binds  and  liberates  herself;" 
for  where  subtile  body,  composed  of  the  rudiments,  and  having 
a  triple  cause,  exists,  such  body  is  bound  with  triple  bounds  ; 
as  it  is  said,  "  He  who  is  bound  by  the  bonds  of  nature,"  of 
nature's  products  or  of  works,  c:  cannot  by  any  other  be  loosed" 


(     237     ) 

(see  Comment,  ver.  45),    Such  a  subtile   body  is  affected  by 
virtue,  vice,  &c. 

Nature  is  bound,  is  loosed,  and  migrates,  How  is  next 
described. 

COMMENT. 

The  subjection  of  nature,  not  of  soul,  to  the  accidents  of 
bondage,  liberation,  and  migration  is  asserted  in  this  verse. 

The  doctrine  here  laid  down  seems  at  variance  with  what 
has  preceded,  and  with  the  usual  purport  of  the  notions  that 
attach  the  accidents  of  bondage  and  liberation  to  soul.  Appa 
rently,  however,  the  difference  is  one  of  words  only. 

Soul  is  incapable  of  action,  consequently  is  not  liable  to 
change.  It  cannot  be  bound,  as  the  consequence  of  acts  which 
it  does  not  perform  ;  and  as  it  is  never  in  bondage,  it  cannot 
be  set  free.  The  application  of  these  terms  to  soul,  therefore, 
is  to  be  understood  in  a  relative  not  in  a  positive  sense ;  and 
their  positive  signification  is  properly  restricted  to  nature.  It 
is  nature  that  is  bound,  nature  that  is  liberated,  nature  that 
undergoes  change  or  migration.  When  nature  attaches  her 
self  to  soul,  when  she  separates  from  it,  the  converse  is  equally 
true,  soul  is  attached  to,  or  is  separated  from,  nature  ;  and  is 
consequently  said  to  be  bound,  to  be  set  free,  to  undergo 
change.  But  soul  is  passive  in  all  these  things  ;  it  is  nature 
that  is  active,  that  binds,  loosens,  or  changes  form.  GAURA- 
PABAS  explanation  of  these  subtleties  is  not  very  clear,  but 
such  appears  to  be  his  understanding  of  the  text.  So  also 
VACHESPATI  :  '  Soul  is  without  qualities  and  exempt  from 
vicissitude.  How  then  can  it  be  liberated  ?  To  soul,  not  liable 
to  change,  there  could  apply  none  of  the  circumstances  termed 
bondage,  arising  from  acts,  sufferings,  or  consciousness :  nor 
could  worldly  change  or  migration,  another  name  for  which  is 
death,  affect  soul,  incapable  of  action*.'  The  same  coinmenta- 


(     238     ) 

tor  adds,  '  These  circumstances,  which  are  in  truth  the  acts 
and  conditions  of  nature,  are  ascribed  to  and  affect  soul  as  the 
superior,  in  the  same  manner  that  victory  and  defeat  are 
attributed  and  relate  to  a  king,  although  actually  occurring  to 
his  generals ;  for  they  are  his  servants,  and  the  gain  or  loss  is 
his,  not  theirs**'  So  NARAYANA  explains  the  text :  '  Binding 
is  the  confinement  of  nature,  in  the  various  forms  of  intellect , 
&c, ;  and  bondage  and  liberation  are  attributed  to  soul  only 
through  the  contiguity  of  intellect,  to  which  they  belong,  and 
not  to  soulf.'  It  is  from  ignorance  only  that  bondage  and 
liberation  are  ascribed  to  soul ;  as  by  the  Sutraf,  as  explained 
by  the  Scholiast,  '  Binding  and  liberation,  or  endurance  of, 
and  exemption  from  pain,  are  not  (conditions)  of  soul  in 
reality  or  absolutely,  but  (are  considered  as  such)  from 
ignorance ;  for  the  binding  and  liberation  mentioned  are 
(conditions)  of  naturej].'  So  also  the  Sutra§,  '  From  actual  pain 
suffered  by  nature  proceed  binding  and  liberation,  and  from 
its  attachments  ;  that  is,  from  its  being  affected  by  virtue  and 
the  rest,  which  are  the  causes  of  pain  ;  like  an  animal ;  that  is, 
as  an  animal  may  be  bound  or  loosed,  when  entangled  in  a 
ropeHV  The  distinction,  after  all,  is  little  more  than  nominal, 
except  as  it  is  the  necessary  consequence  of  the  inactivity 
attributed  to  the  soul. 


srercRr 


?r*?wncfaicT  ^  %^  =r  5  a^rccfrfa  vim  i  J 
i 


(     239     ) 


am 


LXIII. 


BY  seven  modes  nature  binds  herself  by  herself  .  by 
one,  she  releases  (herself),  for  the  soul's  wish. 


BKA'SHYA. 

^?/  seven  modes.  —  These  seveu  have  been  specified,  as  virtue 
dispassion,  power,  vice,  ignorance,  passion,  and  weakness. 
These  are  the  seven  modes  (or  condtions)  of  nature  by  which 
she  binds  herself,  of  herself.  And  that  same  nature,  having 
ascertained  that  soul's  object  is  to  be  accomplished,  liberates 
heself  by  one  mode,  or  by  knowledge. 

How  is  that  knowledge  produced  1 

COMMENT- 

Nature  is  bound  by  seven  modes,  and  liberated  by  one, 

Nature  binds  herself  by  acts  of  whatever  kind,  especially  by 

the   faculties   of  intellect,   enumerated   above   (ver.  23).      She 

binds  herself  of  her   own   accord.     She  frees   herself  by  one 

mode,  by  the  acquisition  of  philosophical  knowledge*     '  Nature 


(     240     ) 

binds  herself  (in  her  own  work),  like  a  silkworm  in  its  cocoon*.' 
Siltra.  Atman  is  here  uniformly  explained  by  viva,  i  own 
self.' 


I! 

LXIV. 

So.  through  study  of  principles,  the  conclusive, 
incontrovertible,  one  only  knowledge  is  attained,  that 
neither  I  AM,  nor  is  auht  mine,  nor  do  I  exist. 


BHA'SHYA. 


>S'o,  by  the  order  explained,  the  study  of  the  twenty-five 
principles,  knowledge  of  soul,  or  the  discriminative  know- 
'  ledge,  this  is  nature,  this  is  soul,  these  are  the  rudiments, 


(     241     ) 

censes  and  elements/  is  acquired.  Neither  I  wn  :  I  am  not. 
JNot  mine  :  not  my  body  ;  that,  I  am  one  <  (thing),  body  is  an 
other  Nor  do  I  exist :  that  is,  exempt  irom  egotism.  This 
is  conclusive,  incontrovertible.:  free  from  doubt,  Viparyayot, 
means  '  doubt,'  with  the  negative  prefixed,  '  absence  of  doubt ; 
and  visuddha,  (  pure;'  pure  through  absence  of  doubt.  Single. — 
There  is  no  other  (true  knowledge).  In  this  way  the  cause 
of  liberation  is  produced,  is  manifested  (individually).  Know 
ledge  means  knowledge  of  the  twenty-five  principles,  or  of  soul. 
Knowledge  being  attained,  what  does  soul  ? 

COMMENT. 

The  knowledge  that  is  essential  to  liberation  is  here  de 
scribed. 

It  is  acquired  through  study  of  the  twenty-five  principles, 
tatwdbhdsya ;  familiarity  with  them;  frequent  recurrence  to 
them.:  it  is  finite  or  conclusive,  aparisesha ;  it  leaves  nothing 
to  be  learned.:  it  is  perfect,  as  being  without  doubt,  avipar- 
yayavisudha:  and  single,  the  one  the  thing  needful,  kevala. 
What  sort  of  knowledge  is  this.?  or  what  is  the  result  it 
teaches  ?  The  absence  of  individuality  ;  the  notion  of  the 
abstract  existence  of  soul.  .Neither  I  am,  nor  is  aught  mine> 
nor  do  I  exist :  that  is,  there  is  no  activity,  nor  property,  nor 
individual  agency.  /  am  not  precludes  action  only*.  Indeed 
As,  the  root,  together  with  bhu  and  kri,  are  said  to  signify 
action  in  general"}*.  Ndsmi  therefore  signifies,  not  'I  am  not,' 
but  '  I  do  not.'  The  $.  Tatwa  Kaumudt  then  proceeds : 
•*  Thus  all  acts  whatever,  whether  external  or  internal,  ascer 
tainment,  consciousness,  reflection,  perception,  and  all  others* 
.are  denied  as  acts  of  soul :  consequently,  there  being  no  active 
functions  in  soul,  it  follows  that  neither  do  I  (as, an  individual 
agent)  exist,  .Afiam  here  denotes  "agent;"  as,  I  know,  I 


31 


(     242     ) 

sacrifice,  I  give,  I  enjoy-  —  or  so  on,  implying  uniformly  the 
notion  of  an  agent  —  nor  is  aught  mine  :  an  agent  implies 
mastership  ;  if  there  be  no  agent  there  can  be  no  abstract 
mastership  (or  possession)*.'  The  same  authority  gives  also  a 
different  reading  of  the  first  expression  n&smi,  explaining  it 
nd  asmi,  '  I  am  male  ;'  or  purusha,  '  unproductive  of  progeny/ 
of  acts-f.  The  8.  Prav.  Bh.,  commenting  on  this  verse  of  the 
Karikd,  has,  '  Neither  I  am,  denies  the  agency  of  soul  ;  nor 
(is  aught  mine),  denies  its  attachment  (to  any  objects)  ;  nor  do 
I  exist,  denies  its  appropriation  (of  faculties)}.5  The  Sutra 
is  to  the  same  effect  :  '  From  relinquishment  (consequent 
on)  study  of  principles  ;  this  is  not,  this  is  not||  :'  that  is,  of 
all  the  objects  proceeding  from  prakriti,  not  one  is  soul.  The 
phraseology  is  ascribed  to  the  Vedas,  and  a  similar  passage  is 
thence  cited  :  '  Hence  comes  the  conclusion,  it  is  not,  it  is  not 
(soul),  it  is  not  (soul  is  not),  from  it  :  such  is  not  so  ;  it  is 
different,  it  is  supreme,  it  is  that  very  thing  (that  it  is).  It 
is  riot,  it  is  not,  (means)  soul.  Such  is  (the  phrase),  It  is  not§,, 
&c.  And  the  Chandrikd  explains  the  terms  similarly  :  '  /  am 
not  means  I  am  not  agent  ;  there  I  am  distinct  from  the 
principle  of  intelligence.  Not  mine  is  pain  :  exemption  from 
being  the  seat  of  pain  and  the  rest  is  thence  determined. 
Nor  do  I  exist  :  by  this,  difference  from  egotism  is  ex- 
prcssedHV  RAMA  KRISHNA  repeats  the  words  of  the  Chan- 


sm  ^  sr     1  5R?ff 
:  i        t 


i  rrer  ^  f  KT:  i 

f  % 
SJTH 


(     243      ) 

By  these  expressions  therefore,  however  quaint 
or  questionable,  we  are  not  to  understand  negation  of  soul. 
This  would  be  a  direct  contradiction  to  its  specification  as  one 
of  the  categories  of  the  system,  one  of  the  twenty-five  essential 
and  existent  principles.  It  is  merely  intended  as  a  negation 
of  the  soul's  having  any  active  participation,  individual 
interest  or  property,  in  human  pains,  possessions,  or  feel 
ings.  /  am,  I  do,  I  suffer,  mean  that  material  nature,  or 
some  of  her  products,  (substantially,)  is,  does,  or  suffers ;  and 
not  soul,  which  is  unalterable  and  indifferent,  susceptible  of 
neither  pleasure  nor  pain,  and  only  reflecting  them,  as  it  were 
or  seemingly  sharing  them,  from  the  proximity  of  nature,  by 
whom  they  are  really  experienced*:  for  soul,  according  to  the 
Vedas,  is  absolutely  existent,  eternal,  wise,  true,  free,  unaffec 
ted  by  passion,  universalf.  This  verse,  therefore,  does  not 
amount,  as  M.  Cousin  has  supposed,  to  "  le  nihillisrne  absolu, 
dernier  fruit  du  scepticisme." 


IK  til 

LXV. 

POSSESSED  of  this  (self-knowledge),  soul  contem 
plates  at  leisure  and  at  ease  nature,  (thereby)  de 
barred  from  prolific  change,  and  consequently  preclu 
ded  from  those  seven  forms. 


SXET 


(     244     ) 

fa 


BHASHYA. 

By  that  pure  (absolute),  single  knowledge  soul  beholds  na 
ture,  like  a  spectator,  at  leisure  and  composed  ;  as  a  spectator 
seated  at  a  play  beholds  an  actress.  Composed  ;  who  stays  (or 
is  involved)  in  self  ;  or  staying  or  abiding  In  one's  own  place. 
How  is  Prakriti  ;  debarred  from  prolific  change  ?  Not  pro 
ducing  intellect,  egotisrm,  and  the  other  effects.  Consequently 
precluded  from  those  seven  forms  :  desisting  from  the  seven 
forms  or  modes  by  which  she  binds  herself,  or  virtue,  vice,  and 
the  rest,  and  which  are  no  longer  required  for  the  use  of  soul,, 
both  whose  objects  (fruition  and  liberation)  are  effected. 

COMMENT.  '    " 

Soul,  possessed  of  the  knowledge  described  in  the  preceding 
stanza,  or  divested  of  all  individuality,  becomes  indifferent  to, 
and  independent  of,  nature,  which  therefore  ceases  to  act. 

Soul  contemplates  nature,  like  a  spectator,  preJcshaka,  one 
who  beholds  a  dancer  or  actress  ;  at  leisure,  avastkita,  or  with 
out  action,  niskriya  ;  and  at  ease  sustha.  This  is  also  read 
swastha,  *  calm,  collected  in  self*  ;'  or  nirdkula,  '  unagitated/ 


(     245     ) 

Nature  consequently  has  nothing  more  to  do.  The  objects  of 
soul,  fruition  and  liberation,  having  been  effected  by  know 
ledge,  the  other  faculties  of  intellect  are  needless. 


LXVI. 

HE  desists,  because  he  has  seen  her  ;  she  does  so, 
because  she  has  been  seen.  In  their  (mere)  union 
there  is  no  motive  for  creation. 


Or?  xn  ^r  ^  ^  ft:  V 


T: 


(     246     ) 

BHA'SHYA. 

One  present  at  a  play,  as  a  spectator,    (ceases  to  behold  :)  so 
one,  single,    pure  soul  desists.     One  (nature),    knowing  I    have 
been   seen  by   him,   stops,  ceases.     Nature   is   the  one,   chief 
cause  of  the  three  worlds  ;  there   is  no  second.     Although  form 
have  terminated,  yet  from  specific  difference  there  is,  even  in 
the    cessation  of  (the    cooperation  of)   nature  and   soul,  union, 
as  a  generic  characteristic.     For,  if  there  be  not  union,   whence 
is  creation  ?  There  being  union  of  these  two  ;  that  is,  of  nature 
and  soul ;   there  being   union    from  their   universal   diffusion 
yet   there  is  no  further  occasion   for  the  world;   from  the  ob 
ject  of  creation  being  terminated.     The  necessity  for  nature  is 
twofold  ;  apprehension  of  the    difference  between  qualities    and 
soul :  when  both  these   have  been  effected  there   is  no   further 
use  for  creation  ;  that  is,  of  further  creation  (of  future   regene 
ration)  ;    as  in  the   case   of  a   settlement  of  accounts   between 
debtor   and  creditor,   consequent  on   accepting   what  is   given, 
when  such  a   union  is  effected   there  is  no   further   connection 
of  object :  so  there   is  no  further  occasion  for  nature  and    soul. 
If  upon   soul's  acquiring   knowledge   liberation   takes  place, 
why  does  not  my   liberation   (immediately)   occur  ?    To  this  it 
is  observed. — 

COMMENT.         ;  j 

The  final  separation  of  soul  from  nature  is  here .  indicated, 
as  no  further  purpose  is  answered  by  their  continued  union. 

The  first  part  of  its  stanza  repeats  the  illustrations  given  in 
preceding  verses  (61  and  65)  :  "  Nature,  having  been  fully 
seen  or  understood,  ceases  to  act. — Soul,  having  seen  or  under 
stood,  ceases  to  consider ;'  becomes  regardless,  upekshaka. 
Consequently  there  can  be  no  future  reunion,  no  future 
creation.  For  mere  union  of  soul  and  nature  is  not  the 
cause  of  the  development  of  the  latter,  constituting  worldly 
existence  :  the  motive  is,  the  fulfilment  of  the  objects  of  soul. 
The  activity  of  nature  is  the  consequence  of  her  subserviency 


(     247     ) 

to  soul's  purposes  ;  and  when  they  are  accomplished,  all  motive 
for  action,  all  inducement  to  repeat  worldly  creation,  ceases. 
'  The  two  objects  of  soul,  fruition  and  discrimination,  are  the 
excitements  to  the  activity  of  nature  ;  if  they  do  not  exist, 
they  do  not  stimulate  nature.  In  the  text  the  term  motive 
implies  that  by  which  nature  is  excited  in  creation  (to  evolve 
the  world) :  which  cannot  be  in  the  nonentity  of  the  objects  of 
soul*.'  VACHESPATI.  So  also  NARAYANA  :  '  In  the  (mere) 
union  of  these  two  there  is  no  motive  for  the  production  of  the 
worldf.'  With  the  accomplishment,  therefore,  of  the  objects 
of  soul,  individual  existence  must  cease  for  ever. 


LXVII. 

I 

BY  attainment  of  perfect  knowledge,  virtue  and  the 
rest  become  causeless,  yet  soul  remains  a  while  invest 
ed  with  body,  as  the  potter's  wheel  continues  whirl 
ing  from  the  effect  of  the  impulse  previously  given 
to  it. 


ITR 


jwff 
i 


(     248     ) 


f  R 


SHASHYA. 

Though  perfect  knowledge,  that  is,  know-ledge  >of  the  twenty- 
ifive  principles,  be  attained,  yet,  from  the  effect  of  previous 
impulse,  the  sage  continues  in  a  bodily  condition.  How  ? 
Like  the  whirling  of  a  wheel  ;  as  a  potter,  having  set  his 
wheel  whirling,  puts  on  it  a  lump  of  clay,  fabricates  a  vessel, 
•and  takes  it  off,  and  the  wheel  continuing  to  turn  round. 
It  does  so  from  tJie  effect  of  .previous  impulse.  —  From  the 
-attainment  of  perfect  knowledge,  virtue  and  the  -rest  have  no 
influence  upon  one  who  is  possessed  of  such  knowledge.  These 
seven  kinds  of  bonds  are  consumed  by  perfect  knowledge  :  as 
seeds  that  have  been  scorched  by  fire  are  net  able  to  germi 
nate,  so  virtue  and  the  rest  are  not  able  to  fetter  soul.  These 
-then,  virtue  and  the  rest,  not  being  (in  the  case  of  the  2/°5^> 
the  causes  (of  continued  bodily  existence),  body  continues 
from  the  effects  of  previous  impulse.  Why  is  there  not  from 
-knowledge  destruction  of  present  virtue  and  vice  ?  Although 
they  may  be  present,  yet  they  perish  the  next  moment) 
•and  knowledge  destroys  all  future  acts,  as  well  as  those  which 
•a  man  does  in  his  present  body  by  following  instituted  ubsei- 


(     249     ) 

vances.     With  the  cessation  of  the  impulse  the  body  perishes, 
and  then  liberation  occurs. 

What  liberation,  is  next  specified. 

COMMENT. 

A  reason  is  assigned  why  pure   soul  is  not  at  once  set  free 
from  body. 

This  stanza   may  be   considered   partly  as  an  illustration  of 
the   preceding,   explaining   the   continued   union   of  soul  and 
body  even   after  knowledge   is  attained.     It  is  also   a  kind  of 
apology  for  the  human   forms  of  KAPJLA   and  other  teachers  of 
the  Sankhya   doctrines,   who,  although  in  possession  of  perfect 
knowledge,   lived  and   died  as  men.     The  sage,  or  Yogi,  is  no 
longer   susceptible  of  the  accidents  of  virtue,  vice,  passion,  dis- 
passion,  and  the  rest,  which  are  the  proximate   causes  of  bodily 
existence  ;  and  his  continuance  in  the   bodily  form  arises   from 
the   effects  of  virtue,  &c.    lasting   after  the  cause   has  ceased  ; 
like   the  whirl   of  a  wheel  after   the  impulse    that  set  it   going 
has  been  withdrawn.     '  As,  when  the  potter's  work  is  done,  the 
wheel,  in  consequence  of  the  impulse  or  momentum  given  to 
it,  continues  revolving,  but   stops  when  the  period  under  such 
influence  has  expired ;  so  virtue  cmd  vice,  incident  to  body  ini 
tiative  and  mature,  constitute  impulse*.*    The  effects  of  former 
acts  of  virtue  and  vice,  then,   cease  when  the   impulse  derived 
from  them  is  worn  out ;   and  the  possession  of  knowledge  pre» 
vents  all   future  acts.      GAURAPADA    apparently    suggests    a 
difficulty  with  respect  to  acts  done  in  the  present  body  ;   such 
as   the  observance   of  the '  Yoga,  or  performance   of  prescribed 
rites.     These  acts  may  be  performed  by  a  sage   possessing  per 
fect   knowledge,  and  should  therefore   produce   certain   conse 
quences.     They  lead,  however,  to  no  results ;   for  as  far  as  they 


fireft  ^IWT« 


32 


(     250     ) 

are  themselves  concerned,  they  are  but  of  brief  duration,  perish 
ing  as  soon  as  performed  ;  and  with  regard  to  any  future  effects 
they  are  anticipated,  prevented,  or  destroyed,  by  the  possession 
of  knowledge.  Such  seems  to  be  the  purport  of  the  passage, 
but  it  is  not  very  perspicuous. 


urn  ~~-^ 


LXVIII. 

WHEN  separation  of  the  informed  soul  from  its  cor 
poreal  frame  at  length  takes  place,  and  nature  in  re 
spect  of  it  cease,  then  is  absolute  and  final  deliverance 
accomplished. 


mn 


BHASHYA. 

When  bodily  separation  is  accomplished,  by  destruction  of 
the  effects  of  virtue,  vice,  and  the  rest.  In  respect  of  it, 
having  accomplished  its  object,  nature  ceases  :  then  absolute, 
certain  —  final,  unimpeded  —  deliverance,  liberation,  consequent 
upon  the  condition  of  singleness.  Soul  obtains  singleness 
(separation),  which  is  both  absolute  and  final 


(     251     ) 

COMMENT. 

This  verse  refers  to  the  first  stanza,  and  announces  the 
accomplishment  of  what  was  there  stated  to  be  the  object  of 
inquiry,  absolute  and  final  liberation. 

When  the  consequences  of  acts  cesfee,  and  body,  both  gross 
and  subtile,  dissolves,  nature,  in  respect  to  individual  soul, 
no  longer  exists ;  and  soul  is  one,  single,  free  kevala,  or  ob 
tains  the  condition  called  kaivalyam.  This  according  to  VA- 
CHESPATI  and  NARAYANA,  means  '  exemption  from  the  three 
kinds  of  pain*.'  GAURAPA'DA  gives  no  definition  of  the  term, 
except  that  it  is  the  abstract  of  hernia^.  What  the  condition 
of  pure  separated  soul  may  be  in  its  liberated  state,  the  San- 
khya  philosophy  does  not  seem  to  hold  it  necessary  to  inquire. 


LXIX. 

THIS  abstruse  knowledge,  adapted  to  the  liberation 
of  soul,  wherein  the  origin,  duration,  and  termination 
of  beings  are  considered,  has  been  thoroughly  ex 
pounded  by  the  mighty  saint. 


(     252     ) 


^ftraf^rr 


BHASHYA. 

Soul's  object  is  liberation  :  for  that  (purpose)  this  abstruse, 
secret,  knowledge  (has  been  expounded)  by  the  mighty  saint, 
by  the  divine  sage  KAPILA.  Wherein,  in  which  knowledge, 
the  origin,  duration,  and  termination,  the  manifestation, 
continuance,  and  disappearance,  of  beings,  of  the  products  (or 
developments)  of  nature,  are  considered,  are  discussed.  From 
which  investigation  perfect  knowledge,  which  is  the  same  as 
knowledge  of  the  twenty-five  principles,  is  produced. 

This  is  the  Bkdshya  of  GAURAPADA  on  the  Sankhya 
doctrines,  propounded,  for  the  sake  ol  liberation  from  migra 
tion,  by  the  Muni  KAPILA  ;  in  which  there  are  these  seventy 
stanzas. 

COMMENT. 

This  verse  specifies  by  whom  the  doctrines  of  the  text  were 
originally  taught. 

The  commentary  of  GAUBAPA'DA  closes  here  in  the  only 
copy  of  the  MSS.  procurable;  and  consequently  omits  all 
notice  of  ISWARA  KRISHNA,  to  whom  a  subsequent  stanza  of 
the  text  attributes  the  Kdrikd.  In  the  Bhdshya  it  is  said 
that  the  work  commented  on  is  the  Sankhya  declared  by 
KAPILA  ;  but  that  the  Kdrikd  is  not  the  work  of  KAPILA,  the 
other  Scholiasts  agree.  It  is  also  different  from  the  Sutras 
of  that  teacher,  as  given  in  the  Sdnkhya  Pravachana,  al 
though  it  follows  their  purport,  and  sometimes  uses  the  same 
or  similar  expressions.  GAUBAPA'DA  may  therefore  probably 
only  mean  to  intimate  that  its  substance  is  conformable  to 


(     253     ) 

the  doctrines  of  the  Sutras,  not  that  it  is  the  work  of  the 
Muni.  These  doctrines,  he  adds,  are  contained  in  seventy 
stanzas ;  of  which,  however,  our  copy  has  but  sixty-nine.  The 
verses  of  the  Kdrikd,  as  usually  met  with,  are  seventy-two ; 
but  there  also  reference  occurs  to  seventy  verses,  as  compri 
sing  apparently  the  doctrinal  and  traditional  part  of  the  text, 
derived  from  older  authorities.  Either  GAURAPA'DA  thought 
it  unnecessary  to  explain  the  concluding  three  verses  of  the 
Kdrikd,  or  there  is  some  omission  in  the  copy,  or  they  do  not 
belong  to  the  work.  The  concluding  verse  is  evidently  in 
accurate,  the  metre  of  the  third  line  of  the  stanza  being 
defective. 

The  KAPILA  to  whom  the  Sankhya  philosophy  is  attributed 
is  variously  described  by  different  authorities.  In  a  verse 
quoted  by  GAURAPA'DA,  in  his  comment  upon  the  first  stanza 
of  the  text,  he  is  enumerated  amongst  the  sons  of  BRAHMA. 
VIJNA'NA  BHIKSHU  asserts  him  to  have  been  an  incarnation  of 
VISHNU*.  He  refers  also  to  the  opinion  of  a  Vedanta  writer, 
that  KAPILA  was  an  incarnation  of  AGNI,  or  '  fire/  upon  the 
authority  of  the  Smritif ;  but  denies  their  identity.  There 
does  not  appear  to  be  any  good  authority  for  the  notion. 
Kapila  is  a  synonyme  of  fire,  as  it  is  of  a  brown,  dusky,  or 
tawny  colour ;  and  this  may  have  given  rise  to  the  idea  of 
AGNI  and  the  sage  being  the  same.  The  identification  with 
VISHNU  rests  on  better  grounds.  The  popular  belief  of  the 
Vaishnavas  is,  that  there  have  been  twenty-four  Avatdrds 
of  VISHNU,  and  KAPILA  is  one  of  them.  The  earliest 
authority  for  this  specification  is  no  doubt  the  Rdmdyana, 
in  which  VASUDEYA  or  VISHNU  is  said  by  BRAHMA  to  assume 
the  form  of  KAPILA,  to  protect  the  earth  against  the  violence 
of  the  sons  of  SAGARA,  searching  for  the  lost  steed  intend- 


t  arm: 


(     254     ) 

ed  for  their  father's  aswamedha.  '  *  BRAHMA  having  heard 
the  words  of  the  gods,  who  were  bewildered  with  the 
dread  of  destruction,  replied  to  them,  and  said,  VASUDEVA 
is  the  Lord,  he  is  M&dhaw,  of  whom  the  whole  earth  is  the 
cherished  bride ;  he,  assuming  the  form  of  KAPILA,  sustains 
continually  the  world.'  So  also  the  Mdkabktirata :  '  Then 
spoke  incensed,  KAPILA,  the  best  of  sages ;  that  VASUDEVA, 
indeed,  whom  the  holy  Munis  called  KAPiLAf.'  According  to 
the  Bhdgavat,  he  was  the  fifth  incarnation  of  VISHNU  :  '  The 
fifth  Avatdra  was  named  KAPILA,  the  chief  of  saints,  who 
revealed  to  Asuiu  the  Sinkhya  explanation  of  first  principles 
which  has  been  impaired  by  time^:.'  Book  I.  s.  12.  The  latter 
half  of  the  third  book  describes  him  also  as  an  Avatar  of 
VASUDEVA,  but  as  the  son  of  DEVAHUTI,  the  daughter  of 
SAYAMBHUVA  Menu,  married  to  the  Prajapati  KERDDAMA, 


far 


irr: 


(     255     ) 

LXX. 

THIS  great  purifying  (doctrine)  the  sage  compas 
sionately  imparted  to  A  sum,  ASURI  taught  it  to  PAN- 
CHASIKHA,  by  whom  it  was  extensively  propagated. 

COMMENT- 

Purifyiny  ;  that  which  purifies  from  the  defects  which  are 
the  cause  of  pain  ',pdwna  or  pavitra.  Great,  chief,  principal 
agryam,  mvM.yam.  This  verse  anticipates  an  objection  that 
may  be  made  to  the  authority  of  the  text ;  as  it  may  be  said, 
Although  the  words  of  KAPILA  must  command  attention,  of 
what  weight  are  the  lessons  of  an  uninspired  teacher  ?  The 
answer  is,  that  they  are  the  same  which  were  originally  taught 
by  KAPILA  himself  to  his  pupil  ASURI.  According  to  the 
passage  cited  by  GAURAPA'DA,  in  his  notes  on  the  first  stanza 
(p.  1),  ASURI  is  also  a  son  of  BRAHMA.  He  is  mentioned  else 
where  as  the  pupil  of  KAPILA,  and  preceptor  of  PANCHASIKHA, 
but  there  are  no  details  of  his  history.  Of  PANCHASIKH  there 
is  some  account  in  the  Makabhdrat,  on  occasion  of  his  visiting 
JANAKA,  king  of  MithiLd,  and  imparting  to  him  the  Sankhya 
philosophy.  He  is  there  also  said  to  be  named  likewise 
KAPILA*  ;  which  the  commentator  explains  to  mean  that  he 
was  like  KAPILA,  being  the  disciple  of  his  disciplef,  as  the 
text  proceeds  to  call  him  ;  '  He,  the  long-lived,  whom  they 
term  the  first  disciple  of  ASURI+.'  He  is  also  called  KAPILEYA 
from  his  being,  it  is  said,  the  son  of  a  Brahmani  named  KA 
PILA.  '  ASURI  went  to  the  sphere  in  which  that  which  is 
Brahmc,  the  mystic-named,  and  multiform,  and  eternal,  is  be 
held.  His  disciple  was  PANCHASIKHA,  nourished  with  human 
milk :  for  there  was  a  certain  Brahman  matron,  named  KAPILA, 


(     25G     ) 

of  whom  he  became  the  son,  and  at  whose  bosom  he  was  fed  ; 
thence  he  obtained  the  denomination  of  KAPILEYA.  and  divine 
imperishable  knowledge*.' 


LXXI. 

RECEIVED  by  tradition  of  pupils,  it  has  been  com 
pendiously  written  in  Arya  metre  by  the  piously  dis 
posed  ISWARA  KRISHNA,  having  thoroughly  investiga 
ted  demonstrated  truth. 

COMMENT- 

'  Succession  or  tradition  of  pupils,'  sishyaparampard  :  each 
pupil  becoming  teacher  in  his  turn,  as  is  the  case  with  the 
Pandits  to  the  present  day,  It  rarely,  if  ever,  happens  that 
any  branch  of  Sanscrit  literature  is  acquired  by  independent 
study :  every  science  is  studied  under  some  teacher  of  emi 
nence,  who  can,  not  unfrequently,  trace  his  traditionary  in 
struction  upwards  for  several  generations.  The  interval  be- 


fw. 


(     257     ) 

t\vcen  PANOHASIKUA  and  ISWARA  KRISHNA  is  not  particularized, 
but  was  probably  considerable,  as  no  allusion  to  the  author 
of  the  Kdrikd  occurs  in  the  older  writings.  If  his  commen 
tator  GAURAPADA  be,  as  is  not  unlikely,  the  preceptor  of 
SANKARA  ACHARYA,  ISWARA  KRISHNA  must  date  anterior  to 
the  eighth  century, 


II 

LXXIt 

THE  subjects  which  are  treated  in  seventy  couplets 
are  those  of  the  whole  science,  comprising  sixty  topics 
exclusive  of  illustrative  tales,  and  omitting  contro 
versial  questions 

COMMENT. 

We  have  here  in  the  text  reference  to  seventy  stanzas,  as 
comprising  the  doctrinal  part  of  the  Sankhya.  In  fact,  how 
ever,  there  are  but  sixty-nine,  unless  the  verse  containing  the 
notice  of  KAPILA  be  included  in  the  enumeration  ;  and  in  that 
case  it  might  be  asked,  why  should  not  the  next  stanza  at 
least,  making  mention  of  the  reputed  author,  be  also  com 
prehended,  when  there  would  be  seventy-one  verses.  The 
Scholiasts  offer  no  explanation  of  this  difficulty. 

The  sixty  topics  alluded  to  in  the  text  are,  according  to  the 
Raja  Vdrtlika,  as  cited  by  VACHESPATI,  1.  the  existence  of 
soul ;  2.  the  existence  of  nature  ;  3,  the  singleness,  4.  the 
objectiveness,  and  5.  the  subservience  of  nature  ;  and  6.  the 
multifariousness,  7,  the  distinctness,  and  8,  the  inertness,  of 
33 


<     258     ) 

soul ;  9.  the  duration  of  subtile,  and  10.  that  of  gross  body. 
These  are  the  ten  radical  categories.  To  them  are  to  be 
added,  the  five  kinds  of  obstruction,  nine  of  acquiescence, 
twenty-eight  of  disability,  and  eight  of  perfectness  ;  making 
altogether  sixty.  Another  enumeration  specifies  the  sixty 
categories  or  objects  :  1.  soul ;  2.  nature  ;  3.  intellect ;  4.  ego 
tism  ;  5 — 7.  the  three  qualities  ;  8.  the  class  of  the  five  rudi 
ments  ;  9.  that  of  the  eleven  senses  or  organs  ;  10.  that  of  the 
five  element.  These  are  the  ten  radical  paddrtkas,  or  cate 
gories.  The  remaining  fifty  are  the  same  as  those  previously 
enumerated.  In  consequence  of  comprehending  all  these 
topics,  the  Kdrikd  is  a  system,  a  sdstra  ;  not  a  partial  tract  or 
treatise,  or  prakarana* ;  although  it  omits  the  illustrative 
anecdotes  and  controversial  arguments.  The  KdriJcd  must 
consequently  refer  to  the  collection  of  KAPILA'S  aphorisms 
called  Sdnkhya  Pravachana.  This  work  is  divided  into  six 
chapters,  are  adhydyas  ;  in  the  three  first  of  which  are  con 
tained  all  the  dogmas  of  the  system  furnishing  the  materials 
of  the  Kdrikd ;  the  fourth  chapter  is  made  up  of  short  tales 
or  anecdotes,  dkhydylkds,  illustrative  of  the  Sankhya  tenets ; 
and  the  fifth  is  appropriated  to  the  refutation,  rpavav&&a,  of 
the  doctrines  of  different  schools.  Exclusive  of  these  two  sub 
jects,  ISWARA  KRISHNA  professes,  therefore,  to  give  the  sub 
stance  of  the  S.  Pravachana,  or  of  the  Sutras  of  KAPILA 
assembled  in  that  collection. 

The  Akhydyikds  are  in  general  very  brief  and  uninteresting. 
The  Sutras,  in  fact,  supply  only  a  subject  for  a  story,  which 
the  Scholiasts  may  expand  much  after  their  own  fan 
cies.  Thus  the  Sutra,  '  From  instruction  in  truth,  like  the 
king's  sonf.'  On  which  ViJNANA  BHIKSHU  narrates,  that 
*  there  was  a  king's  son,  who,  being  expelled  in  infancy  from 
his  native  city,  was  brought  up  by  a  forester,  and  growing  up 


(     259     ) 

to  maturity  in  that  state  imagined  himself,  to  belong  to  th  e 
barbarous  race  with  which  he  lived.  One  of  his  father's  minis 
ters  having  discovered  him,  revealed  to  him  what  he  was,  and 
the  misconception  of  his  character  was  removed,  and  he 
knew  himself  to  be  a  prince.  So  soul,  from  the  circumstances 
in  which  it  is  placed,  mistakes  its  own  character,  until  the 
truth  is  revealed  to  it  by  some  holy  teacher,  and  then  it  knows 
itself  to  be  Brahme*.' 

The  controversial  portion  of  the  original  Sutras  is  as  brief  as 
the  narrative,  and,  from  the  nature  of  the  subject,  much  more 
obscure.  The  argument  is  suggested,  rather  than  advanced, 
and  it  remains  for  the  Scholiast  to  amplify  and  explain  it.  A 
specimen  of  the  mode  in  which  this  is  effected  will  best  ex 
emplify  the  darkness  and  difficulty  of  this  part  of  our  subject. 
Some  modern  followers  of  the  Ve'danta  assert  that  liberation  is 
the  attainment  of  (pure)  felicity.  To  this  it  is  replied  :  *  Ma 
nifestation  of  felicity  is  not  liberation,  from  its  not  being  a 
property^.'  Thus  explained  by  the  Scholiast :  '  The  condition 
of  happiness,  or  that  of  attainment  (or  manifestation),  is  not  a 
property  of  soul.  The  nature  (of  soul)  is  eternal,  and  is 
neither  an  object  to  be  attained,  nor  the  means  of  attainment. 
Therefore  the  attainment  of  happiness  cannot  be  liberation. 
This  is  the  meaning  (of  the  Sutra^).'  '  Attainment  of  happi 
ness  in  the  region  of  BRAHMA  and  the  rest  is  a  secondary  (or 
inferior)  sort  of  liberation  ;  as  to  maintain  the  contrary  would 
be  in  opposition  to  the  text  of  the  Ve'da,  which  says  that  a 


(     260     ) 


I 


wise  man  abandons  both  joy  and  sorrow.*'  c  Further  ;  if  attain 
ment  be  a  faculty  of  soul,  what  sort  of  faculty  is  it  ?  Is  it 
constant  or  temporary.  In  the  first  case,  there  may  be,  even 
in  the  state  of  accomplishment,  still  the  existence  of  the  object 
of  soul :  in  the  last,  inasmuch  as  there  is  perishableness  of  all 
that  is  engendered  (or,  that  which  has  a  beginning  must  have 
an  end),  then  eternal  liberation  is  subject  to  termination  : 
therefore  the  attainment  (or  manifestation)  of  felicity  is  not 
chief  or  real  liberation  :  and  the  assertion  that  it  is  so,  is  a 
false  conclusion  of  the  modern  Vedantis  :  this  is  undeniable.!' 


i  SF 


t 


i  ^- 


PRINTED   AT    THE    fiUBODHA-rjlAKAyH 


FOR    SALE 


ue  following  books  published  by  the  1'heosophical  PuBLlCATi  >N  Ft'M< 
M>.  IKTY  to  be.  had  from  Mr,  Taokaram  Tatj'a,  23,  Rampart  Row  Fort, 
Boribay  ;  '^r  from  the  Manager,  Theosophist,  Adyar,  Madras, 

1.  Mr.  TaylV.*  Knglisli  Translation  of  th»-  Kiabodha  Chandrodaya 
Xv.sa.ka,  -a  dr-up  »  on  the  conflict-  i  tweer  the  higher  and  the 
lower  ni.tn,  ultimately  -  ,.«u>\  in  the  frhimph  of  tho  former, 

]>>   •;  i  -  .  ,090 

3,  i    i'AS-T  LI  s  Yo«4.\    PHILOSOPHY   with    Jihoja   Rajas   Commentary 

a.  d  their  translation*  into  English,  and  a  learned  Introduction 
by  Colonel  Olcott,  ami  an  Appendix  containing  tire  extracts 
from  .arious  authors  bearing  on  the  subject.  Price  including 
Postage ...  ...  ...  •:  6  0 

4.  English  translation  of  the  Ithagwut  (Jita.  New  edition,  revised  and 

enlarged,  by  Mr.  Charles  Wilkins  with  two  learned  iiitrodw 
tions  by  Proiessor  Manila!  X.  Dvivediand  Nobinchandra  Banarji. 
Price  inclao*ing  Postage  ..  ,.  ..  .'..  .,120 

;">,  S  \XKH Y\  KARIKA  b«jing  the  treatise  on  the  Sankhya  philosophy 
\vith  <jloin!apad;is  Commentary  aiul  their  Knglisli  translation  by 
Professor  II.  II.  Wilson  and  notes  by  T.  Colebrooke  ...  260 

Rio  VF.I-A  SVMHTTA  for  a  oopy  without  binding  Sai.scrit  Te\f  ...  400 

,,  ,,     in  "Rrown  iTalland ... 

„          ,,     in  Silk          f>  o  0 

IN  THE  PRESS. 

Rig  Vfda  S, •'  hita   with  Bhashyn  by  Sayatiaeharya.     l^'foro  l>ee  •< 
ber.  ISS7  -*iib.«   iption  in  advance      ,.4  iO  0  (t 

TJI  r,!  ... .1.",  0  0 

Afr<     !>.-'oniVfr  :  :.i)5!cviption  ia  advance.  ,.,  .         e    45  0  0 

;\rreai^  .         ,,.50  0  0 

The  highly   recommtuded   to  l>eghmers  iu  . --dint  Philosophy 

th*  y      r        cry    popularly    written    to    )«^ip  th*rn    and    prepare  thein  for